JP2017153990A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing unintended winning.SOLUTION: In order to make a ball entrance to first ball entrance means disposed in a specific area, it is necessary to vary a variable member by causing a ball entrance to second ball entrance means disposed in the specific area. In this way, even if a game ball is shot, by an operation of operation means in a prescribed operation, to the specific area where the first ball entrance means and the second ball entrance means are disposed, the game ball is configured to make an entrance at first to the second ball entrance means. As the result, even if a player unintentionally (erroneously) operated the operation means in the prescribed operation, a game ball does not enter the first ball entrance means, and therefore an unintentional winning can be suppressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 66

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine having a gaming property that adjusts the firing strength of a launching device and aims at a predetermined location in a game area when a specific state (a hit state) is reached.

JP-A-9-308730

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if a game ball is fired at a location other than a predetermined location during the above-described specific state, an unintended prize is generated, which is disadvantageous for the player. There was a problem.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress such unintended winnings.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on a player's operation, and the game ball can reach a specific area in the game area. The launch control means for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch means based on the player's operation, and a predetermined game value based on the game ball being placed in the specific area. A first entrance means to be provided, a second entrance means disposed in the specific area and different from the first entrance means, and the first entrance means rather than the second entrance means. A variable member that is variable between a first state in which the game ball is easily guided and a second state in which the game ball is more easily guided to the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means; Variable control means for changing the variable member to the first state; And a, and re-variable control means for variably to the second state.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the launching means capable of launching the game ball to the game area based on the player's operation, and the game ball so that the game ball can reach a specific area in the game area. A launch control means for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch means based on a user's operation, and a first game value that is arranged in the specific area and is given a predetermined game value based on the game ball entering. A ball entry means, a second ball entry means arranged in the specific area and different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball is guided to the first ball entry means rather than the second ball entry means. A variable member that is variable between a first state that is easy and a second state in which the game ball is more easily guided to the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means; and from the second state to the first state. Variable control means for varying the variable member; and from the first state to the second state. And a, and re-variable control means for varying the.

  Thereby, in order to enter the first entrance means arranged in the specific area, the first member is made to enter the second entrance means arranged in the specific area, and thereby the first variable member is inserted into the first entrance means. It is necessary to change the state. Therefore, even if a game ball is fired to a specific area where the first and second ball entry means are arranged based on the operation means being operated by a predetermined operation, first the second ball is thrown. A game ball enters the means. As a result, even if the player does not intend (inadvertently) operate the operation means with a predetermined operation, the game ball does not enter the first ball entry means, and the unintended winning is suppressed. be able to.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) And (b) is the partial expanded front view which saw through a part of back of the game board in 1st Embodiment from the front side. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the 3rd symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen of the apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the effect screen of the press suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the effect screen of the press suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the discharge control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) showed typically the content of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. FIG. (A) is the figure which showed typically the 1st hit random number table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the 1st hit type selection table in 1st Embodiment typically. (C) is the figure which showed typically the 2nd random number table in 1st Embodiment, (d) is the figure which showed typically the content of the fluctuation | variation pattern table in 1st Embodiment. . (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for 1st special symbols in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the variation pattern table for special figure 1 big hits in 1st Embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for extraordinary (unusual) variation in FIG. 1 in the first embodiment, and (d) is a diagram in the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram schematically showing a deviation pattern table (probability change). (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for 2nd special symbols in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the variation pattern table for special figure 2 jackpots in 1st Embodiment. (C) is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 2 small hits in 1st Embodiment, (d) is the figure 2 in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the fluctuation pattern table for deviation typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the effect change selection table in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of the work RAM of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation in 1st Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A in 1st Embodiment, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the effect change process at the time of winning performed performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo production change process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation change process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the suggestion effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the V interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed round number command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production change command processing which is done. (A) is the flowchart which showed the suggestion effect command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of a 1st embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 4th modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 5th modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 6th modification of a 1st embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 65, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a view of the game board 13 when the game board 13 is viewed from the front. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged front view of the back side, and FIG. 4 is a back view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a certain firing strength (second prize opening 640 (described later) A skip switch 51c for launching a game ball with a launch intensity) that can enter the ball (see FIG. 2), and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. Built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. It should be noted that, here, even if the ball is fired with the maximum amount of rotation, the game ball hits the second winning opening 640, which will be described later, so that the game ball collides with the return rubber 600a. Fired at a firing intensity). As a result, even if the operation handle 51 is rotated and the game ball is fired, the second winning opening 640 can not be won (difficult to win). In order to win the second winning slot 640, skip. It can be configured to easily win a prize by firing a game ball using the switch 51c. Therefore, the operation for making a prize at the second prize opening 640 can be another operation, and the player can intentionally make a prize at the second prize opening 640 easily. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  When the skip switch 51c of the operation handle 51 is on (when pressed), a ball is launched with a constant strength regardless of the resistance value of the variable resistor described above. Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, by changing the power value (voltage value) supplied to the launch solenoid 142 (see FIG. 8), the launch intensity of the game ball is changed from 0% which is the minimum launch intensity to the maximum. It is configured to be variable up to 100%, which is the firing intensity. When the skip switch 51c is off (when the skip switch 51c is not pressed), the firing strength ranges from 0% (a state in which no game ball is fired) to 90% (in FIG. 2). 2 (see the broken line b), and when the skip switch 51c is on (depressed), 100% (the broken line in FIG. 2) regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. a)).

  As will be described in detail later, when the skip switch 51c is turned on, the firing strength at which the game ball is fired is the largest of the firing strengths (0 to 90%) that can be varied according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The firing intensity (100%, see broken line a in FIG. 2) is stronger than the firing intensity (90%, see broken line b in FIG. 2). This 100% launch intensity is such that the game ball can reach a second prize opening 640 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the skip switch is off (when not pressed), the game ball is launched at a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 as described above. As a result, at the firing strength (0 to 90%) corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, the game ball does not reach the second winning opening 640 (or is difficult). Thereby, only when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the game ball can be entered into the second winning opening 640 (or can be easily entered).

  In the present embodiment, by pressing the skip switch 51c, the game ball is fired with a firing strength (100%) different from the firing strength (0 to 90%) corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation range (turning range) of the operation handle 51 may be expanded (or varied) by pressing the skip switch 51c. Good.

  Specifically, when the skip switch 51c is not pressed, a rotation operation that rotates rightward (clockwise) at a position where the rotation operation amount becomes a predetermined firing intensity (90%). To regulate. On the other hand, when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the restriction is released, and it is possible to further rotate rightward (clockwise) from a position where the rotation operation amount becomes a predetermined firing intensity (90%). Accordingly, by pressing the skip switch 51c, it is possible to perform a turning operation in a range where the firing intensity is 0 to 100%. As a result, the amount of rotation operation can be increased when the skip switch 51c is pressed, and the firing strength at which a game ball can be shot can be changed depending on whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the second winning opening 640 only when the skip switch 51c is pressed as described above.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 may be changed by pressing the skip switch 51c. Specifically, two types of variable resistors for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 are provided, and the firing strength is determined based on the electric resistance of which variable resistor depending on whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed. What is necessary is just to make it switch. In this case, even if the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51c is the same, the type of the variable resistor used is switched according to whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed. Therefore, the detected electric resistance is different, that is, the set firing intensity is different. As a result, the firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 can be changed according to whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed.

  Thereby, for example, when the skip switch 51c is not pressed, the firing strength based on the operation of the operation handle 51 is set to the firing strength (0 to 50%) at which the game ball is launched on the left side of the game board 13, while When the skip switch 51c is pressed, the firing strength based on the operation of the operation handle 51 is set to a firing strength (50 to 100%) at which a game ball is launched on the right side of the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of easily hitting the game balls on the left side and the right side of the game board 13.

  Note that the skip switch 51c in the present embodiment is turned on only while the player is pressing, but is not limited to this, and the on state and the off state are switched every time the player performs a pressing operation. Things can be used. Thus, when the skip switch 51c is continuously turned on, it is not necessary to keep pressing the skip switch 51c, so that the operation load on the player can be reduced.

  Although the skip switch 51c is provided on the operation handle 51, the invention is not limited to this, and the skip switch 51c may be disposed at another position or may be shared with other buttons (for example, the frame button 22). Further, the skip switch 51c is not limited to a button, and may be other operation means such as a lever. When the frame button 22 and the skip switch 51c are shared, the game ball is fired based on the operation of the frame button 22 only in a specific state (for example, during execution of the press suggestion effect). In other states, the game ball may not be fired. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being fired during an effect (so-called button press effect) that suggests pressing the frame button 22 simply for the purpose of improving the effect of the effect.

  Further, the launch strength is changed based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c so that the player can launch at the launch strength intended by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and the player can set the launch strength. It is good also as a structure which makes it easy to recognize. For example, when the operation handle 51 is rotated to the right (clockwise) and is rotated to the right (clockwise) from the position where the rotation operation amount becomes a predetermined firing intensity (90%). (In other words, when the firing intensity exceeds 90%), the player is notified by turning on the LED, outputting a sound, or displaying a screen. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily recognize that the game is being executed with the firing strength exceeding the predetermined firing strength (90%).

  Further, without providing the skip switch 51c, the rotation range of the operation handle 51 is set to a firing intensity of 0% to 100%, and the turning force required for the rotation corresponding to the range of 90% to 100% is set high. You may comprise so that it may leave. With this configuration, the player can intentionally increase the turning power and rotate the operation handle 51 to launch the game ball with a firing strength stronger than 90%. By operating the operation handle 51 with a turning force smaller than the turning force corresponding to the firing strength stronger than%, it is possible to easily launch the game ball with any firing strength between 0% and 90% ( That is, the problem of unintentionally launching a game ball with a launch intensity higher than 90% can be suppressed).

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, A winning opening 64, a right first winning opening 641, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a normal winning opening (through gate) 67, a rotating accessory 680, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof. The part is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is provided on the right side of the center of the game board 13. The normal winning opening 67 is a winning opening having a gate-type sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal winning opening 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed in response to the passing of the game ball to the normal winning opening 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “○” and “×” are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “×”) is stopped (lit). If a ball passes through the normal winning opening 67 while the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed.

  If it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory 641a is activated, and the ordinary electric accessory provided along with the first right winning opening 641 that is normally maintained in an upright position. 641a is moved to a substantially V-shape (reverse C-shape) from a state in which it stands up substantially vertically. As a result, the game ball is guided by the ordinary electric accessory 641a moved in a substantially V shape (inverted C shape), and enters the right first winning opening 641 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). It becomes easy to sphere. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display device 83.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose variation display is not executed among the balls won in the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641, the second winning port 640, and the normal winning port 67. A certain number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds of big hits and error indications are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left 7-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display (in this embodiment, 7 segments) is determined until the variable time (dynamic display time) elapses, which is determined based on winning in the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641. After the center segment blinks), it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. In the case where the determination result is off, a symbol “-” indicating that the center segment is off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbol indicating a deviation such as symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the win is displayed. The second lottery game is configured similarly to the first lottery game. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a variation time is set for each variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time by a variation pattern that becomes reach and a variation pattern that does not reach. As described above, even when the time is roughly sorted according to a constant reference (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the dynamics related to the time information Corresponds to the display mode.

  In addition, the time information until the fluctuation start time corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the rough fluctuation pattern time information described above (for example, whether it is a long-time fluctuation pattern). Information on time information determined based on (for example, the number of long-time variation patterns performed before the start of variation) also falls under this category.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol lottery is performed in response to the winning of the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641, and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, the jackpot type selected corresponding to the set gaming state and the special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) is set.

  In the normal gaming state where the jackpot probability is low and the normal symbol hit probability is also set to a low probability, the jackpot type of the first special symbol is jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot (until next time electric power support)), jackpot B (16R hour junior big hit (electric support 100 times)) is prepared. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol, jackpot E (2R probability variation with time short and large jackpot (no electric support) (so-called 2R latent probability variation jackpot)), jackpot F (2R normal jackpot (no electric support)) is prepared Yes.

  In addition, in the electric support game state (probability game state, short-time game state) in which the jackpot probability is low or high and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a high probability, the jackpot type of the first special symbol is as described above. A jackpot type similar to that in the normal gaming state is prepared. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol, “jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot (until next time electric support))” and “hit D (2R short time jackpot (electric support 100 times))” are prepared.

  As described above, by setting the jackpot type, in the normal gaming state, the details will be described later, but it is easy for the player to intentionally win the second winning port 640, but the bonus game bonus that can be obtained It is less than the first special symbol. Specifically, if you win a jackpot with the first special symbol, a jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot (until next time electric support)) or jackpot B (16R short-term jackpot (electric support 100 times)) will be set, so it will be a big hit of 16 rounds One round of 100 game balls can be obtained, and 16 rounds of 1600 game balls can be obtained. On the other hand, even if the second special symbol is a big hit ("big hit E (2R probability change time short no big hit (no electric support))" or "big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))") In addition, in one round, since it is an open time (one round 0.5 seconds) as to whether or not one ball can win a specific entrance 65a, which will be described later, it is a big hit that almost no game balls can be obtained It has become. Furthermore, in the first special symbol, after the big hit game, it always shifts to the electric support state that makes it easy for the game ball to win the right first winning port 641, but in the second special symbol, it shifts to the electric support state after the big hit game. It has a configuration that does not.

  Thereby, even when a fraud in which a game is played so that a game ball is awarded only to the second winning port 640, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game store side is greatly damaged. Further, as will be described later, if lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed in a state where the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed for a predetermined time or more, an error display (display mode for calling a store clerk or current A display mode indicating that the gaming method is illegal) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an alarm sound or sound indicating an error is output even by sound. Further, an error signal is also output to the external output terminal 261 and notified to the hall computer. Thereby, the game store side can also identify an unauthorized game method at an early stage, and can suppress damage caused by an unauthorized game.

  The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. Indicated.

  Here, “16R probable jackpot (with electric support)” means that the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds (one round is 30 seconds or up to 10 balls), and then a special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) It is a big hit that shifts to a high probability state in which a lottery probability of symbols is set high and becomes a short-time state (a normal symbol has a high probability of winning). In addition, “16R short junior jackpot” shifts to a low probability state in which the lottery probability of a special symbol is set low after the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds (one round is up to 30 seconds or 10 ball winning), Between the predetermined number of fluctuations (in this embodiment, 100 fluctuations) is a big hit that results in a short time state. "2R latent probability variation jackpot (no electric support)" is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds (1 round is 0.5 seconds or up to 10 balls). is there. In this case, unlike the big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support)), the short time state (electric support state) is not given. The “2R normal jackpot (without electric support)” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot game with respect to the above-mentioned 2R latent probability variation jackpot (without electric support). The jackpot of “2R probable jackpot (until next time for electric support)” is that the maximum number of rounds will be two rounds (one round is up to 0.5 seconds or 10 ball winnings), then the transition to a high probability state and the next time It is a big hit that shifts to the short-time gaming state until the big hit. The jackpot of “2R regular jackpot (100 times of power support)” is a transition to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is two rounds (one round is up to 0.5 seconds or 10 ball winnings), and it is off It is a big hit that shifts to the short-time gaming state up to a maximum of 100 variations of special symbols.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the right first winning opening 641. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. Also, the short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the normal symbol hit probability is increased, and the right first winning opening 641 It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a state of a game in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the normal symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probability change (excluding the latent probability change state) and during time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, but the time and number of times that the electric accessory 641a attached to the right first winning opening 641 is opened are also changed. A longer time and a larger number of times of opening than the inside are set. When the electric accessory 641a is in an open state (open state), the ball wins the right first prize opening 641 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 641a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Thus, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the right first winning opening 641, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or in a short time, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 641a attached to the right first prize opening 641, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 641a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 641a is released at the time and once the electric accessory 641a attached to the right first winning opening 641 is released. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the probability that the electric symbol 641a associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is not opened or the number of times the electric character 641a is released per time is not given. However, it may be changed so as to be higher than normal. Furthermore, it may be configured to change the length of the fluctuation time without changing the normal symbol hit probability. Specifically, the winning probability is set to 1/1, the normal time is set to 5 minutes or the like, and the normal time is set to 0.5 seconds, so that the right first prize opening 641 is set. The game ball may be set so as to be switchable to a state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball.

  Next, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged below the game area. As game balls win the general winning opening 63, 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls. A variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640. 3D display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that displays the variation of the 3rd symbol, and the normal symbol variation display using the passage of the sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 8). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel. Details of display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 641a attached to the right first winning port 641 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a period of time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 641a of the first right winning port 641. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the right first winning port 641 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It should be noted that the right first prize opening 641 during the probability change or in the short time can be increased by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the probability change or in the time short, and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 641a per time. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A lottery for the first special symbol is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in front view, a right first winning opening 641 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the right first winning port 641, a right first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the right first prize port switch is turned on, the main control device (see FIG. 4) causes the second first prize port switch to be turned on in the same manner as when the first prize port switch is turned on. A lottery of one special symbol is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  Here, the first winning port 64 and the right first winning port 641 are each one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball is won at each prize opening is configured to be the same, but may be different. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the first prize opening 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the right first prize slot 641 is five. Good.

  The right first winning opening 641 is accompanied by an electric accessory 641a. The electric accessory 641a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 641a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the right first winning opening 641. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 641a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the right first winning opening 641.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 641a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and during the time reduction, the time for which the electric accessory 641a is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the right first winning opening 641 when the probability is changing and when the time is shorter than normal.

  Here, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the first right winning port 641, and the ball is in a state where the ball can be always won. On the other hand, the right first winning opening 641 is provided with an electric accessory 641a. During normal times (when the time is not short), it is difficult to open the electric accessory 641a, and a game ball enters the right first winning opening 641. It is in a difficult state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winning combination 641a associated with the right first winning opening 641 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the right first winning opening 641, so the first winning opening without the electric winning combination To 64, the ball is fired so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lottery win lottery opportunity is obtained by winning the first winning opening 64, It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the shortage of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 641a associated with the first right winning port 641 is easily opened, and the right first winning port 641 is likely to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the first right winning opening 641 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 and the electric accessory. It is advantageous for the player to open the 641a and obtain a lot of jackpot lottery opportunities by winning the right first winning opening 641 so as to aim for winning.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Next, in the game area above the right side of the game area and above the through gate 67 and the right first winning opening 641, a sphere is placed on the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the right first winning opening 641. An operation port 670 is disposed at a position where a game ball launched so as to pass (so-called “right-handed”) can enter. The details will be described with reference to FIG. 3, but when a game ball enters the operation port 670, the non-electric accessory 640 a provided along with the second winning port 640 is opened (second state). The winning ball 640 is changed to a state in which a game ball can be entered.

  In addition, on the upper side of the operation port 670, a rotating tool 680 composed of a rotating body 681 and a case member 682 is disposed. The rotating body 681 is pivotally supported by the case member 682 so as to be rotatable, and the case member 682 having an opening through which one game ball can pass at two positions on the outer periphery of the rotating body 681 is a game. It is arranged by being screwed to the board. The operation opening 670 described above is disposed below the lower opening 682b, which is an opening on the lower side of the case member 682, and the game ball flowing down from the lower opening 682b of the case member 682 is the operation opening 670. To enter.

  The rotating body 681 has a circular outer shape and has a thickness equivalent to one game ball. Around the periphery, one recess 681a into which one game ball can enter is formed, and a rotation motor 681a (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 13 makes one rotation 5 seconds in the right direction (clockwise). It is always rotated at a rotational speed of. Therefore, when a game ball enters the upper opening 682a that is the upper opening of the case member 682, if the recess 681a of the rotating body 681 is positioned on the upper side (below the upper opening 682a), A game ball enters the recess 681a. Then, when the rotating body 681 rotates and the concave portion 681a into which the game ball enters is rotated downward (above the lower opening 682b), the game ball is moved from the lower opening 682b to the outside of the case member 682. And then enters a working port 670 disposed immediately below.

  On the other hand, when a game ball enters the upper opening 682a of the case member 682, if the recess 681a of the rotating body 681 is positioned at a position other than the upper side, the game ball enters the inside of the case member 682. I can't. Here, the gap between the case member 682 and the rotating body 681 is very narrow (1 mm in this embodiment), and a part of the outer shape of the rotating body 681 that is not the recess 681a protrudes from the upper opening 682a of the case member 682. It is configured as follows. The case member 682 is formed with a very small thickness (1 mm in this embodiment) with respect to the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, at the right end of the upper opening 682a of the case member 682, a wall portion having a diameter (11 mm) equivalent to one game ball is provided in the vertical direction. As a result, when the recess 681a of the rotating body 681 is located at a position other than the upper side, the game ball that could not enter the inside of the case member 682 is transferred from the upper portion of the rotating body 681 to the rotating body 681. It flows down to the lower left along the outline. Then, after overcoming the thickness (1 mm) of the case member 682 provided on the outer periphery of the rotating body 681, it flows down to the lower game area where the through gate 67 and the right first winning port 641 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, when the nail on the through gate 67 is adjusted so that it does not easily flow down to the through gate 67, the game ball easily flows down to the rotating accessory 680. However, the through gate 67 is provided in the game area in the lower left of the rotating combination 680, which is a gaming area in which game balls that have not entered the inside of the rotating combination 680 flow down. Therefore, even if it is adjusted that it is difficult for the game ball to flow down to the through gate 67, the game ball that does not flow down to the through gate 67 but flows down to the rotating accessory 680 then flows down to the through gate 67. . As a result, the adjustment that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the through gate 67 can be made difficult, and the adjustment that is disadvantageous to the player can be suppressed.

  Thus, in the rotating combination 680, only one ball enters the concave portion 681a of the rotating body 681 every 5 seconds, and enters the operation port 670. As a result, game balls excessively enter the operation opening 670, and it becomes difficult for the game balls to enter the right first winning opening 641 and the specific winning opening 65a provided below the operation opening 670. Can be suppressed.

  Note that the rotational speed of the rotating body 681 in the rotating member 680 is not limited to the above-described one, and it may be possible to enter one ball every 10 seconds, or enter one ball every 3 seconds. It may be possible to make a ball. Further, the rotational speed of the rotating body 681 may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is not a right-handed gaming state, the rotational speed of the rotating body 681 is slowed (the rotational speed at which one ball can be entered every minute), and the gaming state is a right-handed state. The rotational speed of the rotating body 681 is increased (the rotational speed at which one ball can be entered every 5 seconds). Furthermore, if it is not a specific gaming state, it may be controlled so that the rotating body 681 is not rotated, or the rotating speed is high so that a gaming ball cannot enter the receiving portion 681a of the rotating body 681. You may control to. Thus, if the gaming state is not a specific gaming state (for example, a right-handed gaming state), the gaming ball can enter the receiving portion 681a of the rotating body 681, and the gaming ball cannot enter the operating port 670. . As a result, even though the gaming state is not a specific gaming state (for example, a right-handed gaming state), the gaming ball enters the operation port 670 and tries to enter the second winning port 640. Cheating can be suppressed.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that both the rotary body 681 and the case member 682 for restricting the entrance to the rotary body 681 may rotate. Specifically, when both the recess 681a of the rotating body 681 and the opening of the case member 682 are on the upper side, the game ball can enter the recess 681a of the rotating body 681, and the recess of the rotating body 681 When both the opening 681a and the opening of the case member 682 are on the lower side, the game ball in the recess 681a can flow down to the operation port 670. By making the rotational speeds of the rotating body 651 and the case member 682 different, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the timing at which the game ball enters the recess 681a of the rotating body 681. As a result, an illegal act of intentionally causing the game ball to enter the operation port 670 and then entering the second winning port 640 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rotating combination 680 is provided in order to suppress the entry into the operation port 670. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other operations are provided to the operation port 670. It is possible to prevent an excessive amount of game balls from entering. For example, you may make it provide the accessory formed with the bell-shaped board | plate material which slides to the position which protrudes in the upper part of the action | operation opening | mouth 670, and a position buried, and distributes the game ball which entered into the right-and-left or the front-back direction. One of the distribution destinations of the distribution device may be the operation port 670. Further, an electric combination may be provided at the operation port 670, and the electric combination may be operated (variable) to switch between a state where the game ball is easy to enter and a state where it is difficult to enter. Further, this electric accessory may be opened and closed by a lottery result based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 67. Furthermore, an interval of a certain period may be required so that the electric accessory can be operated (variable). Specifically, it is only necessary to enable (variable) the electric combination based on the lottery result executed based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 67 and to increase the time required for the lottery. Thereby, it can suppress that it enters into the operation port 670 excessively. In addition, by suppressing entry into the operation port 670, entry into the second winning opening 640 can be suppressed, and fluctuations based on the first special symbol are excessively skipped (shortened). It can suppress that gambling is too high.

  A second winning port 640 is provided at the upper right side of the game board 13 and further above the operation port 670 and the rotating accessory 680. The second winning port 640 is a winning port through which one ball is paid out as a winning ball when a ball wins. As described above, the position where the second winning opening 640 is provided is configured to easily win a prize by firing a game ball using the skip switch 51c. That is, the player can easily (intentionally) win the second prize opening 640 intentionally. Therefore, the number of winning balls to be paid out based on winning in the second winning opening 640 is set to be smaller than that of the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641. Thereby, even when the player is deliberate to play a game so that the player can intentionally win the game ball only at the second winning port 640, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game store side is greatly damaged.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the winning of the second prize opening 640 is one, whereas in order to enter a game ball into the second prize opening 640, more than one game ball is required. Necessary. Specifically, in order to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 640, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the operation port 670 and to open the non-electrically-powered object 640a. Game balls are required. As a result, the number of game balls required to win a prize to the second prize opening 640 increases with respect to the prize balls paid out based on the winning of the second prize slot 640. Even if the game is fraudulently performed so as to win a prize, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game shop side is greatly damaged. Further, it is possible to weaken the motivation for performing an illegal game such that a player wins a game ball only in the second winning port 640, and the above-described illegal game can be suppressed from being executed.

  When a game ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the second special symbol is drawn in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) due to the second prize opening switch being turned on, a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown in the first symbol display device 37B. . Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed even while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. Then, during the change of the first special symbol, when the result of the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of being a big hit or a small hit, the change display of the first special symbol being changed is forcibly changed. Stopped (hereinafter referred to as forced stop). Therefore, the game ball fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed enters the second winning port 640 that executes the lottery of the second special symbol, so that when the player presses the skip switch 51c, It is possible to forcibly stop, that is, skip (hereinafter referred to as “skip”) the display of fluctuation of one special symbol in the middle of the fluctuation time.

  In the present embodiment, during the change of the first special symbol, when the result of the change display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of being a big hit or small hit, the change of the first special symbol being changed Although the display is forcibly stopped, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the variable display in which the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win is started (or after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display is started), the variable display of the first special symbol being changed is displayed. You may comprise so that it may be forcibly stopped. Thereby, the timing at which the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped can be advanced, and an impression that the variation display is skipped can be given to the player more strongly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the change display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of being a big hit or a small hit during the change of the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol being changed Although the display is forcibly stopped and the lottery result based on the forcibly stopped change is invalidated, the present invention is not limited to this. If the result of the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner that results in a big or small win during the change of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol that is changing is temporarily stopped, The variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped may be resumed after the big hit game or the small hit game of the second special symbol is finished. Thereby, when the lottery result based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is a lottery result advantageous to the player, the lottery result is invalidated and prevented from being disadvantageous to the player. it can.

  The second prize opening 640 is provided with a non-electrical accessory 640a (see FIGS. 3A and 3B). This non-electrical accessory 640a has a closed state (see FIG. 3A) in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the second winning port 640, and a game ball can enter the second winning port 640. It is mechanically actuated (variable) to an open state (see FIG. 3B). Specifically, the non-electrical accessory 640a is disposed at the left end of the second prize opening 640 and is maintained in a standing state (see FIG. 3A), and the lower end of the non-electrical accessory 640a. It is mechanically actuated (variable) to an open state (FIG. 3 (b)) maintained at a position rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the pivot shaft 640b (see FIG. 3). .

  This non-electrical accessory 640a is activated (variable) by opening one game ball into the operation port 670, and closed when one game ball enters the second winning port 640. Is activated (variable).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 3, a structure in which the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is actuated (variable) based on the ball entering the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 is described. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of the back of the gaming board 13 where the operation port 670 and the second winning port 640 are disposed as seen through from the front. FIG. 3A illustrates a state in which the non-electric actor 640a is activated (variable) in the closed state, and FIG. 3B illustrates that the non-electric actor 640a is activated (variable) in the open state. The state is shown. The non-electric accessory 640a is activated (variable) based on the game ball entering the operation port 670 and is activated based on the game ball entering the second winning port 640. (Variable).

  As shown in FIG. 3, an opening / closing switching member 902 for opening / closing the non-electric accessory 640 a is disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and when the opening / closing switching member 902 is rotated, The non-electric accessory 640a is actuated (variable) between a closed state and an open state. The opening / closing switching member 902 has a thin rectangular shape, and a rotation shaft 902a that is pivotally supported by a base body disposed on the back side of the opening / closing switching member 902 (not shown) is formed.

  The opening / closing switching member 902 enters the operation port 670 and the first channel switching member 900f that is rotatably provided in the first discharge channel 900 through which the game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 flows down. A second flow path switching member 901f rotatably provided in the second discharge flow path 901 where the game ball flows down is connected via a first connection member 903 and a second connection member 904, respectively.

  The opening / closing switching member 902 and the first connecting portion 903 are fixed so that the upper portion of the opening / closing switching member 902 (above the rotating shaft 902a) and one end side of the first connecting portion 903 are rotatable. And the 1st connection part 903 and the 1st flow path switching member 903 are fixing so that the other end part of the 1st connection part 903 and the one end side of the 1st flow path switching member 900f can rotate.

  Here, the first flow path switching member 900f is formed in a dogleg shape, and a center portion (rotating shaft 900f3) is rotatably fixed in the first discharge flow path 901. Although the detailed configuration of the first flow path switching member 900f will be described later, the first switching member 903 slides rightward when the rotation switching member 902 rotates rightward about the rotation shaft 902a. Thus, the first flow path switching member 900f is also rotated rightward about the rotation shaft 900f3.

  As a result, the first flow path switching member 900f closes the left first discharge flow path 900d, and the game ball is guided to the right first discharge flow path (the state shown in FIG. 3A). As shown in FIG. 3 (b), the first flow path switching member 900f closes the left first discharge flow path 900d and the right first discharge flow path 900c, and the game ball is moved to the first flow path switching member 900f. It is switched so as to guide to the two walls f2. In addition, the first flow path switching member 900f, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 and collides with the second wall portion 900f2 in the state shown in FIG. 3B, By rotating to the left by force (self-weight), the state shown in FIG. In this case, the first flow path switching member 900f slides the first connecting member 903 leftward, thereby rotating the rotation switching member 902 leftward.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 3A, one end of the second connecting member 904 is rotatably connected to the lower side of the rotation shaft 902a of the rotation switching member 902 as described above. In addition, one end of the second flow path switching member 901f (one end of the third wall portion 901f1) is rotatably connected to the other end side of the second connecting member 904. In the state shown in FIG. 3A, the second flow path switching member 901f is configured such that the first flow path switching member 900f closes the left second discharge flow path 901d and the right second discharge flow path 901c. The game ball is arranged (switched) in a state in which the game ball is guided to the wall portion 901f2. In this case, when a game ball enters the operation port 670, the game ball that has entered the fourth wall portion 901f2 collides, and the second flow path switching member 901f moves to the left (by the force (self-weight) of the game ball ( The second connecting member 904 is slid in the left direction, and the rotation switching member 902 is rotated in the right direction (clockwise) in conjunction with the rotation. When the rotation switching member 902 is rotated to the right, the first connecting member 903 is slid to the right, so that the first flow path switching member 900f is rotated to the right as described above, and FIG. It is switched to the state shown in (b). In addition, as described above, when entering the second winning opening 640 in the state shown in FIG. 3B, the first flow path switching member 900f is rotated in the left direction, and the first connecting member 903 is moved. By sliding leftward, the rotation switching member 902 is rotated leftward (counterclockwise), and the second flow path switching member 901f1 is rotated rightward (clockwise), and FIG. Switch to the state shown in.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, when a game ball enters the operation port 670, the game ball wins the second winning port 640 when the second flow path switching member 901f rotates. Then, the first flow path switching member 900f is flowed down (discharged) to the left first discharge flow path 900c without rotating. Here, in the state shown in FIG. 3A, the weight member 640c is stopped (pressed) in a state where the weight member 640c is rotated clockwise (clockwise) at the upper end portion of the rotation switching member 902. Although the details will be described later, the weight member 640c and the non-electrically-powered object 640a configured in a blade shape are fixed, and are fixed to the rotating shaft 640b so as to rotate together. When the rotation switching member 902 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) as shown in FIG. 3B, the contact between the weight member 640c and the rotation switching member 902 is released, and the weight member The counterweight is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) by the own weight of 640c, and the non-electric accessory 640a is also rotated counterclockwise. In this case, the weight member 640c is rotated to a position facing vertically downward and stopped. Thereby, the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is changed to an open state in which it is easy to win the game ball to the second winning opening 640a.

  Thus, when the first flow path switching member 900f is rotated, the open / close switching member 902 connected to the first flow path switching member 900f via the first connection member 903 is moved to the left (counterclockwise). Is rotated. As a result, the non-electric accessory 640a is closed (see FIG. 3A).

  On the other hand, the second flow path switching member 901f is rotated by the game ball that has entered the operation port 670. When the second flow path switching member 901f is rotated, the open / close switching member 902 connected to the second flow path switching member via the second connecting member 904 is rotated rightward (clockwise). . As a result, the non-electric accessory 640a is opened (see FIG. 3B).

  Specifically, first, a structure in which the opening / closing of the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is mechanically actuated (variable) by the rotation of the opening / closing switching member 902 will be described. Thereafter, a structure in which the opening / closing switching member 902 is rotated based on the ball entering the second winning port 640 or the operation port 670 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3 (a), a rotating shaft 640b rotatably connected to a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing is connected to the lower end portion of the non-electrically-powered object 640a. The upper end portion of the weight member 640c is connected to the rotary shaft 640b on the back side of the first discharge channel on the back side of the base plate 60 and the game balls that have entered the second winning port 640 flow down. The weight member 640c is connected so as to be in a position rotated 60 degrees clockwise around the upper end portion of the weight member 640c when the non-electrically acting object 640a is oriented in the vertical direction, and is not connected to the weight member 640c. The relative position with respect to the electric accessory 640a is fixed so as not to change.

  Below the weight member 640c, an open / close switching member 902 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape is pivotable about the rotation shaft 902a at the center portion, and the upper end portion is pivoted to a position where it can come into contact with the weight member 640c. It is supported. The open / close switching member 902 is pivotally supported so that the longest side is in the vertical direction. The first connecting member 903 is above the rotating shaft 902a, and the second connecting member 904 is below the rotating shaft 902a. Each is connected from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Although details will be described later, the first connecting member 903 and the second connecting member 904 are movable by a predetermined distance (30 mm) in the left-right direction. Since the movable range of the first connecting member 903 and the second connecting member 904 is limited, the rotation range of the opening / closing switching member 902 is also limited.

  Specifically, the opening / closing switching member 902 is a position rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 902a from the vertical state, and the upper end portion of the opening / closing switching member 902 contacts the weight member 640c and the weight member A position where the opening / closing switching member 902 is rotated 30 degrees clockwise around the rotation shaft 902a from a first position where the 640c is rotated 60 degrees clockwise (see FIG. 3A). In the range up to the second position (see FIG. 3B) that does not contact the weight member 640c, it can rotate.

  Therefore, when the first connecting member 903 is moved leftward and the second connecting member 904 is moved rightward, that is, when the open / close switching member 902 is at the first position (see FIG. 3A). Since the weight member 640c is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees by the opening / closing switching member 902 rotated to the left, the non-electrically acting object 640a connected to the weight member 640c via the rotation shaft 640b is provided. It becomes vertical (closed state).

  On the other hand, when the first connecting member 903 is moved to the right and the second connecting member 904 is moved to the left, that is, when the open / close switching member 902 is in the second position (see FIG. 3B). Is rotated to a position where the open / close switching member 902 is in the right direction and does not contact the weight member 640c. Here, the weight member 640c is formed of metal (aluminum), and has a larger mass than the non-electrically acting member 640a formed of resin, and thus the non-electrically acting member 640a and the weight member 640c are connected by the rotation shaft 640b. The position of the center of gravity in this state is approximately the same position as the center of gravity (center) of the weight member 640c. As a result, when the opening / closing switching member 902 is in the second position (see FIG. 3B), the opening / closing switching member 902 does not contact the weight member 640c, so that the weight member 640c has the weight member 640c vertical. At the position, that is, the position where the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise around the lower end (rotary shaft 640b) (the open state).

  In addition, when the position of the center of gravity in the state where the non-electrical accessory 640a and the weight member 640c are connected by the rotation shaft 640b is not approximately the same position as the center of gravity (center) of the weight member 640c, that is, the weight member 640c is not vertical. When stationary in the direction, the relative position (angle) between the weight member 640c and the non-electrically acting member 640a may be adjusted as appropriate.

  Thus, the open / close switching member 902 rotates between the first position (see FIG. 3A) that contacts the weight member 640c and the second position (see FIG. 3A) that does not contact the weight member 640c. By being moved, the non-electrical accessory 640a is opened and closed.

  Next, a structure for rotating the open / close switching member 902 will be described. The first flow path switching member 900f is connected to the other end of the first connection member 903 connected to the open / close switching member 902, and the second flow path switching member 901f is connected to the other end of the second connection member 904. Is connected.

  First, the open / close switching member 902 is moved to the second position by the game ball that enters the second winning port 640 and flows down the first discharge channel 900 (see a state where the open / close switching member 902 is rotated to the right, see FIG. 3B). Will be described from the first position to the first position (the state rotated to the left, see FIG. 3A). Thereafter, the game ball that enters the operation port 670 and flows down the second discharge channel 901 causes the opening / closing switching member to move from the first position (the state in which the opening / closing switching member is rotated to the left, see FIG. 3A). The case where it is rotated to two positions (the state rotated rightward, see FIG. 3B) will be described.

  The game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 passes through a through hole provided at the mounting position of the second winning port 640 and flows down to the first discharge channel 900 on the back side of the game board 13. The first discharge channel 900 is formed in a substantially U shape so that a game ball can flow inside, and is arranged with the back side of the position where the second winning port 640 is arranged as the upper end. Is done. The first discharge channel is formed in the first guide channel 900a from the upper end, which is the position on the back side of the second winning port 640, to the lower left direction toward the left side of the open / close switching member 902. .

  A first channel switching unit 900b is formed at the lower end of the first guide channel. A first channel switching member 900f is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the game board 13 so as to be rotatable about the rotation shaft 900f3, and is downstream of the first channel switching unit 900b. On the side, a right first discharge channel 900c and a left first discharge channel 900d are formed downward. Although details will be described later, when the first flow path switching member 900 is in the first position (see FIG. 3A), the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 enters the right first discharge flow path 900c. When the first flow path switching member 900d is in the second position (see FIG. 3B), the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 moves the first flow path switching member 900d to the first position. While rotating to the position, it flows down to the left first discharge flow path 900d. The game ball that has flowed down to the right first discharge channel 900c or the left first discharge channel 900d is a channel member for discharging the game ball from the back side of the game board 13 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (island facilities, etc.). It flows down to the collective cage (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 together with the game balls that have entered the other winning holes.

  Here, the first channel switching member 900f that is pivotally supported by the first channel switching unit 900b will be described. The first flow path switching member 900f includes a rectangular parallelepiped first wall portion 900f1 formed with the rotating shaft 900f3 as a lower end, and the first wall portion 900f1 at a position of 100 degrees counterclockwise from the first wall portion 900f1. A second wall portion 900f2 is formed in the same manner, and a housing portion capable of receiving one game ball is formed between the first wall portion 900f1 and the second wall portion 900f2. A right first discharge flow path 900c is formed at the lower right of the first flow path switching member 900f, and is on the left side of the right first discharge flow path 900c with the branch portion 900e interposed therebetween. A left first discharge channel 900d is formed in the lower left of the switching member 900f.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, when the first flow path switching member 900f is located at the first position (a state where the first flow path switching member 900 is rotated to the maximum angle in the left direction), the first flow path switching member. The accommodating portion of 900f is directed downward to the left and does not face the first guide channel 900a. In this case, in the first flow path switching member 900f, the second wall portion 900f2 on the left side of the housing portion is in contact with the branch portion 900e, and is not further rotated leftward (counterclockwise). The left first discharge channel 900d is blocked by the one channel switching member 900f. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path switching unit 900b flows down to the right first discharge flow path 900c without entering the housing portion of the first flow path switching member 900f.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the first flow path switching member 900f is located at the second position (a state where the first flow path switching member 900 is rotated to the maximum angle in the right direction), the first flow path The accommodating portion of the switching member 900f is upward and faces the first guide channel 900a. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path switching unit 900b enters the housing portion of the first flow path switching member 900f and rotates the first flow path switching member 900f to the left (counterclockwise). And flow down to the first right discharge channel 900c. Here, in the present embodiment, when the first flow path switching member 900f is in the second position, the second wall portion 900f3 on the left side of the housing portion is horizontal than the first wall portion 900f1 on the right side of the housing portion. As a result, the weight of the game ball that has entered the housing portion is more applied to the second wall portion 900f3 on the left side of the housing portion, so that the first flow path switching member 900f rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise). Moved.

  In this way, when the first flow path switching member 900f is located at the first position (the state where the first flow path switching member 900 is rotated to the maximum angle in the left direction), the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is Then, it flows down to the right first discharge channel 900c. On the other hand, when the first flow path switching member 900f is positioned at the second position (the state where the first flow path switching member 900 is rotated to the maximum angle in the right direction), the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is The one flow path switching member 900f is rotated to the first position and flows down to the left first discharge flow path 900d. Accordingly, the game balls that have entered the second winning opening 640 flow down to the left first discharge flow path 900d by one ball when the first flow path switching member 900f is at the second position, and the other game balls are moved to the right side. It flows down to 1 discharge flow path 900c.

  Next, the relationship between the first flow path switching member 900f and the open / close switching member 902 will be described. An attachment hole 900f4 is provided at the upper end of the first wall portion 900f1 of the first flow path switching member 900f (on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 900f3), and a connecting member 903 provided on the back surface of the first discharge flow path 900. It is attached. In the first flow path switching unit 900b on the back side of the first flow path switching member 900f, through holes are formed by router processing at locations corresponding to the movable range of the mounting holes 900f4. As a result, the mounting hole 900f4 of the first flow path switching member 900f and the connecting member 903 can be attached across the flow path member of the first discharge flow path 900, and the first state with the connecting member 903 attached. The flow path switching member 900f is rotatable.

  As described above, the connecting member 903 is attached to the upper side of the rotation shaft 902a of the opening / closing switching member 902. Therefore, when the first flow path switching member 900f rotates in the left direction (counterclockwise), the connecting member 903 attached to the mounting hole 900f4 provided in the first wall portion 900f1 of the first flow path switching member 900f. Moves to the left. When the connecting member 903 moves leftward, the opening / closing switching member 902 rotates leftward (counterclockwise) about the rotation shaft 902a and is rotated to the first position.

  As described above, when the opening / closing switching member 902 is in the first position (that is, when the first flow path switching member 900f is in the first position), the opening / closing switching member 902 contacts the weight member 640c, and the weight This is a case where the non-electrically-powered article 640a is closed by moving the member 640c to the left (see FIG. 3A). On the other hand, when the opening / closing switching member 902 is in the second position (that is, when the first flow path switching member 900f is in the second position), the opening / closing switching member 902 does not contact the weight member 640c, and the weight member This is a case where 640c is in the vertical direction and the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in an open state (see FIG. 3B). Therefore, when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the open state (that is, when the first flow path switching member 900f is in the second position), the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, so that the first The flow path switching member 900f is rotated from the second position to the first position, and the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is actuated (variable) from the open state to the closed state. In addition, when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state (that is, when the first flow path switching member 900f is in the first position), even if a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the first Since the flow path switching member 900f remains in the first position, the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is not actuated (variable).

  Next, the open / close switching member is moved from the first position (the state rotated to the left, see FIG. 3A) from the first position by the game ball entering the operation port 670 and flowing down the second discharge channel 901. The case where it is rotated to two positions (the state rotated rightward, see FIG. 3B) will be described.

  The game ball that has entered the operation port 670 flows through the through hole provided at the position where the operation port 670 is attached and flows down to the second discharge channel 901 on the back side of the game board 13. The second discharge channel 901 has the same structure as the first discharge channel 900 described above, but the opening / closing switching member 902 is rotated from the first position (rotated to the left) to the second position (rotated to the right). It is different in that it is configured to be rotated to the state of Since the other points are the same as those of the first discharge channel 900 described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Specifically, in the second discharge channel 901, similarly to the above-described first discharge channel, the first position (to the left) is changed from the second position (the state rotated to the right) by the operation port that has entered the ball. A second flow path switching member 901f that is rotated to a rotated state is provided. The second flow path switching member 901f is connected to the open / close switching member 902 by the second connecting member 904. Unlike the first flow path switching member 900f, the second flow path switching member 901f is located below the rotation shaft 902a of the open / close switching member 902. Connected with. Thus, when the second flow path switching member 901f is in the first position (rotated to the left), the open / close switching member 902 is in the second position, and the second flow path switching member 901f is in the second position (turned to the right). In the moved state), the open / close switching member 902 is in the first position.

  As described above, when the opening / closing switching member 902 is in the second position (that is, when the second flow path switching member 901f is in the first position), the opening / closing switching member 902 does not contact the weight member 640c, This is a case where the weight member 640c is in the vertical direction and the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is opened. On the other hand, when the opening / closing switching member 902 is in the first position (that is, when the second flow path switching member 901f is in the second position), the opening / closing switching member 902 contacts the weight member 640c, and the weight member 640c is left This is a case where the non-electrically-powered article 640a is closed by being moved in the direction (see FIG. 3A).

  Therefore, when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state (that is, when the second flow path switching member 901f is in the second position), the game ball enters the operation port 670, so that the second flow path The switching member 901f is rotated from the second position to the first position, and the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is actuated (variable) from the closed state to the open state. In addition, even when the game ball enters the operation port 670 when the non-electrically-powered article 640a is already open (that is, when the second flow path switching member 901f is at the first position), the second flow Since the path switching member 901f remains in the first position, the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is not actuated (variable).

  As described above, when the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in the closed state, the first flow path switching member 900f is in the first position, and the second flow path switching member 901f is in the second position. On the other hand, when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the open state, the first flow path switching member 900f is in the second position, and the second flow path switching member 901f is in the first position. Here, the first flow path switching member 900f and the second flow path switching member 901f are actuated (variable) when a game ball enters (passes) when in the second position, but are in the first position. In some cases it is not activated (variable). Therefore, when one of the flow path switching members (the first flow path switching member 900f or the second flow path switching member 901f) is operable (variable), the other flow path switching member (the second flow path switching member) 901f or the first flow path switching member 900f) is not activated (variable). Thereby, even when a game ball enters the operating port 670 and the second winning port 640 at the same time, the flow path switching member (the first flow path switching member 900f or the second flow path switching member 901f) can be moved without any trouble ( Variable).

  Here, when the ball is fired toward the first right winning opening 641 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), the game ball enters the operation port 670. Also enters. As described above, based on the game ball entering the operation port 670, the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a provided in association with the second winning port 640 is opened. When the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in the open state, a game ball that has been launched based on the depression of the skip switch 51c can enter the second winning opening 640.

  The non-electrical accessory 640a is maintained in an open state until one game ball enters the second winning opening 640, and operates (variable) when the gaming ball enters the second winning opening 640. Is done. As a result, when the ball is launched so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), the game ball enters the operation port 670 and the non-electrically-powered object 640a is Since the open state is maintained, the game ball that is launched by pressing the skip switch 51c can enter a state where it can enter the second winning opening 640.

  Note that the positions at which the operation port 670 and the rotating accessory 680 described above are disposed are not limited to the right side of the variable display device 80. For example, when the working port 670 and the rotating accessory 680 are provided on the left side of the variable display device 80 and the ball is launched so as to pass the left of the variable display device 80 (so-called “left-handed”), An arrangement in which a game ball can enter the operation port 670 may be adopted. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of stopping (skipping) the change display of the first special symbol even in the left-handed gaming state.

  Further, the operation port 670 and the rotating accessory 680 may be provided below the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 72). Accordingly, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of stopping (skipping) the change display of the first special symbol in both the left-handed gaming state and the right-handed gaming state. Details of the case where the operating port 670 and the rotating accessory 680 are provided below the first winning port 64 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, among the game balls that are launched based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c, the game balls that have not entered the second winning opening 640 enter because the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state. You may provide the rotary accessory 680 and the action port 670 in the position to perform. In addition, a guiding member may be provided so that a game ball that has not entered the second winning port 640 is guided to the rotating accessory 680 and the operating port 670. Accordingly, in order to enter the game ball into the operation port 670, the game ball can be inserted into the operation port 670 by pressing the skip switch 51c without adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. A gaming machine capable of

  Furthermore, in this case, two game balls (or more than two) may be fired consecutively based on pressing of the skip switch 51c. As a result, among the game balls that are continuously fired, the first game ball enters the second prize opening 640, and the non-electrically-powered object 640a is closed. After that, among the game balls continuously fired, the second game ball enters the operation port 670 because the non-electrically-powered object 640a is in the closed state, and again the non-electrically-charged object 640a. Becomes open. Thereby, since the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is always in an open state, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can always allow a game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by pressing the skip switch 51c.

  Examples of a method for causing two (or more) game balls to be fired in succession include the following methods. For example, the structure of the skip switch 51c may be a structure that is in a pressed state in which two (or more) game balls are fired by a single pressing operation. Specifically, a mechanism is provided that attenuates the repulsive force necessary for the skip switch 51c to return from the pressed state to the non-pressed state after the skip switch 51c is pressed. Then, the time required for the skip switch 51c to return from the pressed state to the non-pressed state may be set so that two game balls are fired (or more). Examples of the mechanism for attenuating the reaction force include a damper and a shock absorber in addition to a low repulsion material.

  In addition, when the skip switch 51c is pressed, power for launching two (or more) game balls may be supplied to the ball launch unit 112a. Specifically, a capacitor for storing electric power for launching a game ball to the ball launch unit 112a is provided based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, and two (or more) game balls are launched on the capacitor. What is necessary is just to comprise so that electric power can be stored.

  Furthermore, a firing control device 112 capable of changing the firing intensity of the firing solenoid based on a signal input from the main control device 110 is provided. In the firing control process (S108), the pressing state of the skip switch 51c and the operation handle 51 are set. Based on the operation amount, a signal instructing the launch intensity is transmitted to the launch control device 112. Then, based on pressing of the skip switch 51c, it may be configured to control so that two (or more) game balls are fired at a launch intensity of 100%.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A transparent plastic front cover member 600 is attached to the upper right side of the game board 13 at a position that covers the above-described operation port 670, rotating accessory 680, and second winning port 640. The front cover member 600 is colored in black so that the upper part covering the second winning opening 640 has a low light transmittance and the inside is difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the lower part that covers the rotating accessory 680 and the second prize opening 640 is not colored (colorless and transparent), but has a pattern (mosaic) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside. . As a result, in the game area where the front cover member 600 is attached, the lower part where the rotating combination 680 and the second winning opening 640 are covered is the game area where the game ball flows down to the player. It is possible to make the player recognize that the area where the second winning port 640 that is the upper part is disposed is a region where the game ball does not flow down.

  A return rubber 600a is attached to the left end of the front cover member 600 at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere when the skip switch 51c is not pressed, and fired based on the maximum operation amount of the operation handle 51. The played game ball (that is, the game ball launched at a firing strength of 90%, see the broken line b in FIG. 2) hits the return rubber 600a and is bounced back toward the center while the momentum is attenuated. This allows the player to recognize that the area above the position where the return rubber 600a is attached is not an area where the game ball flows down (game area).

  The front cover member 600 is not limited to the one described above, and the inside of the front cover member 600 may be easily visible, or the front cover member may not be provided. Thereby, since it becomes easy for a player to visually recognize the open / closed state of the non-electrically-powered article 640a and the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 640, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, the game ball launched when the skip switch 51c is pressed (that is, the game ball launched at a firing strength of 90%, see the broken line a in FIG. 2) passes above the return rubber 600a, If the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the open state, the player enters the second winning opening 640. Therefore, a game ball is launched into an area that the player recognizes is not a game area, and enters the second winning opening 640. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the first special symbol is stopped based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first special symbol is determined based on the operation of the skip switch 51c. An impression that the special symbol is stopped can be given.

  The return rubber 600a is attached to the closed non-electrically-powered object 640a with a gap that allows one game ball to flow down, and the non-electrically-charged object 640a is opened to fill the gap. Is activated (variable). Therefore, if the non-electrical accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened, the game ball flowing down the upper side of the return rubber 600a is guided to the second winning opening 640 by the non-electrical accessory 640a. The On the other hand, if the non-electrical accessory 640a is not opened, the game balls flowing down the upper side of the return rubber 600a are prevented from entering the second winning opening 640 by the non-electrical accessory 640a, and the non-electrical accessory 640a. Then, it passes through the gap between the return rubber 600a and flows down to a game area where the lower through gate 67 and the like are disposed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower left side of the first right winning port 641, and a first specific winning port 65 a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery performed due to winning at the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640 becomes a big hit, a predetermined time (variation time) After the elapse of time, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a jackpot stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to win a jackpot Occurrence is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  In addition, when the lottery performed due to winning at the second winning opening 640 becomes a small hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or The first symbol display device 37B is turned on and a stop symbol corresponding to the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the small hit. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a small hit game state in which it is difficult for the ball to win in comparison with the special game state described above. In this small hit game state, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 that is normally closed is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment). In addition, the opening / closing operation is performed twice in the small hit game state, and in this small hit game state, the game ball hardly enters the specific winning opening 65a.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a and a large opening solenoid 65b (not shown) for driving to open and close to the right with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. )). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid 65b is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front side, and an open state in which the ball is likely to win the first specific winning opening 65a is temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of plural (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, For example, it may be below the first winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Out board 66 is provided in game board 13. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 641, 640, 65 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the out opening 66. The out port 66 is disposed below the first winning port 64 and at the lower end of the game area (the lower end of the inner rail 61).

  Therefore, a ball that flows down the game area, does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 641, 640, 65, and reaches the inner rail 61 that is the outer edge of the game area, It flows down along the inclination of 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the out port 66.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 4 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 4, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are diagrams for explaining an effect screen of a press suggestion effect in the pachinko machine 10.

  First, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting on the display screen, and FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first winning port 641 or the right first winning port 641 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the ball enters the ball. The number of held balls is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 is configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  In the present embodiment, the second winning opening 640 is configured not to be held. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is similar to the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 described above. It may be configured to be held up to 4 times. Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  Next, the contents of effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7 schematically illustrate an example of a pressing suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the variation based on the first special symbol is being executed and the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the open state. It is the schematic diagram shown.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of an opening press suggestion effect that is a press suggestion effect displayed when the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in an open state during the variation based on the first special symbol. When the variation based on the first special symbol is executed, the third symbol is variably displayed at the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the variation based on the first special symbol is being executed (displayed), if the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the open state, the push of the skip switch 51c is suggested at the lower right portion of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. An opening press suggestion effect is displayed. Specifically, an image of a button imitating the operation handle 51 and the skip switch 51c having the character “PUSH” at the lower position of the screen is displayed together with the character “battle or skip”. When the variation based on the first special symbol is started, if the non-electrical accessory 640a is already in the open state, the pressing suggestion effect at the time of opening from the time when the variation based on the first special symbol is started. Is displayed.

  If the skip switch 51c is pressed during the display of the opening press suggestion effect and a game ball enters the second winning opening, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. The lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit with a high probability (388/400). When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win, and the variation C (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern based on the lottery result of the small bonus, the skip effect shown in FIG. Is displayed. Specifically, the letters “Skip!” Are displayed below the variable display of the third symbol displayed at the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the variation of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variation of the second special symbol is stopped, and the variation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “Skip!” May be displayed, and the variation of the first special symbol may be stopped and displayed, or the variation of the first special symbol is difficult to view (or cannot be performed). You may change to Thereby, when the character “Skip!” Is displayed, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the change in the first special symbol has been stopped.

  This skip effect is displayed for 2.5 seconds until the change C (0.5 seconds) based on the small hit of the second special symbol is executed and the subsequent small hit game (2.0 seconds) is executed. . The display of the skip effect ends when the small hit game ends and a new change based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is started. As described above, the characters “Skip!” Are displayed at the center of the screen where the player can easily see, and the variable display based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed at the upper right of the screen where the player is difficult to see. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the variation based on the small hit of the second special symbol or the small hit game has been executed. Thus, based on the fact that the skip switch 51c is pressed during the variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol being executed can be skipped and a new variation of the first special symbol can be started. The impression that it is a possible gaming machine can be given.

  Next, referring to FIG. 7A, the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the variation A (30 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern based on the lottery result of the small bonus. The battle effect displayed when) is selected will be described.

  In the battle effect shown in FIG. 7A, the variation display of the third symbol displayed in the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced and displayed in the upper left portion of the screen and stopped. The characters “Battle!” Are displayed, the hero image is displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and the monster image is displayed on the right side of the center of the screen. In addition, a variable display based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, even when a game ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, the battle effect described above is displayed by the pseudo effect change process (FIG. 46). It is configured as follows. This is because if the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, even if the game ball enters the second winning port 640, the skip effect and the battle effect described above are not executed. This is because the player can easily determine that the special symbol variation is a big hit. When the above-described battle effect is displayed by the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 46), when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the battle effect regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. (See FIG. 7A) is displayed, it can be difficult to determine that the variation in the first special symbol is a big hit, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In this battle effect, when the first special symbol is not a big hit and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped based on the winning to the second winning opening 640, the hero is defeated in the battle with the monster after that. A production (out-of-game battle production) is displayed, and the words “Sorry! Then, when the variation of the second special symbol and the small hit game are finished, the display changes to the normal display content, and a new variation of the first special symbol is started. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is a big hit and a battle effect is being executed based on winning the second prize opening 640, then the main character wins the battle with the monster (winning battle effect) Is displayed, and the words “Yeah! Then, when the variation of the first special symbol ends, the game shifts to the jackpot game of the first special symbol.

  A bar-shaped HP gauge is displayed on the upper side of the monster displayed in this battle effect (see FIG. 7A), and the length of this HP gauge indicates the expectation that the hero will win the battle with the monster. It is suggested. Specifically, when the first special symbol is not a big hit and the first special symbol changes based on winning the second prize opening 640, the hero loses the battle with the monster. When an effect to be displayed is displayed, an effect with a long HP gauge is configured to be easily selected. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is a big hit and a battle effect is being executed based on a winning at the second winning port 640, then an effect in which the main character wins the battle with the monster is displayed. In this case, it is easy to select an effect with a short HP gauge. Thereby, when an effect with a short HP gauge is displayed, an effect in which the main character wins a battle with a monster is displayed, and it can be suggested that there is a high possibility of being a big hit. In addition, the aspect which suggests an expectation degree is not restricted to HP gauge, You may make it suggest an expectation degree by another production aspect. For example, the type of the monster that appears may vary depending on the degree of expectation that results in a jackpot, or the type of music that is output may vary depending on the degree of expectation that results in a jackpot.

  The battle effect described above is ended in synchronization with the end of the variation display based on the big hit of the first special symbol or the small hit game of the second special symbol. Specifically, the variation display based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the effect that the hero wins the battle with the monster (winning battle effect) is finished, and the jackpot game is started. In addition, when the small hit game of the second special symbol is finished, the effect that the hero is defeated by the battle with the monster (outward battle effect) is finished, and a new variable display based on the first special symbol is started.

  Here, the effect time of the battle effect will be described. The out-of-game battle effect in this embodiment is a total of 12 seconds including a battle effect period (30 seconds) that is a period for displaying the battle effect and an effect result notification period (2 seconds) that is a period for notifying the result of the battle effect. It is configured to be a production time. This out-of-game battle effect is started when the variation A (30 seconds) based on the small bonus of the second special symbol is started, and the variation A (30 seconds) based on the small bonus of the second special symbol. Is executed, and thereafter, the small hit game (2 seconds) to be executed ends, that is, after 32 seconds have elapsed since the start of the long fluctuation based on the small hit of the second special symbol. Therefore, the end timing of the out-of-game battle effect displayed based on the game ball entering the second winning port 640 can be matched with the end timing of the variable display based on the second special symbol, On the other hand, it is possible to provide a production without a sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, as the hit battle effect in the present embodiment, a resurrection battle effect (direction time: 20 seconds to 30 seconds), a first hit battle effect (effect time: 10 seconds to 20 seconds), and a second hit battle effect ( There are three types of performance time: 5 seconds to 10 seconds). This winning battle effect starts when a game ball enters the second winning port 640 during the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol Any one of the three types of hit battle effects is selected according to the remaining fluctuation time. As a result, during the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, the end timing of the battle effect displayed based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 and the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol The end timing, that is, the start timing of the jackpot game of the first special symbol can be matched, and an effect without a sense of incongruity can be provided to the player.

  When the winning battle effect is executed, the variation of the second special symbol (variation A (30 seconds)) is started based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640. Therefore, since the variation (30 seconds) of the second special symbol is longer than each battle effect described above, the variation of the second special symbol is left at the end of each battle effect. However, in the present embodiment, when the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped, the variation of the second special symbol is configured to be forcibly stopped. Therefore, based on the jackpot of the first special symbol The fluctuation can be matched with the stop timing, that is, the end timing of each battle effect, and the stop timing of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, so that an effect without a sense of incongruity can be provided to the player.

  Further, when the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less, the battle effect described above cannot be executed (displayed) because the remaining variation time (effect time) is short. Therefore, the present embodiment is configured to execute (display) a single notification effect for notifying the jackpot. Thereby, even when the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is short, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, it is not restricted to this, You may make it perform (display) the battle effect mentioned above irrespective of the remaining variation time of a 1st special symbol. For example, a battle effect or the like may be executed (displayed) in accordance with the variation time of the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7 (b), a closing suggestion effect at closing, which is a pressing suggestion effect that is displayed when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state during the fluctuation based on the first special symbol, will be described. . FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating an example of a closing suggestion effect at the time of closing.

  When the variation based on the first special symbol is executed, the third symbol is variably displayed at the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the non-electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the pressing at the time of closing suggesting the pressing of the skip switch 51c at the lower right portion of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern and the value of the effect counter 223e. Suggested effects are displayed.

  Specifically, an image of a button imitating the operation handle 51 and the skip switch 51c having the characters “PUSH” displayed in the lower right portion of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the pressing-down suggestion effect at the time of opening is displayed. At the same time, a gauge is displayed at the top, and further, a text “Comment appears when MAX is reached by long pressing the button” is displayed at the top. The gauge is such that the area to be lit up increases starting from the left end, based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c. When all the areas of the gauge are lit up, that is, when the gauge increases to MAX, a comment is displayed at the bottom of the variation display of the third symbol displayed at the center of the screen. The comment displayed here suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit.

  Thereby, since the privilege that the comment indicating the expectation level that is a big hit is displayed based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c is given, it is possible to prompt the player to press the skip switch 51c. In addition, when the skip switch 51c is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls (that is, game value) are consumed, but a comment that indicates an expectation level that is a big hit instead of the consumed game value is displayed. Since the privilege of giving is given, the disadvantage of the player can be reduced.

  As described above, when the first special symbol is a big hit and the remaining variation time of the variation based on the first special symbol is short (less than 5 seconds), the game ball is sent to the second winning opening 640. When entering the ball, a one-shot announcement effect is displayed. This is because, when the remaining variation time based on the first special symbol is short (5 seconds or less), when the battle effect is displayed, the first special symbol is displayed even though the battle effect is being displayed. The fluctuation based on the game ends and the jackpot game is started, which causes a problem that the player is confused.

  Therefore, in the state where the remaining variation time of the variation based on the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less, the display mode of the opening press suggestion effect may be changed. As a result, when the opening pressing suggestion effect is displayed, an effect (one-shot notification effect) different from the effect (battle effect or the like) displayed based on the entrance to the second winning opening 640 is executed. Can be recognized by the player. Note that the change timing of this push suggestion effect is not limited to the above-described one (the remaining variation time of the variation based on the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less). For example, the remaining variation time of the variation based on the first special symbol is 10 It may be less than 2 seconds, or less than 3 seconds. Furthermore, the display timing of the press suggestion effect may be varied according to the expectation that the fluctuation based on the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is a big hit, a predetermined counter value, and the like.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above, and when the game ball enters the second winning port 640 in a state where the remaining variation time of the variation based on the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less, any effect change is performed. It may be left as it is. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that a game ball has not entered the second prize opening 640 or that the lottery result based on the prize winning to the second prize opening 640 has been lost. By doing so, an unexpectedness can be given to a player and an interest can be improved.

  The button images (button images simulating the operation handle 51 and the skip switch 51c) displayed in the opening pressing suggestion effect and the closing press suggestion effect in the present embodiment are effects suggesting pressing of the frame button 22. The image is different from the button image used (columnar button image). Thereby, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player which button to press, and an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

  In addition, the image of the button displayed in the opening suggestion effect at the time of opening and the suggestion effect at the time of closing is not limited to this. ). This makes it easier for the player to understand that the skip switch 51c has been pressed.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described skip effect and battle effect are configured to be displayed when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, it may be displayed when the skip switch 51c is pressed. Thereby, the impression that the skip effect is displayed by pressing the skip switch 51c can be strengthened. Further, during the period from when the skip switch 51c is pressed until the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, an effect different from the skip effect or the battle effect may be separately performed. Thereby, the display of the effect (skip effect or the like) displayed based on the press of the skip switch 51c, and the entry or entry of the game ball fired based on the press of the skip switch 51c into the second winning opening 640 Inconsistency with the lottery result based on can be suppressed.

  Moreover, you may change the probability that the press suggestion effect mentioned above (the press suggestion effect at the time of opening, the press suggestion effect at the time of closing) is displayed according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is large, the press suggestion effect is easily displayed, and when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the press suggestion effect is hardly displayed. . Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to easily skip the fluctuation of the first special symbol by displaying the press suggestion effect, and to prevent the incoming ball from overflowing. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is small, the press suggestion effect is not displayed, so that the variation of the first special symbol is not skipped, so the reserved ball is consumed quickly and the time when the variation display is not performed increases. Inconvenience can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, you may change the content of the press suggestion effect according to the number of reserved balls of a 1st special symbol. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is large, an effect that strongly urges the user to press the skip switch 51c (for example, “press the skip switch!”) Is displayed, and the first special symbol is reserved. When the number of balls is small, an effect (for example, “may I press the skip switch?”) That promptly presses the skip switch 51c may be displayed. As a result, when the number of held balls is large, a press suggesting effect that strongly presses the skip switch 51c is displayed, thereby making it easy to skip the fluctuation of the first special symbol and suppressing the overflow of the incoming ball. it can. On the other hand, when the number of held balls is small, a press suggestion effect that weakly presses the skip switch 51c is displayed, and a press suggestion effect that strongly presses the skip switch 51c is not displayed, so that the variation of the first special symbol is skipped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time when the reserved ball is digested and the fluctuation display is not performed.

  Further, the above-described opening press suggestion effect and closing press suggestion effect may be executed by prefetching the lottery result of the first special symbol and based on the prefetched result. For example, when it is prefetched that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place, it is easy to display a press suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to skip out-of-range fluctuations, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. Note that the press suggestion effect may be executed based on the prefetched result only in a specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, if it is determined that the third ball of the reserved balls of the first special symbol is a big hit, the skip effect of the first and second reserved balls is continuously displayed (continuous pressing suggestion). An effect of (effect) may be executed (displayed). Specifically, during the change based on the first reserved ball, an effect accompanied by the text “Find the key!” Is displayed and a press suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c is displayed. Then, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters “Obtain a key!” Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the first reserved ball is stopped. Next, during the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball, an effect accompanied by the characters “Open the treasure chest with the obtained key!” And a suggestion effect for pressing the skip switch 51c are displayed. Then, based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters “Treasure box opened!” Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball is stopped. Thereafter, in the variation based on the third reserved ball that is a big hit, an effect accompanied by the characters “Congratulations!

  By executing (displaying) such a continuous pressing suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that is a big hit step by step, so that the interest of the player can be improved. It should be noted that, since the fluctuation based on the big ball holding ball cannot be forcibly stopped, the fluctuation based on the big ball holding ball may not imply pressing the skip switch 51c. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is suggested that the skip switch 51c be pressed during the fluctuation based on the holding ball that is a big hit, and the aspect of the effect is changed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Also good.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct operations to the peripheral control devices (sub control devices) such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 However, such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111 via the connectors 207 and 217 and the sound lamp control device 113 via the connectors 208 and 228, respectively. In addition, the input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 206 including a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a firing control device 112, an external output terminal plate 261, a switch group and a sensor group not shown. ing. A hall computer 262 can be connected to the external output terminal plate 261, and data or the like can be output from the main controller 110 to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball feed solenoid 154 so that the ball is placed on the front surface of the launch solenoid 142 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, and controls the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The firing solenoid 142 is controlled so as to obtain the launching strength of the corresponding ball. The firing solenoid 142 and the ball feed solenoid 154 are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met.

  Specifically, the payout control is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). A firing permission signal SG3 is input from the signal conversion circuit 241 of the substrate 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. When the launch permission signal SG 3 is input to the input / output port 205, the MPU 201 outputs the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β from the input / output port 205 to the launch control device 112. When the firing control signal α is input to the firing control device 112, a voltage is supplied to the firing solenoid 142, and the firing solenoid 142 turns a ball previously disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 to turn the operation handle 51. Fire towards the game area with strength according to the. When the ball feed control signal β is input to the firing control device 112, a voltage is supplied to the ball feed solenoid 154, and the game ball is placed in front of the launch solenoid 142.

  Here, the firing permission signal SG3 will be described. The launch permission signal SG3 is a signal output from the signal conversion circuit 241 in the payout control device 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The signal conversion circuit 241 that outputs the firing permission signal SG3 mainly includes an AND circuit that is a logic circuit. The firing permission signal SG3 is turned on only when the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the stop switch 51b is turned off, and is turned off when any of the sensors does not satisfy the above condition. When the player rotates the operation handle 51 with the intention of launching, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the stop switch 51b is turned off. In a state where the 51 rotation operation is performed, a ball is launched by the firing solenoid 142.

  It should be noted that the firing of the ball of the firing solenoid 142 and the placement of the ball on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 performed by the ball feed solenoid 154 are not simultaneous.

  The launch control device 112 is connected to a skip switch 51c (see FIG. 1). When the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), the rotation operation of the operation handle 51c described above is performed. Regardless of the amount, the firing solenoid 142 is controlled to have a constant launch strength (fire strength = 100%). On the other hand, when the skip switch 51c is off (when the skip switch 51c is not pressed), as described above, the launch strength (launch strength = 0% to 90%) of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51c, and The firing solenoid 142 is controlled so that

  Here, in this embodiment, when the skip switch 51c is off (not pressed), the launching strength of the launching solenoid 142 (launching strength = 0% to 90%) The launch intensity does not reach the 2-winning opening 640 (see the broken line b in FIG. 2). On the other hand, when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), the launching strength (launching strength 100%) of the firing solenoid 142 is the firing strength at which the launched game ball can reach the second winning opening 640. (See the broken line a in FIG. 2). Therefore, when the skip switch 51c is not pressed, the game ball does not enter the second winning port 640, and when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the game ball can enter the second winning port 640. .

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  In the work area of the RAM 213, a total prize ball number memory 213a, an upper command storage buffer 213b, a payout error flag 213c, and a payout permission flag 213d are provided.

  The total prize ball number memory 213a is a memory for storing the total number of unpaid prize balls to be paid out by the payout control device 111. A ball that has been driven into the game area wins one of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, and when this is detected by the main control device 110, a payout of the number of prize balls according to the winning is a prize ball command. The main controller 110 instructs the payout controller 111. In the total prize ball number memory 213a, the number of payout of prize balls designated by the prize ball command is added and stored. If the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a is not 0, the prize ball is paid out, and the value is decremented by 1 every time one prize ball is detected. The payout of prize balls is performed until the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a becomes zero.

  The upper command storage buffer 213b is a buffer for storing an upper command (first byte command) among 2-byte commands output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. The main controller 110 outputs a payout return command, a payout initialization command, and 15 types of prize ball commands to the payout control device 111. These upper commands (99H) are output to the upper command storage buffer 213b. , AAH, F0H to FEH) are stored. The contents of the upper command storage buffer 213b are cleared to 0 when a lower command (second byte command) is input.

  The payout error flag 213c is a flag that is turned on when the payout control device 111 cannot normally input a 2-byte command output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. When the payout error flag 213c is turned on, the character “C” is displayed on the 7-segment LED 121 to notify the occurrence of a command error. The payout error flag 213c once turned on is turned off when a normal command of 2 bytes is input. When the payout error flag 213c is turned off, the error display of the 7 segment LED 121 is also canceled.

  The payout permission flag 213d is a flag for permitting the payout of the winning ball or the loaned ball, and is turned off in the start-up process (S1614 in FIG. 38), while the normal command (payout) output from the main controller 110 is issued. It is turned on when an initialization command, payout power recovery command, prize ball command, etc.) are input. That is, the payout permission flag 213d is a flag for confirming that the main control device 110 is up.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110 is connected to the input / output port 215 via connectors 207 and 217, and a 7-segment LED 121, a payout motor 216, an external output terminal plate 261, and the like are connected to each other. The payout control device 111 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 241. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out is connected. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The 7-segment LED 121 is a display (display means) for notifying the state of the payout control device 111. When the payout control device 111 inputs a command output from the main control device 110, and it is determined that the command is an unspecified command (invalid command), the 7-segment LED 121 causes the character “C” to be displayed. Displayed to notify the occurrence of a command error. In addition, a hall computer 262 can be connected to the external output terminal plate 261, and data or the like can be output from the payout control device 111 to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261. Errors generated in the payout control device 111 can also be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 262.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and the display control device 114. The setting of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 performed in is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110 is connected to the input / output port 225 via connectors 208 and 228, and the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  Further, the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the working port guide channel switch 800. The working port guide channel switch 800 is a switch for detecting a game ball passing between the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a and the return rubber 600a at the left end portion of the front cover member 600 (working port guide channel). . When the non-electrically-powered object 640a is in the closed state, the operation port guide channel has a game ball that is launched based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c (that is, the non-electrically-charged object 640a is in the closed state, Game balls that have not entered the second winning opening 640 flow down. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the working port guide channel is guided to the rotating combination 680 as described above. Therefore, when the operation port guide channel switch 800 is turned on (that is, when the game ball passes through the operation port guide channel), the game ball subsequently enters the rotating accessory 680 and moves to the operation port 670. This is when there is a high possibility that a game ball will enter.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure and the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 having a RAM erase switch 123. ing. The power supply unit 251 supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches, solenoids, motors, etc. 12 volts, logic 5 volts, RAM A backup voltage or the like for backup is generated, and a necessary voltage is supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like using the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 VDC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts, Power failure signal SG1 is output to main controller 110 and payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Accordingly, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit that outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 123 is pressed. When the RAM control signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data (contents of the RAM 203).

  Next, the firing control device 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the launch control device 112. The firing control device 112 includes a voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, an addition voltage adjustment unit 302, an addition circuit unit 303, a voltage supply unit 304, a firing solenoid control unit 305, and a ball feed solenoid control unit 306. Has been.

  The voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is a circuit that divides a DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and includes an operational amplifier OP1 and a variable resistor whose resistance value is variable. And VR2. Here, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 can be adjusted by an operation knob 122a (not shown).

  The positive input terminal (non-inverted input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1, which is the input side of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, has a variable resistor VR1 that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance, or a resistance value. It is configured to be connected to one of the fixed resistors R8. Whether the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 is connected to the variable resistor VR1 or the resistor R8 is determined by the state (ON or OFF) of the skip switch 51c. Specifically, when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), the resistor R8 is connected to the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and when the skip switch 51c is off (not pressed). The variable resistor VR1 is connected to the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1.

  Here, a 5-volt DC power supply DC1 is connected to one end of the variable resistor VR1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR1 is grounded. This is because the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 changes according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR1, and the generated DC voltage ( This is because the signal SA1) is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1.

  On the other hand, a DC power source DC1 of 5 volts is connected to one end of the resistor R8, similarly to the variable resistor VR1 described above, and the other end of the resistor R8 is grounded. Thus, when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), a signal based on the current generated by the DC power source DC1 (5 volts) and the resistor R8 (regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51) ( The signal SA1) can be input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1.

  In the present embodiment, the resistance value of the resistor R8 is smaller than the minimum resistance value of the variable resistor VR1. Thereby, the current generated in the resistor R8 can be larger than the current generated in the variable resistor VR1, and a signal based on the current is input to the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1. Thereby, the firing strength (100%) determined by the signal based on the current generated in the resistor R8 is stronger than the firing strength (0 to 90%) determined by the signal based on the current generated in the variable resistor VR1. Can be fired.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above, and only when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), a voltage (5 volts) may be applied to the resistor R8 and the current value thereof may be measured. Further, when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), the voltage (5 volts) may not be applied to the variable resistor VR1. Thereby, it is possible to save the current (that is, consumed power) generated by the resistor (resistor R8 or variable resistor VR1) that is not input to the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1.

  Next, the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 is short-circuited with the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the output of the operational amplifier OP1 is directly fed back to the negative input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1. Therefore, the operational amplifier OP1 is used as a buffer circuit that outputs a DC voltage input from the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 with an amplification factor of approximately 1.

  One end of the variable resistor VR2 is connected in series to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR2 is grounded. Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SA1) input from the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 with an amplification factor of approximately 1, and the output DC voltage is variable. The voltage is divided by the resistor VR2. The divided DC voltage is input to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303. It should be noted that the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 can be adjusted by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 with the operation knob 122a (not shown).

  Further, by reducing the fluctuation range of the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2, It is possible to adjust the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 and the range width thereof, which are the firing strength with which the ball is driven into the game area. However, since the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 from the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51, the variable resistor VR1. It becomes smaller than the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated at. This reduced voltage can be compensated for by a DC voltage input from the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 described below to the addition circuit unit 303.

  The addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is a circuit that generates a constant DC voltage, a 12-volt DC power supply DC2, a resistor R1 having a fixed resistance value, a variable resistor VR3 having a variable resistance value, a Zener It is constituted by a diode D1 and a capacitor CD1. Here, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 can be adjusted by an operation knob 122b (not shown).

  The other end of the variable resistor VR3 is grounded, and one end of the variable resistor VR3 is connected to the cathode of the Zener diode D1, one end of the capacitor CD1, and one end of the resistor R1. Since the anode of the Zener diode D1 is grounded, the Zener diode D1 and the variable resistor VR3 are connected in parallel. Further, since the other end of the capacitor CD1 is grounded, the capacitor CD1 and the variable resistor VR3 are connected in parallel like the Zener diode D1. Therefore, the capacitor CD1, the Zener diode D1, and the variable resistor VR3 form a parallel circuit. The other end of the resistor R1 is connected to a 12-volt DC power source DC2. The Zener diode D1 is used to stabilize the constant voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 in order to set the DC voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 to a constant value (constant voltage). The resistor R1 is used to limit the current supplied from the 12-volt DC power supply DC2.

  The 12-volt DC voltage supplied from the 12-volt DC power source DC2 is divided by the resistor R1, the parallel circuit of the capacitor CD1, the Zener diode D1, and the variable resistor VR3. The constant DC voltage (zener voltage) generated in the Zener diode D1 is also generated in the variable resistor VR3 connected in parallel with the Zener diode D1. Here, by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 with the operation knob 122b (not shown), the DC voltage output from the variable resistor VR3 can be adjusted to a voltage equal to or lower than the Zener voltage. Note that the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 is input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303. Here, by inputting the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303, the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area, is changed. Only the range can be adjusted (signal SC1 in FIG. 9). Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 is divided by dividing the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301. Even if the voltage becomes smaller than the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1, this reduced voltage can be compensated by the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3.

  Since the DC voltage supplied from the 12 volt DC power source DC2 is made constant by using the Zener diode D1, the DC voltage supplied from the 12 volt DC power source DC2 becomes unstable, and the DC voltage is Even when it changes, the DC voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 becomes a stable constant value (constant voltage). Therefore, a stable constant voltage is generated also in the variable resistor VR3 connected in parallel to the Zener diode D1, so that the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 also becomes a stable constant voltage.

  The addition circuit unit 303 adds (adds) the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. And a circuit for outputting, and is configured by resistors R2, R3, R4, R5 having fixed resistance values and an operational amplifier OP2.

  The variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is connected to one end of the resistor R2, and the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302 is connected to one end of the resistor R3. Here, the resistance values of the resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 are all the same, and the other end of the resistor R2 and the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 are connected to the other end of the resistor R3. ing. The negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 is connected to one end of the resistor R4 and one end of the resistor R5. The other end of the resistor R4 is the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 and the other end of the resistor R5. Is grounded.

  Therefore, the circuit composed of the resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 and the operational amplifier OP2 receives a DC voltage (signal SB1) input from one end of the resistor R2 (generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301). And a DC voltage input from one end of the resistor R3 (generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the added voltage adjusting unit 302) is added (added) to function as an adder circuit that outputs from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2. To do. The DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304.

  The voltage supply unit 304 is a circuit that supplies a voltage to the firing solenoid 142, and includes an operational amplifier OP3, a low-pass filter F1, a DC-DC converter CV1 that is a booster, a DC power source DC3 that supplies a DC voltage of 32 volts, And a capacitor CD2. Since the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 and the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 are short-circuited, the operational amplifier OP3 functions as a buffer amplifier. The positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 is connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303. Therefore, the DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303 is input from the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP3, has an amplification factor of approximately 1, and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3.

  The output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 is connected to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F1, and the low-pass filter F1 reduces noise (high-frequency component) superimposed on the DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is connected to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and further, the DC-DC converter CV1 is connected to a DC power supply DC3 that supplies a DC voltage of 32 volts, and the DC A DC voltage of 32 volts is supplied from the power source DC3 to the DC-DC converter CV1. Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SC1) output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is boosted to the DC voltage Ec by the DC-DC converter CV1.

  One end (plus terminal) of the capacitor CD2 is connected to the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the other end of the capacitor CD2 is grounded. Therefore, the boosted DC voltage Ec output from the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1 is applied to the capacitor CD2 when conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1, which will be described later, is interrupted. As a result, a charge obtained by the product of the capacitance of the capacitor CD2 and the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2 is stored in the capacitor CD2. A voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 142 in accordance with the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD2.

  One end of the firing solenoid 142 is connected to the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the drain terminal D of the FET switch SW1 of the firing solenoid control unit 305 is connected to the other end of the firing solenoid 142. . In addition, a diode D2 is connected between one end and the other end of the firing solenoid 142, which is a subsequent stage of the capacitor CD2. The cathode of the diode D2 is connected to one end of the firing solenoid 142, and the anode of the diode D2 is connected to the firing solenoid 142. Connected to the other end. The diode D2 suppresses the back electromotive force (surge voltage) generated after the ball launching operation of the firing solenoid 142.

  The firing solenoid control unit 305 is a circuit for controlling on / off of the firing solenoid 142, and includes a resistor R6 having a fixed resistance value, a low-pass filter F2, a Schmitt trigger inverter IC1, an FET switch SW1, and a 5-volt voltage. It is comprised by DC power supply DC1 which supplies a DC voltage.

  The input terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and one end of the resistor R6 is connected between the input / output port 205 and the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2. The other end of the resistor R6 is connected to the DC power source DC1, and if the input / output port 205 is in an on state (5 volt state), 5 volt is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2, and the input / output port 205 Is in the off state (zero volt state), the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is in the no-input state (zero volt state). Since the input / output port 205 is repeatedly turned on and off, a firing control signal α that is a pulse signal generated when the input / output port 205 is turned on is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2.

  When the firing control signal α is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2, the noise (high-frequency component) superimposed on the firing control signal α is reduced by the low-pass filter F2. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is connected to the input terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1, and the waveform of the firing control signal α input to the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 is shaped and inverted by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1. And is output as the firing control signal γ from the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1.

  The output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 is connected to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1. The drain terminal D of the FET switch SW1 is connected at one end to the other end of the firing solenoid 142 connected to the DC-DC converter CV1 and the anode of the diode D2, and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is grounded. Therefore, when the firing control signal γ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (5 volt state), the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 are brought into conduction, and the firing solenoid 142 is connected to the capacitor CD2. A voltage E1 (maximum value Ec volts) generated by the stored charge is applied. As a result, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 projects, and the ball disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 is fired toward the game area. The voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD2 becomes the maximum value Ec volts at the moment of application, and the voltage value decreases with time.

  On the other hand, when the firing control signal γ is not input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (zero volt state), the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is cut off, and the voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 142. E1 is not applied. Thereby, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 is returned from the protruding state to the initial state by a spring (not shown) provided inside the firing solenoid 142.

  The ball feed solenoid control unit 306 is a circuit for controlling on / off of the ball feed solenoid 154, and includes a resistor R7 having a fixed resistance value, a low-pass filter F3, a Schmitt trigger inverter IC2, an FET switch SW2, and 5 A DC power source DC1 that supplies a DC voltage of volts and a DC power source DC2 that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts are included.

  The input terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and one end of the resistor R7 is connected between the input / output port 205 and the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3. The other end of the resistor R7 is connected to the DC power source DC1. If the input / output port 205 is in an on state (5 volts), 5 volts is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3. Is in an off state (zero volt state), the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is in a no-input state (zero volt state). Since the input / output port 205 is repeatedly turned on and off, the ball feed control signal β, which is a pulse signal generated when the input / output port 205 is turned on, is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3.

  When the ball feed control signal β is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3, the low-pass filter F3 reduces noise (high frequency component) superimposed on the ball feed control signal β. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is connected to the input terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2. The ball feed control signal β input to the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 is shaped by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2, and the waveform is It is inverted and output as a ball feed control signal δ from the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2.

  The output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 is connected to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2. The drain terminal D of the FET switch SW2 is connected to the other end of the ball feed solenoid 154 and the anode of the diode D3. The DC power supply DC2 that supplies the cathode of the diode D3 and a DC voltage of 12 volts to one end of the ball feed solenoid 154 Is connected. The source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is grounded. Therefore, when the ball feed control signal δ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (5 volt state), the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 are brought into conduction, and the ball feed solenoid 154 has a DC power supply. A DC voltage E2 of 12 volts supplied from DC2 is applied. Thereby, the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned on (excited), and the game ball is accommodated in the holder portion 155a (not shown). The diode D3 suppresses a surge voltage generated when the ball feed solenoid 154 is switched from on to off.

  On the other hand, when the ball feed control signal δ is not input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (zero volt state), the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is cut off, and the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned on. Is not applied with the DC voltage E2. As a result, the delivery member 155 rotates downward due to its own weight, and the sphere G1 accommodated in the holder portion 155a (not shown) is delivered downward and disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a sensor (not shown) in addition to those described above. For example, a vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. In the pachinko machine 10, winning at the winning opening becomes an important factor for determining the gaming state, so it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration and prevent intentional winning at the winning opening. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 39). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203h of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with an execution area (for example, a first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c) and a holding area (for example, a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a) corresponding to each special symbol or normal symbol. In each of these areas, various counter values (for example, the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641, the second winning port 640, the through gate 67) are set in accordance with the timing of entering the ball. Each value of first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2 and stop type selection counter C3) is stored.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 39).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 641 or the right first winning port 641. It is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the timing when the ball has won the second winning opening 640, it is stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d of the RAM 203. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by 202a matches, it is determined that the jackpot of each special symbol. The first random number table 202a includes a special symbol for a low probability (a period during which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability that the special symbol is a big hit from the low probability ( Two types of determination values are included for the period in which the special symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in the table in each state is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the timing at which the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, it is stored in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 640.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this control example), and the ball is the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641, or the second winning symbol. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball execution area 203d of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning the mouth 640.

  Here, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, special If the random number is out of the symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d It becomes an aspect.

  In this embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to select various common counter values. However, the first special symbol (first lottery game) and the second special symbol are selected. Set different counters for each symbol (second lottery game), and update them with different values by changing the triggers and initial values of the counters for the first and second special symbols. Of course, the counter value may be configured.

  Thus, by configuring, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity, different counter values can be acquired. The fluctuation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the malfunction that the determination result of the success / failure is synchronized can be suppressed.

  In addition, even if the variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a problem that the selected variation pattern is synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, the data stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM having a small storage area) can be achieved.

  Here, the first per random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0” is the first random number table 202a for the low probability. (See FIG. 12A). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0-9” is a first random number table 202a (FIG. 12 (a) for high probability. ))). Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/40”.

  In addition, the first special symbol is not provided with a random value which is a small hit at both low probability and high probability. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, there are 398 random numbers that are small hits at a low probability, and the random values “1 to 398” are stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A). Yes. Thus, when the second special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 398 while the total number of random number values is 400, so the probability that the second special symbol is a small hit is “398/400”. It becomes. In addition, when the second special symbol has a high probability, there are 388 random numbers that are small hits of the second special symbol, and the random number values “10 to 398” are stored in the first random number table 202a (FIG. 12A). Stored in the reference). Thus, when the second special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 388 in the total number of random number values, so the probability that the second special symbol is small hits is “388/400”. It becomes. In the present embodiment, a single table (first random number table 202a) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of tables (first special symbol table, second special symbol table, low probability) Time, high probability table, etc.), and these may be used as appropriate.

  Note that the probability of winning a jackpot and the probability of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not limited to those described above. For example, a random number value that is a small hit in the first special symbol may be provided (that is, it may be small hit), and a random number that is a small hit in the second special symbol is reduced (for example, It may be reduced to 100).

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is provided in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 12B). As shown in FIG. 12B, in the case of the big hit of the first special symbol, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 49” is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until electric support next time)) ”, and when the random number value is“ 50 to 99 ”, the big hit type is“ big hit B (short-time big hit at 16R (electric support 100 times)) ”.

  On the other hand, the jackpot type of the second special symbol is determined according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 (see S806 in FIG. 30). Specifically, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”, it is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”. If the random number value is “50 to 99”, it becomes “big hit B (short hit big at 16R (electric support 100 times))” (see FIG. 12B).

  In the case of “big hit A (16R probability change big hit (until next time electric support))” or “big hit B (16R short time big hit (electric support 100 times))”, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give game value (game value). Therefore, when the variable display based on “big hit A (16R probability change big hit (until next time electric support))” or “big hit B (16R hour and big big hit (100 times electric support))” is executed, the effect change processing (FIG. 47), a win battle effect for indicating that the player is in an advantageous state (big hit) is displayed (see FIG. 15B).

  In addition, in “big jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot (until next time electric power support))”, since the probability variation gaming state is given after the jackpot game, the battle per probability variation to suggest that the probability variation gaming state is granted The effect is displayed, and in “Big Bonus B (16R short and big jackpot (electric support 100 times))”, the short-time gaming state is given after the big jackpot game, so that it is suggested that it is the big hit that the short-time gaming state is given Time effect per battle is displayed. In the battle effect per chance change and the battle effect per hour, the same effect is displayed in the first half of the effect. As a result, it is determined whether it is a battle effect per chance change (a big hit A (16R probability change big hit (until next time electric power support))) or a short time per battle effect (big hit B (16R time short hit per day (100 times electric support))). It can be made indistinguishable until the second half of the production. As a result, it is possible to keep the player interested in the second half of the battle production, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, an arrangement capable of discriminating between “big hit A (16R probable big hit (until next time electric support))” and “big hit B (short hit at 16R (100 times electric support))” is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is difficult to determine which one of the big hits, “Big Jack A (16R Probable Big Hit (until next time of electric support))” or “Big Hit B (16R short time big hit (100 times of electric support))” ( Or, it may be a production that cannot be performed). This makes it difficult (or not possible) for the player to determine whether the gaming state has changed to the probable gaming state or the short-time gaming state after the jackpot game ends. As a result, the player continues the game with the expectation that the game state may be a probability-changing game state that is more advantageous than the short-time game state, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”, it becomes “big hit C (2R probability variable big hit (until next time electric support))”, and a random value Is “50 to 99”, it becomes “big hit D (short hit big hit at 2R (electric support 100 times))” (see FIG. 12B). In “Big Jack C (2R Probable Big Bonus (until next time electric power support))” or “Big Bonus D (2R Time Short Jackpot (electric support 100 times))”, the promising variable gaming state is given after the big jackpot game, so the gaming state is short time game The promotion rank-up effect is displayed to suggest that it is a big hit that shifts from the state to the probabilistic gaming state, and in “Big Jack B (16R short-time big jackpot (100 times electric support))”, the short-time gaming state after the big jackpot game Since it is given again (added), an additional rank-up effect is displayed to suggest that the short-time gaming state is a big hit that is given again (added) (see FIG. 15B).

  In the promotion rank-up effect and the added rank-up effect, the same effect is displayed in the first half of the effect. As a result, it is ranked whether it is a promotion rank-up production (big hit C (2R probable big hit (until next time support))) or an additional rank up production (hit D (2R short time jackpot (100 times power support)))) It can be made indistinguishable until the second half of the up production. As a result, it is possible to keep the player interested in the second half of the rank-up effect, so that the interest of the player can be improved. Further, by displaying the promotion rank-up effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the subsequent game state becoming a probable game state. Furthermore, by displaying the added rank-up effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the time-short gaming state being given again 100 times.

  In the present embodiment, an arrangement capable of discriminating “big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))” and “big hit D (2R short time big hit (electric support 100 times))” is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is difficult to determine whether the big hit C (2R probable big hit (until next time electric support)) or "big hit D (2R short time big hit (100 times electric support))" Or, it may be a production that cannot be performed). This makes it difficult (or not possible) for the player to determine whether the gaming state has changed to the probable gaming state or the short-time gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. As a result, the player continues the game with the expectation that the game state may be a probability-changing game state that is more advantageous than the short-time game state, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”, it becomes “big hit E (2R probability change time short and big big hit (no electric support))”, When the random value is “50 to 99”, it becomes “big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))” (see FIG. 12B).

  The opening / closing operation of the specific prize opening 65a is repeatedly executed twice (two rounds), but the time for the specific prize opening 65a to be in an open state is short (0.5 seconds), and the player is given a game value (game Value) is not (or is difficult to). Therefore, when a variable display based on “big hit E (2R probability variable time short and short big hit (no electric support))” or “big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))” is executed, a skip effect is displayed. (See FIG. 15B). As a result, it is difficult to recognize that the player has become a “big hit E (2R probability change time short no big hit (no electric support))” or “big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))” (or Not possible). As a result, a promiscuous gaming state is granted after the jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot E (2R probability change time short and no big hit (no electric support)), but the probability change game state is given to the player. Recognition can be difficult (or impossible).

  Here, the “big hit E (2R probability variable time short and short big hit (no electric support))” or “big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))” is the second winning hole 640 in the normal gaming state. This is a case where a game ball enters and hits the jackpot. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that it becomes easy to enter a game ball into the second winning opening 640 (execute a lottery of the second special symbol) by pressing the skip switch 51c. In this case, it can be said that in the lottery of the second special symbol, the state where the jackpot that is advantageous to the player is selected is a very advantageous state for the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, in the lottery of the second special symbol, a gaming value (game value) is not given (or is difficult to do) jackpot ("jackpot E (2R probability change time short and short hit big) (No electric support)) and "big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))") are selected.

  Thereby, the game value (game value) obtained by drawing the second special symbol in the normal game state (pressing the skip switch 51c and causing the game ball to enter the second winning port 640) is obtained. Can be reduced. As a result, a gaming machine that is not too advantageous for the player can be provided.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol was “big hit E (2R probability change time short no big hit (no electric support))” or “big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))” In this case, a skip effect (see FIG. 6B), which is the same effect as the case where a small hit is made, is displayed (see FIG. 15B).

  As a result, the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes “big hit E (2R probability change time short and no big hit (no electric support))”, and even if the probability change game state is given after the skip effect is displayed, It is possible to determine whether the skip effect has been executed based on the lottery result of E (2R probability change time short and large big hit (no electric support)), big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support)), or small hit Since it cannot (or is difficult), it cannot be determined that the probability variation gaming state has been granted (or is difficult). As a result, in the normal gaming state, the 2nd prize will be awarded in the expectation that the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol will be “Big Jack E (2R Probability Timed Short / No Big Bonus (No Electric Support))”. A game (unauthorized game) to enter the mouth 640 can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is not restricted to what was mentioned above, You may make it not give a probability change game state in the lottery result of a 2nd special symbol. In addition, the probability variation gaming state is not given in the lottery result of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state is imparted in the lottery result of the second special symbol in the short-time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state. May be. In this case, the gaming board 13 is provided with an operating port (so-called V winning port) to which the probability variation gaming state is given based on the passing of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball passes through the operating port (so-called V winning port). What is necessary is just to provide the control member which can be controlled based on the lottery result of a special symbol whether or not to do.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this control example, the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach has occurred, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the RAM 203 is at the timing when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641. Are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and are stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the second winning opening 640.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. The range of random values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99, and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random number range corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is 0 to ensure the time for entering the ball into the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641. A table with a narrow low probability of 79 is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out”. Further, in the low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so that it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641, and the third symbol display device 81 The variable display is easily performed continuously. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from when the variation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, when the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as. Based on the variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 39) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 12 to 14) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. (See FIG. 11A).

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 12 (d), the variation pattern table 202d includes a first special symbol variation pattern table 202d1 that defines the variation based on the ball entering the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641, and A special figure 2 special symbol variation pattern table 202d2 that defines the variation based on the ball entering the second winning port 640 is set.

  First, the details of the first special symbol variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 13A, the first special symbol variation pattern table 202d1 includes the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d1a (see FIG. 13B) and the special figure 1 deviation (normal) variation. At least a pattern table 202d1b (see FIG. 13C) and a variation pattern table 202d1c (see FIG. 13D) for extraordinary figure 1 deviation (probability change) are set. Although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern table or the like in the short-time gaming state is also set.

  First, the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d1a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d1a. The special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d1a is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot variation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, “0-50” for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), “51-179” for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), various special reach (90 seconds). ) Is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set Is selected from the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d1a.

  FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the extraordinary (normal) variation pattern table 202d1b for the special figure 1. The special pattern deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1b is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place is set. When the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  For outreach, “0 to 149” for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and “150 to 197” for various types of superreach (60 seconds). For various types (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state, and based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 A variation pattern is selected from the one-out (normal) variation pattern table 202d1b.

  FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d1c for extraordinary figure 1 deviation (probability variation). This special figure 1 deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d1c is a data table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol to be removed when the game state is the probability variation game state. This special figure 1 deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d1c is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the above-mentioned special figure 1 deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1b.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. , The outreach reach is determined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  Next, the details of the special pattern 2 special symbol variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14 (a), the special figure 2 special symbol variation pattern table 202d2 includes the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202d2a (see FIG. 14 (b)) and the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern. At least a table 202d2b (see FIG. 14C) and a special pattern 2 deviation variation pattern table 202d2c (see FIG. 14D) are set.

  First, the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202d2a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202d2a. The special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202d2a is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win.

  The variation A (30 seconds) is set as the jackpot variation pattern when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. In the probability variation gaming state, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), Variation A (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, a variation B (10 seconds) is set as a variation pattern in the short-time gaming state, and in the short-time gaming state, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), the variation B (10 Second) is selected. Furthermore, a variation C (0.5 seconds) is set as a variation pattern in the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), the variation C (0.5 seconds) is selected.

  Specifically, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, it corresponds to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 and the gaming state. A variation pattern for which a determination value is set is selected from the big hit variation pattern table 202d2a.

  Although details will be described later, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability change gaming state, a probability effect or a time reduction battle effect is executed (see FIG. 15B). Since this probability change or time reduction battle effect is an effect of 30 seconds, the timing at which the variation A (30 seconds) ends can be matched with the timing of the probability change or time reduction battle effect (30 seconds).

  Further, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the short-time gaming state, a promotion or an additional rank-up effect is executed (see FIG. 15B). This promotion or addition rank-up effect is a 12-second effect. If the second special symbol is a jackpot in the short-time gaming state, the jackpot of 2 rounds (jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot (until next time)) or jackpot D (2R hourly jackpot (100 times power support))) The game time of the jackpot game selected is 2 seconds (the opening time of the specific winning opening is 0.5 seconds and the closing time is 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing at which the variation B (10 seconds) ends and the subsequent jackpot game (2 seconds) ends (12 seconds in total) can coincide with the end timing (12 seconds) of the promotion or addition rank-up effect. .

  Further, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, a skip effect is executed (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect is a 2.5 second effect. In the normal gaming state, if the second special symbol is a big hit, two rounds of big hit ("big hit E (2R probability variable time short no big hit (no electric support))" or "big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support) )) ”) Is selected, and the game time of the jackpot game is 2 seconds (the opening time of the specific winning opening is 0.5 seconds and the closing time is 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing at which the variation C (0.5 seconds) ends and the subsequent jackpot game (2 seconds) ends (a total of 2.5 seconds) matches the end timing of the skip effect (2.5 seconds). Can do. As a result, the fact that the jackpot game has been executed can be made difficult (or impossible) to be recognized by the player, and it is difficult to recognize that the lottery result based on the second special symbol is a jackpot (or Can not).

  FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern table 202d2b. The special pattern 2 small hit variation pattern table 202d2b is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the second special symbol is small hit. As a variation pattern for small hits, only variation C (0.5 seconds) is set in any gaming state. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  In the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern table 202d2b, only the variation C (0.5 seconds) is set as the small hit variation pattern, regardless of the gaming state and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (value). Is 0 to 198), the variation C (0.5 seconds) is selected.

  Specifically, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 sets a determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 when selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit. The selected variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table 202d2b for small hits.

  Here, the skip effect is an effect of 2.5 seconds. When the second special symbol is a small hit, a two-round small hit game is executed, and the game time of the small hit game is 2 seconds (the opening time of the specific winning opening is 0.5 seconds and the closing time is 0.5 seconds). Second x 2). Therefore, the timing at which the variation C (0.5 seconds) ends and the subsequent small hit game (2 seconds) ends (a total of 2.5 seconds) matches the end timing of the skip effect (2.5 seconds). be able to.

  FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 202d2c. The special pattern 2 deviation variation pattern table 202d2c is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the second special symbol is unacceptable.

  A variation A (30 seconds) is set as a variation pattern in which the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state, and regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the probability variation gaming state (when the value is 0 to 198), Variation A (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, a variation B (10 seconds) is set as a variation pattern in the short-time gaming state, and in the short-time gaming state, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), the variation B (10 Second) is selected. Furthermore, a variation A (30 seconds) is set as a variation pattern in the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), the variation A (30 Second) is selected.

  Specifically, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of the way, the MPU 201 corresponds to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 and the gaming state. The variation pattern in which the determination value is set is selected from the variation pattern table for deviation 202d2c.

  Although details will be described later, when the second special symbol is lost in the probability variation gaming state, the off battle effect is executed (see FIG. 15B). Since the outlier battle effect is an effect of 30 seconds, the timing at which the variation A (30 seconds) ends can coincide with the end timing of the outlier battle effect (30 seconds).

  In addition, when a variation in losing based on the first special symbol is being executed, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is losing, a losing battle effect is executed. In this case, when the fluctuation of the deviation based on the first special symbol is stopped during the display of the deviation battle effect, the fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the next hold is started in a state where the deviation battle effect is continued. On the other hand, in the case where the deviation variation based on the first special symbol is continuously executed even at the time of the termination of the outlier battle effect, the variation variation display based on the first special symbol is displayed after the termination battle effect is terminated. Will be executed for the remaining time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the outlier battle effect may be extended by the remaining time of the outlier variation display based on the first special symbol, or a separate effect may be performed.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 12C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit when it matches the value of the random number set in the second hit random number table 202c. Further, the second random number table 202c is used for a normal symbol at a low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and at a high probability (ordinary symbol) at which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than the low probability. And the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  There are 24 random numbers that are hit by a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second per random number table 202c for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability of a jackpot of ordinary symbols is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal winning slot 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first right winning opening 641 is opened “only once for 0.2 seconds”. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the right first winning port 641 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second per random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 while the total number of random number values is 240, and thus the probability that the normal symbol jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal winning opening 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first right winning opening 641 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the right first winning opening 641 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the right first winning opening 641. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the right first winning opening 641 is opened “only once per second × 2” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 39).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least the first per-random number table 202a, the first per-type selection table 202b, the second per-random number table 202c, and the variation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 39), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 38) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 37) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, a second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g. Normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, hour / hour counter 203k, probability variation flag 203m, special figure 1 big hit flag 203o, special figure 2 big hit flag 203p, special figure 2 small hit flag 203r, short time flag 203s Other memory areas 203z are included.

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a stores various counter values acquired based on winning in the first winning port 641 or the right first winning port 641 up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). It is a storage area for storing.

  The first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variably displaying, the first special symbol is stored. When various counter values are stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored.

  The second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640. This is a storage area for directly storing various acquired counter values. Therefore, the second special symbol is not put on hold based on the winning.

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d are obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 10) upon detection of the start winning. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), the MPU 201 receives each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer. The value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second winning opening 640, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer and directly stored in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, in order to execute processing such as jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data corresponding to each start winning (stored in the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to one starting winning is used as the first special symbol holding ball. Shift to execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e goes to the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 23) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Are counters that respectively count the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect performed on the first symbol display device 37 (variable display effect performed on the third symbol display device 81). The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 38, S1614). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4. Each time the variable display effect is executed, a special symbol counter corresponding to the executed effect is decremented by one.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is based on the fact that the game ball has won the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641. When the counter value is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reservation ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d, the MPU 201 The data stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d is used as the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 24). In step S206), a lottery lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second change pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g passes the game ball through the normal winning hole 67 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 23) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as “start winning”). The number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the second symbol display device 83) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on Is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the normal winning opening 67. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 38, S1614). Then, every time the winning prize is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 (see S1404 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see S1309 in FIG. 35).

  The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is a storage area for storing the second per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 10) upon detection of the start winning at the normal winning opening 67. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed (starting winning) in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 23), the MPU 201 of the second control random number counter C4 The value is acquired and stored in the second per random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4) can be stored (held) for a maximum of four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data of the holding balls are stored in order from the holding area with the fastest digestion order among the holding areas where the data is vacant in the order of passing to the normal winning opening 67 (start winning prize). The

  Further, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery or the first symbol This is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in the process of setting the display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variable display effect, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold in order to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize (the value of the second random number counter C4) stored in the ball storage area 203h, the data corresponding to one starting prize is shifted to the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i. . Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is a counter area in which the hour / hour count 100 is set after the 16R hour / short hit game is executed. When the number of time reductions is set, the normal symbol lottery is executed based on the second per-random number table for high probability until the time reduction number is set to zero. Further, when the symbol “◯” indicating the winning of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the normal electric accessory 641a is opened for a longer opening time (1 s in this embodiment) than in the normal gaming state. The operation is repeated twice. Hereinafter, this gaming state is referred to as a time-saving gaming state.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is decremented by 1 every time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing display. When the value of the hour / hour counter 203k becomes 0, the normal symbol is changed from the hour / short gaming state. When the second random number table 202c for the low probability of the hit random number counter 202c is set, and the symbol “◯” indicating the normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the release time is 0.2 s. Thus, the blades of the ordinary electric accessory 641a are opened by setting the number of times of opening once.

  The probability variation flag 203m is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is notified that the 16R probability variable jackpot game has been won, and when the 16R probability variable jackpot game is executed, a flag that is set to ON based on the fact that the jackpot game has ended It is. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON and is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol or the second special symbol indicating the jackpot (all types), it is set to OFF, and after the jackpot game, the jackpot game Set to ON according to jackpot type. Specifically, the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot (until next time electric support)), jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot (until next time power support)), jackpot E (2R probability variation with short and no big hit (no power support)) Is set to ON.

  The special figure 1 big hit flag 203o is turned on when it is determined that the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is a win based on winning in the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641. Is a flag set to Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is a win based on winning the second winning slot 640. . Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is a flag indicating that the second special symbol hit determination is determined to be a small hit. This special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is set to ON when the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit in the second special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 30) described later (see FIG. 30). (See S808 in FIG. 30). Then, it is referred to in the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29), and set to OFF at the timing when the small hit game ends in the small hit control process of the main process (see FIG. 39) (see S1705 in FIG. 39). .

  When the above-described special figure 2 big hit flag 203p or special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is on, it is a case where the big special or small hit game of the second special symbol is executed. If it is being executed, the fluctuation is stopped (S706 in FIG. 29). Here, the big hit (or small win) of the first random number table 202a is made so that the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn based on the winning to the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit or small hit with high probability. ) A determination value is set (see FIG. 12A). Thereby, the fluctuation | variation of a 1st special symbol can be stopped based on a game ball having entered into the 2nd prize opening 640. FIG.

  In addition, as described above, it is possible to enter the second winning opening 640 when the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is in an open state. When this non-electrical accessory 640a is in an open state, a push-down suggestion effect (see FIG. 6A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This opening press suggestion effect can prompt the player to press the skip button 51c.

  Further, in the present embodiment, among the game balls that are launched based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c, the game balls that have not entered the second winning opening 640 are placed at positions where the game balls can easily enter. An operating port 670 is provided for operating the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a to an open state based on the sphere. When the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state, a closing suggestion effect (see FIG. 6A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This closing press suggestion effect prompts the player to press the skip button 51c, and prompts the player to fire a game ball to the operation port 670 (that is, to open the non-electrical accessory 640a). Prompt).

  When the skip button 51c is pressed, the game ball fired by the firing control device 112 is fired to the second winning opening 640. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, as described above, the change of the first special symbol is stopped and the skip effect indicating that the change of the first special symbol is skipped (FIG. 6B). )) Or a battle effect (see FIG. 7A). Thereby, an impression can be given to the player as if the effect was changed based on the pressing of the skip button 51c.

  Further, a front cover member 600 that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the inside is disposed on the front side of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the game ball that is launched based on the press of the skip button 51c has entered the second winning opening 640. As a result, based on having won the second prize opening 640, the variation of the first special symbol is stopped, and the skip effect (see FIG. 6B) or the battle effect (see FIG. 7A). In spite of being displayed, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the presentation has been changed based on pressing of the skip button 51c.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the big hit game or the small hit game of the second special symbol is executed (when the big win or the small win is displayed as the lottery result of the second special symbol), the change of the first special symbol The display is forcibly stopped (forced stop). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the lottery result of a normal symbol is a win, the display of the first special symbol may be stopped. Good, if the first special symbol jackpot game or small bonus game is executed (if the first special symbol lottery result is a big winner or small winner), the change display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped (Forced stop) may be configured.

  In addition, during the change of the first special symbol, when the variable display in which the lottery result of the second special symbol is the big hit or the small win is started, the change display of the changing first special symbol is forcibly stopped. You may comprise. Thereby, the timing at which the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped can be advanced, and an impression that the variation display is skipped can be given to the player more strongly.

  Further, a skip effect that gives an impression that the change of the first special symbol is skipped by the effect display without performing the above-described forced stop may be executed (displayed). For example, the variation of the first special symbol may be changed to a mode in which it is difficult to view (or impossible) so that the characters “Skip!” Are displayed. In addition, during the change of the first special symbol, it may be possible only to change the aspect of the effect being displayed based on pressing of the skip switch 51c or entering the second winning opening 640. Thereby, the player can select a favorite effect mode by pressing the skip switch 51, and can improve the interest of the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the small win is not set as the lottery result of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small bonus may be set as the lottery result of the first special symbol. In this case, a special figure 1 small hit flag which is a flag indicating that the first special symbol hit determination is determined to be a small hit is provided, and is set and referred to in the same manner as the special figure 2 small hit flag. do it. Furthermore, the small symbol (or big hit) is not set as the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped only when the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes the big bonus (or small bonus). You may do it.

  In addition, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (or small win), the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is stopped, but the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (or big hit) If this happens, the variable display of the other special symbol may not be stopped. Furthermore, the variable display of the other special symbol may be stopped according to the type of big hit (or small hit).

  The short time flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is a short time gaming state. The short time flag 203s indicates that the gaming state is the short time gaming state when it is on, and indicates that the gaming state is not the short time gaming state when it is off. The time-short flag 203s is determined to be a promising jackpot ending at the start timing of the ending effect by a jackpot control process (see FIG. 40) described later (S1813: Yes in FIG. 40), and the jackpot E (2R probability changing presence). If it is not the ending of the timeless big hit (no electric support) (S1815: No in FIG. 40), it is set to ON, and it is determined that it is an odd end big hit and the end of the timeless big hit (ie, the normal jackpot ending) (S1817 in FIG. 40: No) is set to off.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table 222a and an effect change selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern table 222a is already well known and will be described briefly. However, the sound lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and roughly describes the variation contents indicated by the variation pattern command. More detailed variation contents are determined from the variation pattern table 222a based on (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from the main control device 110, one fluctuation mode is determined from a plurality of types by lottery.

  When the suggestion effect suggesting pressing of the skip switch 51c is displayed during the fluctuation based on the deviation of the first special symbol, the effect change selection table 222b is displayed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 ( That is, this is a table for selecting an effect to be displayed (changed) when a variation based on the second special symbol is executed). This effect change selection table 222b is referred to in an effect change process (see FIG. 47) described later, and an effect is selected according to the lottery result of the second special symbol and the gaming state.

  Here, with reference to FIG.15 (b), the detail of an effect change selection table is demonstrated. When the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, the battle effect per probability variation (30 seconds) is selected, If it is a big hit B (16R short and big hit (electric support 100 times)), a short time per battle effect (30 seconds) is selected, and if it is a "small hit", a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected. "Is selected, the off-battle effect (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, “big hit D (2R short time big hit (electric support 100 times) )) ”,“ Big hit E (2R probability variation time short and big big hit (no electric support)) ”or“ Big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support)) ”(see FIG. 12B).

  In addition, when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit C (2R probable big hit (until next time))”, the probable rank-up effect (12 seconds) is selected. If “Big hit D (2R short time big hit (electric support 100 times))” is selected, the rank-up effect (12 seconds) is selected, and if “Small hit”, the skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected. If it is “out”, the out-ranking effect (12 seconds) is selected. When the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, “big hit B (16R short time big hit (electric support 100 times) )) ”,“ Big hit E (2R probability variation time short and big big hit (no electric support)) ”or“ Big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support)) ”(see FIG. 12B).

  Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit E (2R probability change time short and big big hit (no electric support))”, “big hit F (2R normal big hit (electric support) “None))” or “Small hit”, the skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected, and if “Out”, the miss battle effect (30 seconds) is selected. When the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, “big hit B (16R short time big hit (electric support 100 times) )) ”,“ Big hit C (2R probable big hit (until next time electric support)) ”or“ Big hit D (2R short time big hit (100 times electric support)) ”(see FIG. 12B).

  As described above, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability changing gaming state, a battle effect (30 seconds) per probability change or shorter time is executed (see FIG. 15B). Since the variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14B), the timing when variation A (30 seconds) ends It is possible to match the end timing of the certainty change or the battle effect per short time (30 seconds).

  Further, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state, a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state is variation C (0.5 seconds) (see FIG. 14C), and the gaming time of the small bonus game is 2 seconds. (Open time of specific winning opening 0.5 seconds and closing time 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing at which the variation C (0.5 seconds) ends and the subsequent small hit game (2 seconds) ends (a total of 2.5 seconds) matches the end timing of the skip effect (2.5 seconds). be able to. Since this skip effect is displayed until the end timing of the small hit game, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize that the small hit has occurred and that the small hit game has been executed. The player is given an impression that the change of the first special symbol is stopped by the display of the skip effect and the change based on the hold of the next first special symbol is started (skipped). Can do.

  Further, when the second special symbol is lost in the probability variation gaming state, the off battle effect (30 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is off in the probability variation gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore, the timing at which the variation A (30 seconds) ends can coincide with the timing at which the off-balance battle effect (30 seconds) ends.

  Next, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the short-time gaming state, the promotion or the rank-up effect (12 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a jackpot in the short-time gaming state is the variation B (10 seconds) (see FIG. 14B), and the gaming time of the jackpot game is 2 seconds (specific winning a prize opening) Open time 0.5 seconds and closing time 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing at which the variation B (10 seconds) ends and the subsequent jackpot game (2 seconds) ends (12 seconds in total) can coincide with the end timing (12 seconds) of the promotion or addition rank-up effect. .

  Further, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the short-time gaming state, a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is the same as when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state, and the end timing (2.5 seconds in total) of the small hit game executed in the short-time gaming state. The end timing is the same.

  Further, when the second special symbol is out of play in the short-time gaming state, the out-of-rank rank effect (10 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is out of play in the short-time gaming state is variation B (10 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore, it is possible to match the end timing of the variation B (10 seconds) with the end timing of the off-ranking effect (10 seconds).

  Here, although the promotion time or the rank-up effect (12 seconds) and the off-ranking effect (10 seconds) are different in the production time, the first half of each production is the same production, and the latter half of the production It is an effect that can determine whether the rank-up effect is an promoted rank-up effect, an added rank-up effect, or an outlier rank-up effect when 8 seconds have elapsed since the effect was displayed. Thereby, since interest can be continuously given to the player until the second half of the rank-up effect, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is similar to the case where the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation game state or the short-time game state, and the end timing of the big hit game executed in the normal game state (total 2.5). Second) and the end timing match. As a result, the fact that the jackpot game has been executed can be made difficult (or impossible) to be recognized by the player, and it is difficult to recognize that the lottery result based on the second special symbol is a jackpot (or Can not).

  Also, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the normal gaming state, the skip effect is executed similarly (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is the same as when the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, or when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state. The end timing (2.5 seconds in total) of the small hit game executed in the state coincides with the end timing.

  Furthermore, when the second special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state, the out-of-game battle effect (30 seconds) is executed. The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore. The timing at which the variation A (30 seconds) executed based on the deviation of the second special symbol ends can be matched with the timing at which the off battle effect (30 seconds) ends.

  In addition, when a variation in losing based on the first special symbol is being executed, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is losing, a losing battle effect is executed. In this case, when the fluctuation of the deviation based on the first special symbol is stopped during the display of the deviation battle effect, the fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the next hold is started in a state where the deviation battle effect is continued. On the other hand, in the case where the deviation variation based on the first special symbol is continuously executed even at the time of the termination of the outlier battle effect, the variation variation display based on the first special symbol is displayed after the termination battle effect is terminated. Will be executed for the remaining time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the outlier battle effect may be extended by the remaining time of the outlier variation display based on the first special symbol, or a separate effect may be performed.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, a first variation start flag 223c1, a second variation start flag 223c2, a first stop type selection flag 223d1, a second The stop type selection flag 223d2, the effect counter 223e, the suggestion effect flag 223f, the suggestion effect state storage area 223g, the effect change flag 223h, the pseudo effect change flag 223i, the gauge level 223j, the power-off flag 223y, and the other memory area 223m are provided. It has been.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to each special symbol, and each of these areas is winning information. Each value of each counter C1-C3 is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is a first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) in the same manner as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. It is a counter that displays symbols in a variable display (dynamic display), and counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of a variable display effect held in the main control device 110.

  The first variation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. (FIG. 43, S2102). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S2602).

  The second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when a second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. (FIG. 43, S2106). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S2606).

  The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received (FIG. 43, S2109). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S2610).

  The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received (FIG. 43, S2109). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S2610).

  The effect counter 223e is a loop counter of 0 to 198, and is updated in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed in the V interrupt process (FIG. 112) of the display control device 114. When the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received, the suggestion effect flag for executing the suggestion effect is set to ON based on the value of the effect counter 223e and the variation pattern extracted from the received command. (See S2105 in FIG. 43).

  The power-off flag 223y is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 when the main controller 110 detects power-off, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y is turned on. The power-off process is set (S2017 in FIG. 42). In the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 41), when the power-off flag 223y is on, the RAM work area is cleared and the power-off flag 223y is set to off (FIG. 41). S1910).

  The suggestion effect flag 223f is a flag for determining whether or not to execute (display) various suggestion effects (pressing suggestion effect when closed, pressing suggestion effect when opening). The suggestion effect flag 223f is referred to in an suggestion effect process (FIG. 49) described later, and various suggestion effects are executed (displayed) if turned on, and not executed (displayed) if turned off. The suggestion effect flag 223f is set to ON based on the extracted variation pattern and the effect counter when the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (see S2104 in FIG. 43), and various suggestion effects are executed (displayed). When the fluctuation that is being performed is stopped, it is set to off (see S2118 in FIG. 43). Further, when the effect is changed by a winning effect changing process (FIG. 45) described later, since execution (display) of various suggested effects is ended, the suggested effect flag 223f is set to OFF.

  The suggestion effect state storage area 223g is an area that is set when various suggestion effects are being executed. The suggestion effect storage area 223g is classified into the types of suggestion effects currently being executed (displayed) (press suggestion effect when closed, press suggestion effect when opened). This is the area where the value based is stored. This suggestion effect state storage area 223g is referred to in the suggestion effect process (see FIG. 49) described later, and executes (displays) various suggestion effects (press suggestion effect when closed, press suggestion effect when opened). When the various display suggestion effect commands are set, a value based on the set suggestion effect type (pressing suggestion effect at closing, pressing suggestion effect at opening) is stored.

  The effect change flag 223h is a flag for determining whether or not the effect change process is executed in the variable display being executed. If the effect change flag 223h is on, it indicates that the effect change process has been executed in the variable display, and if it is off, it indicates that the effect change process has not been executed in the variable display being executed. The effect change flag 223h is set to ON when the effect change process (see S2309 in FIG. 45) is executed in the winning effect change process (see FIG. 45). When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command for stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol is received, that is, when the change display whose presentation is changed by the presentation change process (see FIG. 47) is stopped. The change flag 223h is set off.

  Although details will be described later, when the effect change flag 223h is on, that is, when the effect is changed in the variable display during execution, in the effect change process upon winning (see FIG. 45), The change (pseudo effect change process and effect change process) is not executed (see S2306: No in FIG. 45). Thereby, although the effect (battle effect or rank-up effect) changed by the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 46) is being executed (displayed), the effect change process (or the pseudo effect change process is performed again). ) Is executed, and the production can be suppressed from being changed.

  The pseudo effect change flag 223i is a flag for determining whether or not the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 46) is executed in the variable display being executed. If the pseudo effect change flag 223h is on, the pseudo effect change process is executed in the variable display being executed, indicating that the effect has been changed, and if it is off, the pseudo effect change process is executed in the variable display being executed. It is not done and shows that the production has not been changed. The pseudo effect change flag 223i is set to ON when the pseudo effect change process (see S2308 in FIG. 45) is executed in the winning effect change process (see FIG. 45). When the opening command for executing (displaying) the opening effect of the jackpot game is received, that is, the variable display in which the effect is changed by the pseudo effect changing process (see FIG. 47) is stopped, and the jackpot game is started. The pseudo effect change flag 223h is set to OFF.

  Although details will be described later, when the pseudo effect change flag 223i is on, that is, when the effect is changed in the variable display during execution, in the effect change process upon winning (see FIG. 45), (Pseudo effect change process and effect change process) are not executed (see S2306: No in FIG. 45). Thereby, although the effect (battle effect or rank-up effect) changed by the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 46) is being executed (displayed), the pseudo effect change process (or effect change process) is performed again. ) Is executed, and the production can be suppressed from being changed.

  The gauge level 223j is used to determine the mode of the gauge (the width of the area where the gauge is lit and displayed) displayed at the right center of the third symbol display device 81 in the closing press effect (see FIG. 7B). It is an area for storing values. The value of the gauge level 223j is set in the range of 0 to 5000. Specifically, when the gauge level 223j is 0, the area where the gauge is lit and displayed is also 0 (that is, only the gauge frame is displayed and the inside is not lit and displayed). When the gauge level 223j is 2500, the width of the area where the gauge is lit and displayed is half the maximum width, and the area from the left end to the center of the gauge frame is lit and displayed. When the gauge level 223j is 5000, the width of the area where the gauge is lit and displayed is the maximum width, and all areas from the left end to the right end of the gauge frame are lit and displayed. In this way, the width of the area that is lit and displayed starting from the left end of the gauge frame is determined according to the value of the gauge level 223j.

  The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 50) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2801 in FIG. 50) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  Next, the image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 22) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 52B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b, a third symbol area 235d, and a power-on title image area 235f are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first winning port 64 and the right first winning port 641 are displayed. Alternatively, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the second winning opening 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 receives the image data corresponding to the power-on main image, the power-on variation image, and the power-on title image area 235f from the character ROM 234. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer to 235a (see FIG. 65).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 18 shows that the display control device 114 is turned on when the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display controller 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to turn on the main power-on main shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 performs the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 18B is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 18C. The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 19B shows the rear surface A corresponding to “Empty stage”, respectively.

  Among the backs A and B, the back images corresponding to the backs A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage receives only a part of the rear surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ′, and the position from the position a including the initial position is set. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation 22, the initial position of the rear surface B is immediately displayed in the third pattern display by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and the scroll display or color tone should not be changed over time. It is possible to display et al. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the ten main symbols (see FIG. 53) having the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the first symbol display device 37 has started a variation effect after the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640 has been entered. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the changing effect is not immediately started in the three-symbol display device 81.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the frame buffers of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Next, the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, and another storage area 223z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while if the stop type of the variation effect is a big hit, The stop symbol indicating the jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state from now on and the ball restricting plate 654 of the special winning device 650 that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect informs the player of the end of the special gaming state and informs the player of the game value (ordinary symbol short time period) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or a special symbol that is reserved This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of the normal symbol, the more opportunities for the ball to pass through the through gate 67. Therefore, there are more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and more opportunities to hit the normal symbol. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the right first winning opening 641 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, the right first winning opening 641 is a winning opening from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters the ball, so that the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball moves to the right first. As it becomes easier to enter the winning opening 641, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  In addition, in the ending effect, the player may make a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol held by notifying that any lottery result of the special symbol lots on hold will be a big win of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates either the back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either “city stage” or “empty stage”), or a back surface different from the back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is displayed.

  The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the rear surfaces A and B as the drawing target when the rear surface type is specified to display either the rear surface A or B. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the top address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 20) "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 21 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 21).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 21, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 21, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. The simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2805 in FIG. 50). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 63 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3101 in FIG. 52B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 52B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 52B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 52 (b) S3109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 53 to 59) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3105 in FIG. 52B), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 63B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, describing the contents of image drawing instructions for is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 22) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 52 (b)). ), The pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 60) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 22), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 22, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 52B). The time counter 233h is decremented by 1 each time the display setting process (see) is executed (see S4307 in FIG. 60). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S2802 in FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 64). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 64). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4902 in FIG. 65).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 52B) is executed (see S4902 in FIG. 65).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  In addition, the other storage area 233z has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 53) of the display control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

<Regarding control processing of main controller>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process (FIG. 38) activated upon power-on, a main process (FIG. 39) executed after the startup process, and periodically (2 in this embodiment). There is a timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) that is activated (with a millisecond cycle) and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 37) that is activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The interrupt process (FIG. 23) and the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 37) will be described, and then the startup process (FIG. 38) and the main process (FIG. 39) will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the third symbol variation pattern and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and a through gate accompanying the passage of a ball at the normal winning port (through gate) 67 is executed. A passing process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  The firing control process (S108) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on. In this embodiment, when the skip switch 51c provided on the operation handle 51 is pressed, the resistor used for setting the firing intensity of the firing control device 112 is changed and fired from the firing solenoid 142. The launch intensity of the game ball is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a firing control device 112 that can vary the firing strength of the firing solenoid based on a signal input from the main control device 110 is provided, and in the firing control process (S 108) Based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, a signal instructing the emission intensity may be transmitted to the emission control device 112. Thereby, without providing two types of resistors, as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the firing strength can be changed according to whether or not the skip switch 51c is operated, so that the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the special symbol variation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various determinations and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the variation display determined by predetermined control is performed. In this manner, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled so as to be able to perform variable display at the same time, or are controlled to be stopped and displayed in a display manner indicating the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104), it is first determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). If it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). Details of the first special symbol variation stopping process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in a variable display (S202: No), a first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (S203) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, but if the second special symbol is not hit, the reserved data (various counters) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a. If (value) is stored, jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the reserved data is executed. On the other hand, when the second special symbol is a win, the above-described processing is not executed and the variable display is not started. This is to prevent the player from being confused by the simultaneous occurrence of jackpots in the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) or the first special symbol variation stop process (S204) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). If it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variable display (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed. Details of the second special symbol variation stopping process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in a variable display (S205: No), a second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (S206) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. Similar to the first special symbol variation start process (S203), if the first special symbol variation is not successful, If reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a, jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the reserved data is executed. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is a win, the above-described processing is not executed and the variable display is not started. Further, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small jackpot, the first special symbol variably displayed on the first symbol display device is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation starting process (S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is acquired (S301), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. It is determined whether it is larger (S302).

  In the processing of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S302: No), the reserved ball for which the variation display in the first special symbol is not executed is Since no new change is started, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e ( N1) is subtracted by 1 (S303). Then, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  When the process of S304 is finished, it is determined whether or not a variation based on the big hit or the small win of the second special symbol is being executed (S305). In the process of S305, when it is determined that the variation based on the big hit or the small win of the second special symbol is not being executed (S305: No), the lottery result based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol that starts the variation is determined. The first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306), and the process proceeds to S307. Details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the variation based on the big hit or the small win of the second special symbol is being executed (S305: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as out (S308). ), The off symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device is set (S309), and the process proceeds to S307. By the processing of S308 and S309, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol from being a big hit (or small hit) during the fluctuation in which the second special symbol is a big hit or small hit. As a result, the second special symbol and the first special symbol can be a big hit or a small hit at the same time, so that a problem that the player is confused can be suppressed.

  When the process of S306 or S309 is completed, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting and setting a variation pattern based on the determination result of the first special symbol is executed (S307), and this processing is terminated. Details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In this way, when the variation based on the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed, all the lotteries of the first special symbol that are executed during that time are set as out, and the variation based on the out is executed. become. However, the present invention is not limited to this. While the variation based on the big hit or the small bonus of the second special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in an outlier manner. The lottery result of the first special symbol is You may make it preserve | save (store). Then, the jackpot game or the jackpot game may be started based on a lottery result stored (stored) after the jackpot game or the jackpot game of the second special symbol is finished. Furthermore, when the jackpot game is started based on the lottery result stored (stored) after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is finished, an effect as if the jackpot game is continued is executed. It may be.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 25, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 26, S306), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401), and the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (probability change). It is determined whether or not (S402). Whether or not the gaming state is a high probability gaming state is determined based on whether or not the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203m is on (that is, the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (probability variation)) (S402: Yes), based on the first per-random number table 202a for high probability, It is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is off (that is, the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (not being probability changed)) (S402: No), the first per-random number table 202a for low probability is displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  In the process of S405, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S405). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S405: Yes), the jackpot symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, and the special chart one jackpot The flag 203o is set on (S406). As a result, in the first symbol display device 37, the symbol based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 (for example, “7” if 16R probability variation big hit) is set in the left seven-segment LED of the seven-segment display 37b. The

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is OFF (S405: No), the symbol is removed from the first symbol display device 37 and set (S407). In this embodiment, in the case of detachment, “-” indicating detachment is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed when the variable display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 25, S203), will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307). In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), the variation pattern is changed to each counter based on the result of the success / failure determination based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol retention ball execution area 203c. This is a process for selecting based on a value.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol acquired in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) is a jackpot (S501). . In the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S501: Yes), the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big win is determined from the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (S502). . When the variation pattern is set in the process of S502, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, as the fluctuation pattern for losing, `` completely out '', `` outside normal reach '', `` outside super reach '', and `` outside special reach '' are defined, and as the variation pattern for jackpot, `` per normal reach '', Various types of “per win super reach” and “per hit special reach” are defined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the first special symbol is off (S501: No), the fluctuation pattern at the time of the off is determined (S503). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S502, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  Here, the various types of “win superreach” and “outgoing superreach” include “superreach A”, “superreach B” and other superreach, and are based on the value of the variable type counter CS1. Thus, it is selected in the process of S307. In the present control example, the super reach type (“super reach A”, “super reach B”, etc.) is selected by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The MPU 221 may be selected. Thereby, the processing load of MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced.

  When the process of S502 or the process of S503 is completed, a first change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern determined in the process of S502 or S503 is set (S504). Next, a first stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S502 or S503 is set (S505). The first variation pattern command and the first stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are controlled by the voice lamp control in S1701 of the main process (see FIG. 39). Is transmitted to the device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the first stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S505 ends, the process returns to the first special symbol variation start process.

  By starting the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol together with the setting of the first variation pattern command, the variation time can be measured at the same time as the variation start of the first special symbol. Variation time can be measured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104), will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (S204).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 28, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation time of the second special symbol (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is not the end timing (S601: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is the end timing (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203o is set (S601: Yes). S602). In the process of S602, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203o is set (S602: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set off (S603). Various settings of the jackpot game based on the determined variable stop type are made (S604). Specifically, in the case of jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot (until next time electric support)), jackpot B (short jackpot at 16R (electric support 100 times)), the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to 16 The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 30 s.

  After finishing the process of S604, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is set to stop the fluctuation of the second special symbol (S605), and the fluctuation of the second special symbol of the first special symbol display device 37 is stopped. (S606), and the process proceeds to S609.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203o is off (S602: No), it is determined whether the hour / hour counter 203k is larger than "0" (S607). If it is determined that the hour / hour counter 203k is greater than “0” (S607: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203k is decremented by one (S608). That is, every time the first special symbol is variably displayed once, the hour / hour counter 203k is decremented by one. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / counter counter 203k is a value smaller than 0 (that is, 0) (S607: No), the process of S608 is skipped and the process of S609 is executed.

  In the processing of S609, a first variation stop command is set to instruct the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the variation display of the first special symbol (S609). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating the determined determination result (S610), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S206), the second special symbol has no hold in contrast to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 25, S203) described above. The difference is that the number counter subtraction (S303) and the special symbol holding ball storage area shift process (S304) are unnecessary.

  Specifically, in the second special symbol variation start process (S206), first, it is determined whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d (S701). In the present embodiment, since the second special symbol is not reserved, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d. The variation display based on the stored data is stored until the variation is stopped, and the variation is stopped and erased (see S1013 in FIG. 32). Thus, while the variation based on the second special symbol is being executed, new data is not stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, and the variation based on the second special symbol is stopped. New data can be stored.

  In the process of S701, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d (S701: No), this process is finished as it is because it is not the timing for starting the change of the second special symbol. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S701, when it is determined that there is data in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d (S701: Yes), it is determined whether or not a variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed. A determination is made (S702).

  In the processing of S702, when it is determined that the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is not being executed (S702: No), the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (S703) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection The process (S704) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703) will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, and details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S702, when it is determined that the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed (S702: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is not the jackpot or the jackpot. Therefore, it is set in the same manner as the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 25). Specifically, the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as out (S705), the out symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S706), and the process proceeds to S704. .

  As described above, when the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed, all the lotteries of the second special symbol that are executed during that time are set as missed, and the variation based on the miss is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in an outlier manner, but the lottery result of the second special symbol is saved (stored) ) May be kept. And you may start a jackpot game based on the lottery result preserve | saved (stored) after completion | finish of the jackpot game of a 1st special symbol. Furthermore, when the jackpot game is started based on the lottery result stored (stored) after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is finished, an effect as if the jackpot game is continued is executed. It may be.

  Next, a second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703), which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703).

  The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 30, S703) differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 26, S306) described above in that the lottery result includes a small bonus. Since the other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  In the processing from S801 to S804, the lottery result of the second special symbol is acquired based on the data of the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d, similarly to the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (FIG. 26).

  When the processing of S803 or S804 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S805). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S805: Yes), the jackpot symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, and the special symbol 2 jackpot The flag 203p is set on (S806), and the process returns to the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29). Through the processing of S806, the first symbol display device 37 has a symbol based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 (for example, “7” for 16R probability variation big hit) on the right 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b. Set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S805 that the lottery result is not a big win (S805: No), it is then determined whether or not the lottery result is a small win (S807.) In the process of S807, the lottery is determined. When it is determined that the result is a small hit (S807: Yes), the small special symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device is set based on the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2. The special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is set (S808), and the process returns to the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29).

  In the process of S807, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S807: No), the second special symbol outlier symbol is set in the first symbol display device (S809), and the second special symbol variation start is started. Return to the process (see FIG. 29). In the present embodiment, in the case of detachment, “-” indicating detachment is set to the right 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S206), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 31, S704), the first variation pattern command set in S504 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S307) described above is the second The change is made to the variation pattern command (S904), and the first stop type command set in the process of S505 is changed to the second stop type command (S905). In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol, there may be a small win as the lottery result, so when the lottery result is a small hit (S903: Yes), based on the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern table 202d2b. The variation pattern is determined. Since other parts are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process (S207).

  In the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 32, S207), the variation stop processing (S1005 and S1006) for the second special symbol is performed in contrast to the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 28, S204) described above. The difference is that the start of the small hit is set when the fluctuation based on the small hit is stopped. Since the other parts are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207), first, similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 28), the processes from S1001 to S1006 (the first special symbol change stop process is a process from S601 to S606). Execute. The jackpot type in the second special symbol is different from the jackpot type in the first special symbol, and in the setting of the jackpot start set in the processing of S1004, various jackpot games according to the jackpot type in the second special symbol Setting is made.

  Specifically, in the case of jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot (until next time electric support)), jackpot B (short jackpot at 16R (electric support 100 times)), the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to 16 The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 30 s. On the other hand, jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot (until next time electric support)), jackpot D (2R short-term jackpot (electric support 100 times)), jackpot E (2R probability varying time short and big jackpot (no electric support)), jackpot F (2R In the case of a normal jackpot (no electric support), the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to two, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 0.5 s.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1002 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203p is not set (S1002: No), it is then decided whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is set (S1007). In the process of S1007, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is set (S1007: Yes), the start of the small hit is set (S1008), and the process proceeds to S1009. In the process of S1008, the number of rounds in which the small hit game is executed is set to two, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 0.5 s.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1007, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is not set (S1007: No), the process of S1008 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1009. When the process of S1007 or S1008 is completed, the subtraction process (S1009 and S1010) of the hour / middle counter 203k is executed similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 28), and the process proceeds to S1011.

  In the process of S1011, a second variation stop command is set to instruct the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the variation display of the second special symbol (S1011). The second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating the determined determination result (S1012), and the process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, but one of the first and second special symbols can be executed. When a big hit game occurs, the variable display of the other special symbol is stopped. Thereby, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and can play the game.

  Moreover, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Can do. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  In addition, compared with the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed one by one, the pachinko machine 10 has a variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Even if it is relatively short, either one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a state where the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is easy to be executed, thereby increasing the efficiency of the game. The problem that the state in which the special symbol is not variably displayed becomes long can be suppressed.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 23) and wins the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641, or the second winning port 640 (start winning). This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the values when a start winning is determined.

  When the start winning process (S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 (S1101). Here, a ball entering the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 (S1101: Yes), the value of the abnormal winning counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S1102), and the first special symbol is set. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S1103). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1104).

  If there is no winning at the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 (S1101: No), or even if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641, the first special When the value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S1105: No), the process proceeds to S1108. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 (S1101: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1104: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203e (S1105). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S1106).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 39) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol 1 reserved ball in the RAM 223. Stored in the number counter 203e.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the processing of S1106, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) (S1107). Specifically, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, since the winning information is not held in the second special symbol, in the processing from S1108 to S1112, the addition processing of the holding ball number counter and the setting processing of the holding ball number command are performed with respect to the processing from S1101 to S1107. This is different in that various counter values are stored directly in the holding ball execution area without performing the above. In this embodiment, the winning information is not held in the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined number (for example, four balls) of winning information is reserved as in the first special symbol. May be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, unless the first special symbol is changing, a press suggestion effect that suggests pressing the skip switch 51c so as to cause the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 is not displayed. Therefore, when a game ball frequently enters the second winning port 640 even though the first special symbol is not changing, the game ball is illegally inserted into the second winning port 640. Can be considered. Therefore, although the first special symbol is not changing, the number of game balls entering the second prize opening 640 is counted, and if the number of game balls counted exceeds a predetermined number, error processing is performed. (S1109 and S1114 to S1116).

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the second winning port 640 (whether or not a game ball has entered the second winning port 640) (S1108). In the process of S1108, when it is determined that there is no winning in the second winning opening 640 (S1108: No), the process proceeds to S1113 as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1108 that there is a winning at the second winning port 640 (S1108: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the first special symbol is changing (S1109). If it is determined in the process of S1109 that the first special symbol is not changing (S1109: Yes), the abnormal entrance counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111.

  In the process of S1111, it is determined whether or not there is data in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d (S1111). If it is determined in the processing of S1111 that there is no data in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d (S1111: No), the first random number counter C1, the first per category counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 Each value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d (S1112), and the process proceeds to S1113.

  In the process of S1111, when it is determined that there is data in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d (S1111: Yes), since the variation based on the second special symbol is being executed, the process of S1112 is performed. Skip to step S1113. When it is determined that there is data in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d (S1111: Yes), the processing of S1112 is skipped, so that the winning information is not held in the second special symbol. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1109 that the first special symbol is not changing (S1109: No), a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 even though the first special symbol is not changing. Since it is a ball, 1 is added to the value of the abnormal entrance counter 203t (S1114), and the process proceeds to S1115.

  In the process of S1115. It is determined whether or not the value of the abnormal entrance counter 203t is greater than 3 (S1115). The abnormal entry counter 203t is initialized to 0 when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the change of the first special symbol (S1110). Therefore, even if four or more game balls enter the second winning opening 640 in spite of the fact that the first special symbol has not changed, the value of the abnormal ball counter 203 t becomes larger than three.

  The value of the abnormal winning counter 203t is also initialized to 0 when a gaming ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 (S1102). That is, when the first special symbol fluctuates, the value of the abnormal entrance counter 203t is initialized to 0. As a result, an illegal act of entering the game ball into the second winning port 640 without starting the change of the first special symbol (does not enter the game ball into the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641). It can be detected with high accuracy. For example, when the variation of the first special symbol is started, but the game ball does not enter the second winning opening 640 during the variation of the first special symbol because the timing of pressing the skip switch 51c is bad. In this case, since the value of the abnormal entry counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S1102), it is not determined as an illegal act.

  In the process of S1115, if it is determined that the value of the abnormal pitch counter 203t is greater than 3 (S1115: Yes), the first special symbol does not start to change (the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641). In this case, an illegal command for entering the game ball into the second prize opening 640 is executed, so an error command is set (S1116), and the process proceeds to S1113. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1115 that the value of the abnormal ball counter 203t is 3 or less (S1115: No), the process of S1116 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1113.

  The error command set in the processing of S1116 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 or the like by the external output processing of the main processing described later. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives an error command, it performs error processing corresponding to the command (for example, notification by an error sound, notification by lighting of an LED indicating an error, etc.). An error command may be set in the processing of S1116, and a signal indicating the occurrence of the error may be output to the external output terminal board 261. Thereby, in the hall computer which is detecting the signal of the external output terminal board 261, the occurrence of the error can be detected, and the occurrence of the error can be notified to the hall clerk.

  In the process of S1115, if it is determined that the value of the abnormal entry counter 203t is greater than 3 (S1115: Yes), that is, if it is determined that an illegal game is being executed using the skip switch 51c. The game ball may be prevented from being fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed, or the launch intensity of the game ball that is fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed cannot be reached to the second winning opening 640. It may be changed to strength. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the above-described frauds from being continuously performed, and to suppress a problem that the game shop side is greatly damaged.

  After the processing of S1108, S1111, S1115, S1116 or S1109, prefetch processing is executed (S1113), and this processing is terminated. Details of the prefetch process (S1113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, it is impossible (or difficult) to enter the second winning opening 640 except for the game balls that are launched based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c. Yes. Therefore, when a game ball enters the second winning port 640 even though the skip switch 51c is not pressed, there is a possibility that the game ball is illegally inserted into the second winning port 640. Since it is high, you may make it alert | report the said state. Specifically, a signal indicating the state may be output to the external output terminal board 261 so that it can be detected by the hall computer 262, or an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp that has received the error command is received. An error sound may be output by the control device 113 or an LED indicating an error may be turned on. As a result, an illegal act of causing a game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 can be detected.

  Further, when the suggestion effect (FIG. 6 (a)) indicating that the skip switch 51c is pressed is not displayed, the skip switch 51c is pressed for a predetermined time or more, or the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined number of balls. If the player has entered the ball, it may be determined that an illegal act has occurred and the same processing may be performed. Thereby, it is possible to discriminate and notify the illegal act with higher accuracy. In addition, cheating occurred when the number of game balls entering the second winning port 640 increased relative to the number of game balls entering the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641. Or the number of winning balls to be paid out based on winning in the second winning port 640 with respect to the number of winning balls paid out based on winning in the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 It may be determined that fraud has occurred when the number of errors increases. In these cases, error processing may be performed in the same manner as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the prefetching process (S1113) which is one process in the start winning process (refer to S105 of FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S1113).

  In this prefetching process (S1113), it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64, the right first winning opening 641 or the second winning opening 640 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640 (S1201; No), there is no pre-reading winning, so this process is terminated. .

  On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640 (S1201: Yes), the gaming state at the time when the variation based on the winning is started is definitely changed. It is determined whether or not the game state is set (S1202). In the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of variation is the probability variation gaming state (S1202: Yes), based on the first per-random number table 202a for high probability (see FIG. 12A). The lottery result is acquired (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1205. In the processing of S1203, when there is a new winning at the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641, the lottery result is acquired using the jackpot determination value of the first special symbol. On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the second winning opening 640, the lottery result is acquired using the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value of the second special symbol (see FIG. 12A).

  In the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of variation is not the probability variation gaming state (S1202: No), based on the first per-random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 12A). The lottery result is acquired (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1205. In the process of S1204, as in the process of S1203, when there is a new winning at the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641, there is a new winning at the first special symbol and the second winning opening 640. In such a case, the determination value of the second special symbol is used.

  When the processing of S1203 or S1204 is completed, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processing of S1203 and S1204 is set (S1205), and this processing is terminated. In the prefetch process (S1110), not only in the present embodiment, but also the type of variation pattern to be selected (outreach reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) is discriminated and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a winning information command. May be configured to be notified.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device and the electric motor attached to the right first winning port 641. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 641a.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 35, S106), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S1301). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device is showing a hit, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 641a associated with the right first winning port 641 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S1301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S1302), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S1302: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S1307). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is greater than 0 (S1308), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 0 (S1308: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S1308: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (S1309).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is shifted (S1310). In the process of S1310, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is acquired (S1311).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol (S1312). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S1312: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S1314). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S1314: Yes), the process proceeds to S1313.

  If the special symbol jackpot is not being hit in the processing of S1314 (S1314: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so acquired in the processing of S1311 Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table 202c for high probability (FIG. 12C), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S1315). . Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 12C).

  In the process of S1312, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S1312: No), the process proceeds to S1313. In the process of S1313, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1311 is low. Based on the second random number table 202c for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S1313). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 12C).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S1313 or S1315 is a normal symbol win (S1316). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S1316: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S1318). In the processing of S1318, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “O” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-short state (S1319). If the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-short state (S1319: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit for the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S1321). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S1321: Yes), the process proceeds to S1320. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to prevent the game ball from flowing down below the right first winning port 641 due to excessively winning the ball in the right first winning port 641. Even when the normal symbol is hit, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 641a are set in the same manner as when the normal symbol is lost.

  In the process of S1321, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1321: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the right first winning opening The opening period of the electric accessory 641a accompanying 641 is set to 1 second, and the number of opening is set to 2 (S1322), and the process proceeds to S1323. In the process of S1319, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short time state of the normal symbol (S1319: No), the process proceeds to S1320. In the process of S1320, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 641a associated with the first right winning opening 641 is set. In addition to setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S1320), and the process proceeds to S1323.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1316 that the symbol is out of the normal symbols (S1316: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S1317). In the process of S1317, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S1323.

  In the process of S1323, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S1323). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S1323: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is performed. Is set to 3 seconds (S1324), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S1325: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S1325), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the opening period of the right first winning port 641 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the right first winning port 641.

  In the process of S1302, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S1302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S1303). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S1324 or the processing of S1325 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S1303 (S1303: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S1303 (S1303: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1304). In the processing of S1304, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the processing of S1318, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) in the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S1318, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. (S1318). When the stop display is set by the process of S1317, when the second symbol display update process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 39) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S1318 or S1317.

  Next, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 35, S106) when the fluctuation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started is the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a win (S1305). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S1305: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 641a associated with the first right winning opening 641 is set (S1306), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 641a is set by the process of S1306, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 39) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S1320 or the process of S1322 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S1305, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S1305: No), the process of S1306 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67. In addition, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 36, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (S1401). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (S1401: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired ( S1402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1403).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (S1401: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203g ( If M) is not less than 4 (S1403: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (S1401: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1403: Yes), the normal symbol is reserved. The value (M) of the ball counter 203g is incremented by 1 (S1404). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203. (S1405), and the process is terminated. In the process of S1405, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1612 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1612. Note that the RAM determination value is a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, for example, as will be described later in the processing of S1715 of the main processing (FIG. 39). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1612). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1613, S1614) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1613, S1614) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S1610, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Here, when a special symbol that is fluctuating is stored, a power-on variation image (see FIGS. 18B to 18C) is displayed in a variable manner on the display control device 114 with respect to the sound lamp control device 113. You are instructed to do so. Note that this change instruction may be executed, for example, in the initial setting (S1601) in the start-up process, or may be executed in another process. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1611), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each process of S1701 to S1708 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1710 and S1711 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 39), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 23) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 24) or the start winning process (see FIG. 33) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 38) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1704). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). Details of the jackpot control process (S1704) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the big hit control process (S1704) is finished, the small hit control process (S1705) is then executed. In the small hit control process, similar to the big hit control process (S1704) described above, the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a is controlled, and the corresponding command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the start and end timing of the small hit game. Send. Specifically, in the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 32), when the start of a small hit is set, the number of times the specific winning opening 65a is opened (the number of rounds) is controlled to be 2 times. The opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is controlled to 0.5 s. Further, the interval from when the specific winning opening 65a is closed to when it is opened is also controlled to 0.5 s. When the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is executed, a command indicating that the specific winning opening 65a has changed to an open (or closed) state is transmitted to the audio lamp control apparatus 113, whereby the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is displayed. , It becomes possible to determine the state (open state or closed state) of the specific winning opening 65a.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 641a associated with the first right winning port 641 is executed (S1706). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1306 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 35), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S1322 or the processing of S1320 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 27) or the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 31), the variation is determined according to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the variation pattern set by the process of S307 of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 25) or the process of S704 of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) is used. When the corresponding variation time is over, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 25) of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 25). 27) or the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 31), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S1324 or the processing of S1325 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1304 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 35), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S1317 or the processing of S1318 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 35). To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1709: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1710). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1710: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described processes after S1701 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1710: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1711, S1712).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1711). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1712).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1709, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 37 has been executed, the power-off process after S1713 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1713), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1714). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1715), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1716), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  It should be noted that the processing of S1709 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1708 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1711 and S1712 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1601. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific winning prize ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 40, S1704), it is first determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1801). Specifically, if the process of S604 of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 28) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. If the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1801 (S1801: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is turned off (S1802), an opening command is set (S1803), and this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1801 (S1801: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1804). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1804, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1804: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1804 that the special symbol is a big hit (S1804: Yes), the processing of S1805 is executed. In the process of S1805, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1805). If it is determined in the processing of S1805 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1805: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened (S1806) and newly started. A round number command indicating the number of rounds is set (S1807), and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1805 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1805: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is satisfied. (S1808). If the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1808: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1809), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1808, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1808: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1810). The start timing of the ending effect is determined as the start timing of the ending effect when the final round in each jackpot type ends and the specific winning opening 65a is closed. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1810: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag 203o or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203p is turned off (S1811), and an ending command is set (S1812). And it is discriminate | determined whether it is a probable big hit (S1813). In the process of S1813, if the probability change jackpot (S1813: Yes), the probability change flag 203m is set to ON (S1814), and the process proceeds to S1815.

  In the process of S1815, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot E (short and short jackpot with 2R probability change (no electric support)) (S1815). When it is determined in the processing of S1815 that the jackpot type is not a jackpot E (2R probability change time short / no big hit (no electric support)) (S1815: No), the time flag 203s is turned on to give a short game state. After setting (S1816), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1815 that the big hit type is a big hit E (2R probability change time short / no big hit (no electric support)) (S1815: Yes), the process of S1816 is skipped, that is, the time is short. This processing is terminated without giving a gaming state.

  In the process of S1813, when it is determined that it is not a probable big hit (S1813: No), it is then discriminated whether or not it is a time saving big hit (S1817). In the process of S1817, when it is determined that the time-saving hit is made (S1817: Yes), the time-shortage counter 203k is set to 100 (S1818), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1817 that it is not a time saving big hit (S1817: No), since it is a normal big hit where neither the probability variation gaming state nor the time saving gaming state is given, the time saving flag 203s is set to OFF (S1819). Then, 0 is set in the hour / middle counter 203k (S1820), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 49. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (S2000) that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1901). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S2017 (see FIG. 42) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during the execution (S1902). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 42, S2013), it executes a power-off process in S2017. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2017 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1902: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S2017. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1903).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1906. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1903: Yes), the process proceeds to S1904, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1903: No), the process proceeds to S1908.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1903: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1904. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2017, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1903: No), and the process proceeds to S1908.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1902: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S2017, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1904, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1904, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1904). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1905: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1906). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1905: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1907), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1908, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1908). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S2017 is executed (see S2016 in FIG. 42). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S2017 is executed, the process of S1908 with the power-off flag 223y turned on is the same as the current startup process. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2017 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1908: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1909), the power-off flag 223y is turned off (S1910), and the RAM 223 is set. Is set (S1911), interrupt permission is set (S1912), and the process proceeds to the main process (S2000). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag 223y is turned off, the process of S1908 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, and the process of S1904 to S1906 is performed. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1908: No), S1909 and S1910, which are the work area clear processing of the RAM 223, are skipped, the process proceeds to S1911, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1911).

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1909 is that when the process from S1904 to S1906 is reached via the process in S1906, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1904. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, the main process (S2000) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process (S2000). When the main process (S2000) is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S2000) was started or since the previous process of S2001 was executed ( S2001) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S2001: No), the processing proceeds to S2012 without performing the processing in S2002 to S2011. In the process of S2001, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S2002 to S2011 are processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S2012 and the command determination process of S2013 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2013 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S2013 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2001 (S2001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S2003 to S2013 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S2002). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2008 described later are set (S2003), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2004). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2005 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2005, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold number display update process is executed (S2006). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the hold number display update process (S2006), as will be described in detail later, a process of updating the display of the hold symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2007). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S2008), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S2009). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2009, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2010). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2008 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2009 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S2010, the suggestion effect process for executing the above-mentioned suggestion effect when closing the suggestion effect and the press suggestion effect when opening is executed (S2011), and then the process proceeds to S2012. This suggestion effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S2012, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of the variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the variable display setting process (S2012), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S2013). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S2013 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2014). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2014 (S2014: Yes), both the power interruption flag 223y and the power interruption processing flag 223x are turned on (S2016), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2017). . After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2018), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the processing of S2014 (S2014: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2015), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2015: No), the process returns to S2001 and the main process (S2000) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2015: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process (S2000) is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a command determination process (S2013) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2013). This command determination process (S2013) is executed in the main process (S2000) (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Determine. Details of the command determination process (S2013) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 43, S2013), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the winning information storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and analyzed. It is determined whether a first variation pattern command is received from 110 (S2101). Here, the first variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the first special symbol. If it is determined that the first variation pattern command has been received (S2101: Yes), the first variation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2102). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received first variation pattern command (S2103). The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in a variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2603) described later. It is used when setting the first special symbol display variation pattern command to notify the control device 114 of the start of the first special symbol variation display effect and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  When the process of S2103 is completed, the suggestion effect flag 223f is set to ON based on the variation pattern extracted in the process of S2102 and the value of the effect counter 223e. Specifically, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (30 seconds) and the value of the effect counter 223e is 0 to 30, the suggestion effect flag 223f is set to ON in order to execute the suggestion effect. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is not normal reach (30 seconds), or if the value of the effect counter 223e is 31 to 198, the suggestion effect is not executed, so the suggestion effect flag 223f is kept off. Here, when the suggestion effect flag 223f is set to ON, in the suggestion effect process (see FIG. 49) described later, various suggestion effects (pressing suggestion effect at closing, pressing suggestion effect at opening) are displayed. Is done. When the process of S2104 is completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first variation pattern command has not been received (S2101: No), it is determined whether or not the second variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2105). Here, the second variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. If it is determined that the second variation pattern command has been received (S2105: Yes), the second variation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2106). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received second variation pattern command (S2107). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2607) described later. This is used when setting the second special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined that the second variation pattern command has not been received (S2105: No), it is determined whether the first or second stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2108). When it is determined that the first or second stop type command is received (S2108: Yes), when the first stop type command is received, the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON. (S2109). From the received first stop type command or second stop type command, a stop type (either 16R probability variation big hit or 16R time junior big hit) is extracted (S2110). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the first stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Are stored in an identifiable manner.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S2108: No), it is determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2111). If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S2111: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received held ball number command (that is, the main controller 110). And the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2112).

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first winning opening 64 and the right first winning opening 641, so every time there is a starting win. In addition, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 by the processing of S2112. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start prize is won. At the time of detection, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. In the present embodiment, the prize information is not held in the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize information may be reserved in the second special symbol. In this case, the value of the reserved ball number counter of the second special symbol of the sound lamp control device 113 and the main control device 110 can be matched by transmitting the reserved ball number command in the same manner as the first special symbol.

  If it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S2111: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S2113). If it is determined that a winning command has been received (S2113: Yes), winning information is extracted from the received command (win / fail judgment result, stop type, variation pattern), and the winning information is stored in the RAM 233 as winning information. It is stored in 223a (S2114). Then, a prize change effect change process (S2115) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the winning effect changing process (S2115) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S2113: No), it is determined whether the first variation stop command or the second variation stop command has been received (S2116). When it is determined that the first variation stop command or the second variation stop command has been received (S2116: Yes), the display variation stop command for display based on the received first variation stop command or second variation stop command. Is set (S2117), the suggestion effect flag 223f is turned off, the suggestion effect state storage area 223g is cleared (S2118), and the process proceeds to S2119.

  In the process of S2119, it is determined whether or not the received command is a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command (S2119). In the process of S2119, when it is determined that the received command is the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command (S2119: Yes), the effect change flag 223h is set to OFF (S2120), and this process ends. Here, when the effect change flag 223h is on, the effect change process (FIG. 47) is executed in one change based on the second special symbol, and the effect is changed. Therefore, when the effect flag 223h is on, the effect change process (or the pseudo effect change process) is not executed. When it is determined that the command received in the process of S2119 is the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command, the production change process (FIG. 47) is executed, and the variation in which the production is changed is stopped. By turning off the flag 223h, in the next and subsequent fluctuations. The effect change process (FIG. 47) can be executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2119, when it is determined that the change stop command is not the special figure 2 change stop command (S2119: No), the process of S2120 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first fluctuation stop command or the second fluctuation stop command has not been received (S2116: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received (S2121). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S2121: Yes), a jackpot command process is executed (S2122), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot command processing (S2122) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that no jackpot-related command has been received (S2121: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S2123), and this processing is terminated. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the jackpot command processing (S2120) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing (S2120).

  In the jackpot command processing (S2120), it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2201). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2201: Yes), the display opening command is set based on the received opening command (S2202), and the pseudo effect change flag 223i is set to OFF (S2203). ), This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2204). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S2204: Yes), a display round command is set based on the received round number command (S2205), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a round number command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2206). If it is determined in step S2206 that an ending command has not been received (S2206: No), this process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

  If it is determined in step S2206 that an ending command has been received (S2206: Yes), a display ending command is set (S2207), the process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the winning effect changing process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the winning effect changing process (S2115).

  In the winning effect changing process (S2115), first, it is determined whether or not the non-electrical accessory 640a is in an open state (S2301). If it is determined that the non-electrical accessory 640a is not in the open state (S2301: No), the game ball does not enter the second winning opening 640, and thus this process is terminated. In the processing of S2301, the open / close state of the non-electrically-powered object 640a is determined by a rotation sensor (not shown) attached to the rotation shaft 640b of the non-electrically-charged object 640a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the open / close state of the non-electrically-powered article 640a may be determined by determining the rotation state of the open / close switching member 902 or the first flow path switching member 900f using a rotation sensor. Further, by providing a magnetic sensor or an optical sensor at a position that is turned on when the non-electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (or open state), the open / closed state of the non-electric accessory 640a may be discriminated. In addition, by detecting the position of a member (for example, the opening / closing switching member 902 or the first flow path switching member 900f) that is operated to open / close the other non-electrical accessory 640a, the open / closed state of the non-electrical accessory 640a is detected. You may make it discriminate | determine.

  Further, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 even when the non-electrical accessory 640a is not in an open state (when there is a second special symbol winning), error processing (error sound) Output, display of error occurrence, output of a signal indicating an error to the external output terminal board 261, etc.). As a result, an illegal act of illegally entering a game ball into the second winning opening 640 can be detected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the open state (S2301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current winning prize is a winning of the second special symbol (S2302). In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not won (S2302: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the second special symbol is won (S2302: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol is currently changing (S2303). If it is determined that the first special symbol is not changing (S2303: No), if the first special symbol change is not executed (that is, the press suggestion effect is not displayed), the skip switch Since 51c is pressed and a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a game method explanation effect which is an effect for explaining the game method is set (S2304), and this process ends. Specifically, in the game method explanation effect, a character “Please release the skip switch!” Is displayed on the third symbol display device, and a voice “Please release the skip switch” is output.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the game method explanation effect may be set when the skip switch 51c is pressed even though the first special symbol is not changing. Further, a signal indicating the state may be output to the external output terminal plate 261 so that the hall computer 262 can detect it. As a result, it is possible to detect an illegal act such as causing a game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 in spite of the change of the first special symbol not being executed. In this case, when the first special symbol is not fluctuating, it is determined that the skip switch 51c has been pressed for a predetermined time or more, or the second winning opening 640 has been entered for a predetermined number of balls or more. A signal may be output to the external output terminal plate 261. Thereby, it is possible to discriminate and notify the illegal act with higher accuracy.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol is changing (S2303: Yes), it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect flag 223f is on (S2305). In the process of S2305, if it is determined that the suggestion effect flag 223f is off (S2305: No), it is not the timing for displaying the suggestion effect, and thus this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2305 that the suggestion effect flag 223f is on (S2305: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the effect change flag 223h and the pseudo effect change flag 223i are off (S2306).

  When it is determined in the process of S2306 that either the effect change flag 223h or the pseudo effect change flag 223i is on (S2306: No), the effect change process (S2309) or the pseudo effect change process (S2308) has already been performed. Since this is the case where the performance has been changed, the present process is terminated. As a result, a new winning is generated again in spite of the execution of a battle effect or a rank-up effect, which is set by the effect change process (S2309) or the pseudo effect change process (S2308). It is possible to suppress a problem that a battle effect or a rank-up effect is set.

  In the process of S2306, when it is determined that both the effect change flag 223h and the pseudo effect change flag 223i are off (S2306: Yes), the effect change process (S2309) or the pseudo effect change process (S2308) in the change. ) Is not executed, the process proceeds to S2307.

  In the processing of S2307, it is determined whether or not the change being executed is a big hit change of the first special symbol (S2307). In the process of S2307, when it is determined that the variation is a big hit of the first special symbol (S2307: Yes), a pseudo effect changing process is executed (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2310. Details of the pseudo effect changing process (S2306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when it is determined that the fluctuation being executed is not the big hit of the first special symbol (S2307: No), the effect changing process is executed (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. . Details of the effect changing process (S2308) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S2308 or S2309 is completed, the suggestion effect flag 223f is set to OFF, the suggestion effect state storage area 223g is cleared, and this process ends.

  Next, the pseudo effect changing process (S2306) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the pseudo effect changing process (S2306).

  In the pseudo effect changing process (S2306), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is longer than 20 seconds (S2401). If it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is longer than 20 seconds (S2401: Yes), a display effect change command based on the revival battle effect is set according to the remaining variation time (S2402), End the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds or less (S2401: No), is the remaining variation time of the first special symbol longer than 10 seconds? It is determined whether or not (S2403). In the process of S2403, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is longer than 10 seconds (S2403: Yes), a display effect command based on the first per-battle effect is set according to the remaining variation time. (S2404), the process ends.

  In the processing of S2403, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is 10 seconds or less (S2403: No), next, whether or not the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is longer than 5 seconds. Is discriminated (S2405). In the process of S2405, if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is longer than 5 seconds (S2405: Yes), a display effect command based on the second per-battle effect is set according to the remaining variation time. (S2406), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2405, if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less (S2405: No), a display change command based on the one notification effect is set (S2407), The pseudo effect change flag 223i is set to ON (S2408), and this process ends.

  As described above, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, a battle effect is set according to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol. . As a result, the end timing of the battle effect, where the effect is started based on the ball entering the second winning opening, and the end timing of the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, that is, the start of the jackpot game of the first special symbol It is possible to match the timing, and it is possible to provide the player with a sense of incongruity. Also, since the outlier battle effect is not set based on the fact that the second special symbol is out, it is a big hit even though the outlier battle effect is displayed, and the player is confused. Problems can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect changing process (S2307) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this effect changing process (S2307).

  In this effect change process (S2307), first, an effect is selected from the effect change selection table 222b based on the gaming state and the lottery result of the second special symbol (S2501). Specifically, when the gaming state is a probable gaming state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit A (16R probable big hit (until next time))”, a battle effect per probable change (30 seconds) Is selected, and if it is “big hit B (16R short and big hit (electric support 100 times))”, the short time hit battle effect (30 seconds) is selected, and if “small hit”, the skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected. If it is selected and “out”, the off battle effect (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, “big hit D (2R short time big hit (electric support 100 times) )) ”,“ Big hit E (2R probability variation time short and big big hit (no electric support)) ”or“ Big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support)) ”(see FIG. 12B).

  In addition, when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit C (2R probable big hit (until next time))”, the probable rank-up effect (12 seconds) is selected. If “Big hit D (2R short time big hit (electric support 100 times))” is selected, the rank-up effect (12 seconds) is selected, and if “Small hit”, the skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected. If it is “out”, the out-ranking effect (12 seconds) is selected. When the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, “big hit B (16R short time big hit (electric support 100 times) )) ”,“ Big hit E (2R probability variation time short and big big hit (no electric support)) ”or“ Big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support)) ”(see FIG. 12B).

  Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit E (2R probability change time short and big big hit (no electric support))”, “big hit F (2R normal big hit (electric support) “None))” or “Small hit”, the skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected, and if “Out”, the miss battle effect (30 seconds) is selected. When the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, “big hit B (16R short time big hit (electric support 100 times) )) ”,“ Big hit C (2R probable big hit (until next time electric support)) ”or“ Big hit D (2R short time big hit (100 times electric support)) ”(see FIG. 12B).

  As described above, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability changing gaming state, a battle effect (30 seconds) per probability change or shorter time is executed (see FIG. 15B). Since the variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14B), the timing when variation A (30 seconds) ends It is possible to match the end timing of the certainty change or the battle effect per short time (30 seconds).

  Further, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state, a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state is variation C (0.5 seconds) (see FIG. 14C), and the gaming time of the small bonus game is 2 seconds. (Open time of specific winning opening 0.5 seconds and closing time 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing at which the variation C (0.5 seconds) ends and the subsequent small hit game (2 seconds) ends (a total of 2.5 seconds) matches the end timing of the skip effect (2.5 seconds). be able to. Since this skip effect is displayed until the end timing of the small hit game, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize that the small hit has occurred and that the small hit game has been executed. The player is given an impression that the change of the first special symbol is stopped by the display of the skip effect and the change based on the hold of the next first special symbol is started (skipped). Can do.

  Further, when the second special symbol is lost in the probability variation gaming state, the off battle effect (30 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is off in the probability variation gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore, the timing at which the variation A (30 seconds) ends can coincide with the timing at which the off-balance battle effect (30 seconds) ends.

  Next, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the short-time gaming state, the promotion or the rank-up effect (12 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a jackpot in the short-time gaming state is the variation B (10 seconds) (see FIG. 14B), and the gaming time of the jackpot game is 2 seconds (specific winning a prize opening) Open time 0.5 seconds and closing time 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing at which the variation B (10 seconds) ends and the subsequent jackpot game (2 seconds) ends (12 seconds in total) can coincide with the end timing (12 seconds) of the promotion or addition rank-up effect. .

  Further, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the short-time gaming state, a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is the same as when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state, and the end timing (2.5 seconds in total) of the small hit game executed in the short-time gaming state. The end timing is the same.

  Further, when the second special symbol is out of play in the short-time gaming state, the out-of-rank rank effect (10 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is out of play in the short-time gaming state is variation B (10 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore, it is possible to match the end timing of the variation B (10 seconds) with the end timing of the off-ranking effect (10 seconds).

  Here, although the promotion time or the rank-up effect (12 seconds) and the off-ranking effect (10 seconds) are different in the production time, the first half of each production is the same production, and the latter half of the production It is an effect that can determine whether the rank-up effect is an promoted rank-up effect, an added rank-up effect, or an outlier rank-up effect when 8 seconds have elapsed since the effect was displayed. Thereby, since interest can be continuously given to the player until the second half of the rank-up effect, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is similar to the case where the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation game state or the short-time game state, and the end timing of the big hit game executed in the normal game state (total 2.5). Second) and the end timing match. As a result, the fact that the jackpot game has been executed can be made difficult (or impossible) to be recognized by the player, and it is difficult to recognize that the lottery result based on the second special symbol is a jackpot (or Can not).

  Also, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the normal gaming state, the skip effect is executed similarly (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is the same as when the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, or when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state. The end timing (2.5 seconds in total) of the small hit game executed in the state coincides with the end timing.

  Furthermore, when the second special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state, the out-of-game battle effect (30 seconds) is executed. The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore. The timing at which the variation A (30 seconds) executed based on the deviation of the second special symbol ends can be matched with the timing at which the off battle effect (30 seconds) ends.

  In this embodiment, during the jackpot variation based on the first special symbol, the outlier battle effect is not set based on the fact that the second special symbol is out, and the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is not set. In response, a jackpot effect is executed (see FIG. 46). That is, when the out-of-game battle effect is executed, since both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are out-of-game, it is a big hit even though the out-of-game battle effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand for the player. In addition, when the variation of the outflow based on the first special symbol is executed when the variation of the outflow based on the first special symbol is executed when the outlier battle effect is performed, In the state where the battle effect is continued, the first special symbol based on the next hold is started. On the other hand, in the case where the deviation variation based on the first special symbol is continuously executed even at the time of the termination of the outlier battle effect, the variation variation display based on the first special symbol is displayed after the termination battle effect is terminated. Will be executed for the remaining time.

  When the process of S2501 is completed, an effect change command for display is set based on the effect selected in the process of S2501 (S2502), and an effect change flag 223h is displayed to indicate that the effect has been changed in the effect change process. It is set to ON (S2503), and this process ends.

  In this way, the off-battle effect is caused when the change other than the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped by the effect changing process based on the fact that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, Displayed when the jackpot game is not executed after the end of the battle effect. In addition, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol by the pseudo effect changing process described above, that is, when the jackpot game is executed after the battle effect ends. Shows the winning battle effect and the hit battle effect in which the first half of the effect is the same effect. Thereby, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, it can be determined whether or not the variation of the first special symbol is a big hit until the second half of the battle effect. As a result, it is possible to keep the player interested in the second half of the battle production, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described skip effect and battle effect are configured to be displayed when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, it may be displayed when the skip switch 51c is pressed. Thereby, the impression that the skip effect is displayed by pressing the skip switch 51c can be strengthened. Further, during the period from when the skip switch 51c is pressed until the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, an effect different from the skip effect or the battle effect may be separately performed. Thereby, the display of the effect (skip effect or the like) displayed based on the press of the skip switch 51c, and the entry or entry of the game ball fired based on the press of the skip switch 51c into the second winning opening 640 Inconsistency with the lottery result based on can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the variable display setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S2012). This variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2012) is one process of the main process (S2000) (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2012) is based on the first or second variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the process of setting the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (16R probability variation big hit, 16R time big hit), a process of setting the first or second stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2012), first, it is determined whether or not the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2601). If it is determined that the first variation start flag 223c1 is off (S2601: No), the first variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, so the processing of S2605 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S2601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to off (S2602).

  Next, in the processing of S2603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the first variation pattern command in the processing of S2103 of the command determination processing (FIG. 43, S2013) is displayed in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Is obtained and the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set (S2603). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is “10”, it indicates that the first special symbol is supported, and if it is “01”, the second special symbol. It is comprised so that it may respond | correspond to.

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the processing of S2603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output processing (S2002) of the main processing (FIG. 42, S2000). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, and the special control pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  Here, when the display control device 114 receives the first special symbol display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command in the display area at the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. The first special symbol (third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the first special symbol). (The display is set), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is decreased by 1, and there is one reserved data corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Shifted to previous holding area.

  When the processing of S2603 is finished, measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is started (S2604). Specifically, the counter value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern set in the processing of S2603 is stored in the RAM 223, and measurement is performed by subtracting every 1 ms in the main processing. The variation time of the first special symbol measured here is referred to in the pseudo effect changing process (see FIG. 46), and various battle effects are set according to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol. As a result, during the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, the end timing of the battle effect displayed based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 and the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol The end timing, that is, the start timing of the jackpot game of the first special symbol can be matched, and an effect without a sense of incongruity can be provided to the player.

  When the process of S2601 or S2604 is finished, it is determined whether the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2605). If it is determined that the second variation start flag 223c2 is not on (that is, is off) (S2605: No), the first variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S2609 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation start flag 223c2 is on (S2605: Yes), the second variation start flag 223c2 is set to off (S2606).

  In the process of S2107 of the command determination process (FIG. 43, S2013), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the second variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the second A special symbol display variation pattern command is set (S2607).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the processing of S2607 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output processing (S2002) of the main processing (FIG. 42, S2000). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and receives the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  When the process of S2607 is completed, the measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol is started in the same manner as the process of S2604 (S2608).

  When the processing of S2605 or S2608 is completed, it is next determined whether the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON (S2609). If it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 are not set to ON (that is, OFF) (S2609: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S2609: Yes), if the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is on, If the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to off and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on, the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to off (S2610).

  Next, in the process of S2110 of the command determination process (FIG. 43, S2013), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command is set (S2611). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 is given a stop type (whether it is a 16R probability variation big hit or a 16R time junior big hit). A first stop type command for display for notification is set. Further, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 determines whether it is a stop type (16R probability variation big hit or 16R time junior big hit) ) For displaying the second stop type command is set (S2612). Note that the first or second stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even when the determination result is out of place. . If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred to and the out symbol is set.

  With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed simultaneously.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the suggestion effect process (S2011) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this suggestion effect process (S2011). This suggestion effect process (FIG. 49, S2011) is one process of the main process (S2000) (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the suggestion effect process (FIG. 49, S2011), first, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect flag 223f is on (S2701). If it is determined in the process of S2701 that the suggestion effect flag 223h is not on (S2701: No), this process is terminated as it is not the timing for executing (displaying) the suggestion effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the suggestion effect flag 223h is on (S2701: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability change or a short-time gaming state (S2702).

  If it is determined in the process of S2702 that the gaming state is not a certain change or short-time gaming state (S2702: No), the suggestion effect that suggests pressing of the skip switch 51c is not executed (displayed), and thus this process is terminated. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2702 that the gaming state is a probable change or a short-time gaming state (S2702: Yes), the process proceeds to S2703 in order to execute (display) the suggestive effect.

  In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is changing (S2703). If it is determined in the process of S2703 that the first special symbol is not changing (S2703: No), the suggestion effect is not executed (displayed), and thus this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2703 that the first special symbol is changing (S2703: Yes), the process proceeds to S2704 in order to execute (display) the suggestive effect.

  In the process of S2704, it is determined whether or not the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in a closed state (S2704). In the process of S2704, when it is determined that the non-electrical accessory 640a is in a closed state (S2704: Yes), an effect suggesting that the skip switch 51c be pressed when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in a closed state. In order to execute (display) the closing suggestion effect at the time, the process proceeds to S2705.

  In the process of S2705, it is determined whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed (S2705). When the skip switch 51 c is pressed, a command indicating that the skip switch 51 c is pressed is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed is determined based on whether or not this command is received. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and pressing of the skip switch 51c may be directly detected by the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S2705, when it is determined that the skip switch 51c is pressed (S2705: Yes), the gauge level 223j is incremented by 1 (S2706), and the process proceeds to S2707. By the processing of S2706, when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the gauge level 223j increases, so the area where the gauge is lit up and displayed in the closing press suggestion effect increases.

  In the process of S2707, it is determined whether or not the value of the gauge level 223j is greater than 4500 (S2707). In the process of S2707, when it is determined that the value of the gauge level 223j is larger than 4500 (S2707: Yes), the value of the gauge level 223j is set to 4500, and the process proceeds to S2710. By the process of S2707, the value of the gauge level 223j set based on the depression of the skip switch 51c is limited to a value up to 4500. As a result, the area where the gauge is displayed in the closing-indicating effect when closed by pressing the skip switch 51c is limited to 90% of the maximum width. When the area where the gauge is lit and displayed is limited to 90% of the maximum width, the area where the gauge is lit and displayed is repeatedly increased and decreased between 88% and 92% of the maximum width. Good. Thereby, the increase in a gauge will be restrict | limited and the malfunction that a player will get tired early can be suppressed because production becomes monotonous.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2705 that the skip switch 51c has not been pressed (S2705: No), the gauge level 223j is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S2710. When the skip switch 51c is not pressed by the processing of S2709, the gauge level 223j is 0, and the area of the gauge that is displayed in the closing press suggestion effect is 0.

  In the process of S2710, it is determined whether or not the working port guide flow path switch 800 is on. If it is determined that the operation port guide flow path switch 800 is on (S2710: Yes), the gauge level 223j is set to 5000 (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2712.

  By the processing of S2711, the value of the gauge level 223j is set to the maximum value of 5000, so the area where the gauge is lit and displayed in the closing press suggestion effect is maximized (that is, the entire area of the gauge is lit). Is displayed). In addition, when the value of the gauge level 223j is 5000, a comment is displayed in the closing press suggestion effect.

  Here, the operation port guide flow path switch 800 is turned on when a game ball enters the operation port 670 and the non-electrically-powered article 640a is opened. Although details will be described later, when the non-electrically-powered article 640a is in an open state, an opening-time pressing suggestion effect is executed (displayed). As a result, by pressing the skip switch 51c, the area where the gauges are displayed to be displayed in the closing press suggestion effect increases, and when all the gauges are displayed to be lit, a comment is displayed, which will be described later. It is possible to give an impression to the player that the display is switched to the push-down suggestion effect. Note that when a game ball enters the operation port 670, the value of the gauge level 223j may be set to 5000.

  In the process of S2710, when it is determined that the operation port guide flow path switch 800 is not ON (S2710: No), the process of S2711 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2712.

  In the process of S2712, a display closing suggestion effect command is set based on the value of the gauge level 223j (S2712), and a value indicating that the closing pressing suggestion effect is being performed is set in the suggestion effect state storage area 223g ( S2713), the process is terminated. In addition, the value of the gauge level 223j is also stored in the suggestion effect state storage area (or a value indicating the value of the gauge level 223j and the value indicating that the closing pressing suggestion effect is stored), and the closing pressing suggestion effect is stored. When the value of the gauge level 223j is not changed, the process of S2712 may be skipped. Thereby, since the command transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 can be reduced, processing load can be reduced.

  In the process of S2704, if it is determined that the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in the open state (S2704: No), it is then determined whether or not the opening pressing suggestion effect is being performed (S2714). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the suggestion effect state storage area 223g is a value indicating a press suggestion effect at the time of opening.

  In the process of S2714, if it is determined that the opening pressing suggestion effect is being executed (displayed) (S2714: Yes), the opening pressing suggestion effect is already displayed, and thus this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2714, if it is determined that the opening press suggestion effect is not being executed (displayed) (S2714: No), the display opening press suggestion for executing (displaying) the opening press suggestion effect is performed. An effect command is set (S2715), a value indicating that the pressing-indicating effect at the time of opening is stored in the suggestion effect state storage area 223g (S2716), and this process is terminated.

  In addition, you may change the probability that the press suggestion effect mentioned above (the press suggestion effect at the time of opening, the press suggestion effect at the time of closing) is displayed according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is large, the press suggestion effect is easily displayed, and when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the press suggestion effect is hardly displayed. . Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to easily skip the fluctuation of the first special symbol by displaying the press suggestion effect, and to prevent the incoming ball from overflowing. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is small, the press suggestion effect is not displayed, so that the variation of the first special symbol is not skipped, so that the reserved ball is consumed and the time during which the variation display is not performed may be reduced. it can.

  Further, the content of the press suggesting effect may be changed according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is large, an effect (for example, “push the switch!”) That strongly presses the skip switch 51c is displayed, and the reserved ball of the first special symbol is displayed. When the number is small, an effect (for example, “may I press the switch?”) That promptly presses down the skip switch 51c may be displayed. As a result, when the number of held balls is large, a press suggesting effect that strongly presses the skip switch 51c is displayed, thereby making it easy to skip the fluctuation of the first special symbol and suppressing the overflow of the incoming ball. it can. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is small, the press suggestion effect that strongly presses the skip switch 51c is not displayed, so that the skip switch 51c is not pressed and the change in the first special symbol is not skipped. It is possible to suppress inconvenience that the time when the change display is not performed increases due to digestion quickly.

  Furthermore, you may make it display the press suggestion effect mentioned above according to the lottery result of a 1st special symbol. For example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is off, a press suggestion effect is displayed. Conversely, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the press suggestion effect is not displayed. Thereby, it is possible to perform the press suggestion effect only during the fluctuation based on the deviation that can forcibly stop the lottery result of the first special symbol.

  Further, the above-described opening press suggestion effect and closing press suggestion effect may be executed by prefetching the lottery result of the first special symbol and based on the prefetched result. For example, when it is prefetched that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place, it is easy to display a press suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to skip out-of-range fluctuations, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. Note that the press suggestion effect may be executed based on the prefetched result only in a specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, if it is determined that the third ball of the reserved balls of the first special symbol is a big hit, the skip effect of the first and second reserved balls is continuously displayed (continuous pressing suggestion). An effect of (effect) may be executed (displayed). Specifically, during the change based on the first reserved ball, an effect accompanied by the text “Find the key!” Is displayed and a press suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c is displayed. Then, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters “Obtain a key!” Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the first reserved ball is stopped. Next, during the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball, an effect accompanied by the characters “Open the treasure chest with the obtained key!” And a suggestion effect for pressing the skip switch 51c are displayed. Then, based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters “Treasure box opened!” Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball is stopped. Thereafter, in the variation based on the third reserved ball that is a big hit, an effect accompanied by the characters “Congratulations!

  By executing (displaying) such a continuous pressing suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that is a big hit step by step, so that the interest of the player can be improved. It should be noted that, since the fluctuation based on the big ball holding ball cannot be forcibly stopped, the fluctuation based on the big ball holding ball may not imply pressing the skip switch 51c. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is suggested that the skip switch 51c be pressed during the fluctuation based on the holding ball that is a big hit, and the aspect of the effect is changed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Also good.

<Control processing of display control device>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 65, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2801), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2801 in FIG. 50). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 50) (S2905), the execution of the boot program is finished and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2801), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from the work RAM 233 constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed, and can perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 51, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2902 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2903 to S2905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2901. The processing of S2903 to S2905 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2902.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2903 to S2905 without performing the processes of S2901 and S2902. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the display control in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2803). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2803, then the power-on variation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2804). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2804, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 63A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S4602 in FIG. 63A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 52B), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (see FIG. 18), which are images when the power is turned on, are drawn. Command determination processing (see S3108 in FIG. 52B) and simple display setting processing (see S3109 in FIG. 52B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start prize) at the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640, and the variable effect. When the start instruction is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (see FIG. 18) is displayed during the variation effect period. Can be displayed immediately and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2805, interrupt permission is set (S2806). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3001), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52 (b), a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 22) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 52B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S3101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (see FIG. 18A), In order to display a normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S3102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S3102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S3103), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3102) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S3104). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S3103) or the simple display setting process (S3109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S3105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S3106). In this drawing process, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S3104), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3105) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3107, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach complete, ) And the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 18) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3109) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 to 59, details of the above-described command determination process (S3102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 53, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S3201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3202), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S3203).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S3204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S3204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3205), the process returns to S3201.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S3205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302). Of the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3301 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S3303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3303, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3304), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3306), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3305, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S3302. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3304, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the process of S3204 (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3206). If there is a display variation type command (S3206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S3207), and the processing returns to S3201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S3207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of big hits A to F, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. The third symbol display device 81 is determined (S3401) by comparing the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 52B) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed on is finally set (S3402).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S3403), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3402 is described. In the task process (S3104) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S3402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S3403, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S3402.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3206 that there is no display stop type command (S3206: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S3208). In the process of S3208, when it is determined that there is a jackpot related command (S3208: Yes), the jackpot related command process is executed (S3209), and the process returns to S3201.

  Here, the details of the jackpot related command processing (S3209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing (S3209). This jackpot related command processing (S3209) is processing corresponding to various commands (display opening command, display round number command, display ending command) for executing the jackpot effect received from the sound lamp control device 113. This is a process for execution.

  In the jackpot related command processing (S3209), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S3501). In the process of S3501, when it is determined that there is a display opening command (S3501: Yes), an opening command process (S3502) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3503.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S3502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this opening command process, first, an opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3601). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3601 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3605), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3604, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S3602. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. After the display round number command is received, the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 16 rounds). If image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. May occur, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in this control example, when a display opening command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that point, and until the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. Thereby, when the opening effect is finished in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the 3rd symbol display device 81 (for 16 rounds). ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect ends before the variation effect that is a big hit ends in the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 ends, the opening effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so the player is concerned that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3501 that there is no display opening command (S3501: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3503). If there is a command round number command (S3503: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3504) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S3504). This round number command processing (S3504) is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3702).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3705), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3503 that there is no display round number command (S3503: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3505), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S3505: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3506) and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if there is no display ending command in the process of S3505 (S3505: No), the process of S3506 is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S3506) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the ending command process (S3506). This ending command process (S3506) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d. (S3801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3802). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the process of S3801 is turned on, Data table discrimination flags corresponding to other ending display data tables are set to OFF (S3803). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of the ending effect by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3803. Can be easily determined.

  Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3804), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3805). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3806), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no jackpot related command in the process of S3208 (S3208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3210), and the back image change is performed. If there is a command (S3210: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S3211), and the process returns to S3201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 58A, details of the rear image change command processing (S3211) will be described. FIG. 58A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this back image change command process, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4603) of a back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command is set to ON (S3901). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3902), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  The rear image change flag set here is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64). In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the back image change command process is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back images A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the current time is determined from the set back image discrimination flag. The rear image type to be displayed is specified, and the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored (for resident use) Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the back image change command processing, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3210 that there is no rear image change command (S3210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect change command among the unprocessed commands (S3212). If there is a production change command (S3212: Yes), a production change command process is executed (S3213), and the process returns to S3201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 58B, details of the effect change command process (S3213) will be described. FIG. 58B is a flowchart showing the effect change command process (S3213). This effect change command process (S3213) executes a process corresponding to the display effect change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the effect change command process, first, an effect change display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4002). Then, based on the effect change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4005), the effect change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3212 that there is no display effect change command (S3212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display press suggesting effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3214). If there are various display suggestion effect commands (S3214: Yes), the suggestion effect command process is executed (S3215), and the process returns to S3201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59A, details of the suggestion effect command process (S3215) will be described. FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the suggestion effect command process (S3215). This suggestion effect command process (S3215) executes a process corresponding to the display suggestion effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the suggestion effect command processing, first, an suggestion effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4102). Then, based on the suggested effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4101, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4105), the suggestion effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3214 that there is no display suggestion effect command (S3214: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3216). If there is (S3216: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3217), and the processing returns to S3201.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S3217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S4202). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S4202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S4202 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S3216 (S3216: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S3218), and the processing returns to S3201.

  In the process of S3201 that is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes). ), The processing of S3202 to S3218 is executed again. Then, the processing of S3202 to S3218 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S3201 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination End the process.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 52B), the simple command determination process (S3108) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying a power-on image (see FIG. 18) from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command. Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 54 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 54 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others For this command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  In addition, when the power interruption occurs during the change of the special symbol and then recovered, the special control message transmitted in S1610 of the start-up process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 described above when the power is turned on. In the process of S2004 of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the effect permission command including that the design is changing, the display control device When the display control device 114 receives the change start command of the power-on variation image output to 114 (reception processing in S2117 of command determination processing (FIG. 43, S2013)), simple command determination processing (S3108) In the simple display setting process (S3109) that is received at Change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d of the image) is set. It should be noted that at the timing at which the main controller 110 outputs an instruction to start changing the power-on change image corresponding to the special symbol that was changing when the power was turned off, the power-on change image is the power of the resident video RAM 235. Since it has already been transferred to the variation image area 235b at the time of insertion, the start of variation display is immediately executed (starts display) in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the power-on variation images shown in FIGS. 18B to 18C are alternately displayed.

  It should be noted that an effect permission command based on the game that was being executed when the power was turned off is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 38), and then executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command for stopping the fluctuation display is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of the stop command. The display control device 114 determines that the display stop command has been received by a simple command determination process (see FIG. 52B), and displays a power-on variation image in a display mode based on the received command (FIG. 18B). Or (see (c)) is stopped.

  Note that if the display controller 114 completes the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 before receiving the display stop command for stopping the above-described power-on variation image, only the power-on variation image is displayed. Is displayed at the coordinate position for normal performance (see FIG. 18A) of the third symbol display device 81. This is because the display stop command for stopping the power-on variation image defines the stop mode of the power-on variation image, and therefore cannot select the normal effect stop mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control device 114 may determine and display the stop mode based on the stop mode (big hit or miss) of the power-on variation image. Thereby, even when the fluctuation of the fluctuation image at the time of power-on is being executed, it is possible to switch from the point in time when the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is completed to the normal effect, and to improve the interest of the player. .

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 54A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3302, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (S3103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 60, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S4301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S4302 to S4304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S4302), and S4303 to S4304. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4304).

  Details of the warning image setting process (S4304) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4401).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4304) or in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S4303: No), the process proceeds to S4305.

  In S4305, pointer update processing is executed (S4305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S4503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4505), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S4506), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4306 together with the warning image previously expanded and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S4308: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S4309).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S4309: Yes), the confirmation display effect has not yet been produced and the decision display effect has been performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S4315 is used to identify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task processing (S3104), until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started, the previous stop change determination flag set in S4315 is specified and the stop effect of the change effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S4316). If the demo display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S4317), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4318). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4321), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S4316, if the demo display flag is on (S4316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 52B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S3109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. 18) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, the details of the transfer setting process (S3105) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S4602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4601, that is, if it is off (S4601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4701), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S4701: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S4702). In the process of S4702, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S4702 that the transfer process has not ended (S4702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to S4703. Also, as a result of the process of S4701, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to S4703.

  In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S4703 (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 52B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 52B) and the simple display setting process (see S3109 in FIG. 52B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 53 to 59) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed, and the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) (FIG. 63 (a)). ) S4601: No).

  The MPU 231 executes the resident image transfer setting process to the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image, the power-on variation image, and the power-on title image that have already been transferred in the main process. All the resident object image data to be resident can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S4603), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the display setting process (S3103) executed previously is used. Information described at the indicated address is acquired (S4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802), and if it is transfer data information (S4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S4803, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S4804), and the process proceeds to step S4805.

  In the process of S4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4802: No), the process of S4803 and S4804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S4806).

  In the process of S4806, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process in S4806 (S4806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4806: Yes), the process proceeds to S4807. Also, as a result of the processing in S4805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing has ended (S4805: No), the processing proceeds to S4807.

  In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807). If the transfer start flag is on (S4807: Yes), there is image data to start transfer, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S4803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4807: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S4809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S4809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S4811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4813.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S4809, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

  In the processing of S4813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The determination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S4814). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4814, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, when the normal image transfer process is executed, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the back image is displayed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the above-described drawing process (S3106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and a transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated (S4901). That is, in the process of S4901, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3104). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3105), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4902, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 52B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the game ball has a firing strength (0 to 90%) that makes it difficult (or impossible) to reach the second winning opening 640 by the rotation operation of the operation handle 51. Is fired. On the other hand, when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the game ball is fired at a firing strength (100%) at which the game ball can reach the second winning opening 640. As a result, even if the operation handle 51 is rotated and the game ball is fired, the second winning opening 640 can not be won (difficult to win). In order to win the second winning slot 640, skip. It can be configured to easily win a prize by firing a game ball using the switch 51c. Therefore, the operation for making a prize at the second prize opening 640 can be another operation, and the player can intentionally make a prize at the second prize opening 640 easily.

  Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible for the player to intentionally easily win the game ball to the second winning port 640. Therefore, in a specific gaming state (normal gaming state), the number of benefits (such as a jackpot privilege) obtained based on winning a prize to the second winning port 640 is reduced. Thereby, even when a fraud in which a game is played so that a game ball is awarded only to the second winning port 640, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game store side is greatly damaged.

  Furthermore, in a specific gaming state (normal gaming state), when the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed in a state where the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed for a predetermined time or more, an error display (sales clerk) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an alarm sound or sound indicating an error is output even by voice. An error signal is also output to the external output terminal 261 and notified to the hall computer. Thereby, the game store side can also identify an unauthorized game method at an early stage, and can suppress damage caused by an unauthorized game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed even while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. Then, when the change display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of being a big hit or a small hit during the change of the first special symbol, the change display of the first special symbol being changed is forcibly stopped. The Therefore, the game ball fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed enters the second winning port 640 that executes the lottery of the second special symbol, so that when the player presses the skip switch 51c, It is configured to be able to forcibly stop the variable display of one special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, during the change of the first special symbol, when the result of the change display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of being a big hit or small hit, the change of the first special symbol being changed Although the display is forcibly stopped, the present invention is not limited to this. While the first special symbol is changing, the change display of the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped when the change display that the lottery result of the second special symbol is the big hit or the small win is started. May be. Thereby, the timing at which the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped can be advanced, and an impression that the variation display is skipped can be given to the player more strongly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the first special symbol variation display, a press suggestion effect (a press suggestion effect at the time of opening or a press suggestion effect at the time of closing) for executing the pressing of the skip switch 51c is executed (displayed). . As a result, the player can be prompted to press the skip switch 51c, and the change in the first special symbol is forcibly stopped (skip), so the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Further, in the press suggestion effect, the state of the non-electrical accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 (that is, whether or not the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c). ), The pressing effect to be executed (displayed) is different. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second prize opening 640 based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c (when the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in an open state), a battle is performed based on the pressing of the skip switch 51. An opening pressing suggestion effect is executed (displayed) that suggests that an effect (see FIG. 7A) or a skip effect (see FIG. 6B) is displayed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the second winning opening 640 based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c (when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state), the game that did not enter the second winning opening 640 The ball enters the rotating combination 680 (that is, enters the operation port 670), and the non-electric combination 640a is operated to the open state, so that the above-described pressing at the time of opening is performed based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c. The closing suggestion effect is executed (displayed) indicating that the suggestion effect is displayed. As a result, an appropriate effect is displayed according to the state of the non-electrically-powered object 640a (that is, whether or not a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 based on pressing of the skip switch 51c). Therefore, it is possible to display an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

  Note that the press suggestion effect is not limited to the above, and the content of the press suggestion effect may be changed according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is large, an effect that strongly urges the user to press the skip switch 51c (for example, “press the skip switch!”) Is displayed, and the first special symbol is reserved. When the number of balls is small, an effect (for example, “may I press the skip switch?”) That promptly presses the skip switch 51c may be displayed. As a result, when the number of held balls is large, a press suggesting effect that strongly presses the skip switch 51c is displayed, thereby making it easy to skip the fluctuation of the first special symbol and suppressing the overflow of the incoming ball. it can. On the other hand, when the number of held balls is small, a press suggestion effect that weakly presses the skip switch 51c is displayed, and a press suggestion effect that strongly presses the skip switch 51c is not displayed, so that the variation of the first special symbol is skipped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time when the reserved ball is digested and the fluctuation display is not performed.

  Further, the above-described opening press suggestion effect and closing press suggestion effect may be executed by prefetching the lottery result of the first special symbol and based on the prefetched result. For example, when it is prefetched that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place, it is easy to display a press suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to skip out-of-range fluctuations, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. Note that the press suggestion effect may be executed based on the prefetched result only in a specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, if it is determined that the third ball of the reserved balls of the first special symbol is a big hit, the skip effect of the first and second reserved balls is continuously displayed (continuous pressing suggestion). An effect of (effect) may be executed (displayed). Specifically, during the change based on the first reserved ball, an effect accompanied by the text “Find the key!” Is displayed and a press suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c is displayed. Then, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters “Obtain a key!” Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the first reserved ball is stopped. Next, during the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball, an effect accompanied by the characters “Open the treasure chest with the obtained key!” And a suggestion effect for pressing the skip switch 51c are displayed. Then, based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters “Treasure box opened!” Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball is stopped. Thereafter, in the variation based on the third reserved ball that is a big hit, an effect accompanied by the characters “Congratulations!

  By executing (displaying) such a continuous pressing suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that is a big hit step by step, so that the interest of the player can be improved. It should be noted that, since the fluctuation based on the big ball holding ball cannot be forcibly stopped, the fluctuation based on the big ball holding ball may not imply pressing the skip switch 51c. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is suggested that the skip switch 51c be pressed during the fluctuation based on the holding ball that is a big hit, and the aspect of the effect is changed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Also good.

<First Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a first modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed in the first modification.

  In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, the second winning opening 640 is provided at a position where a game ball launched when the skip switch 51 c is pressed can enter, and the second winning opening 640 is provided. Is provided on the right side of the game board with an operating port 670 for opening the non-electrical accessory 640a attached to the open state (that is, allowing the player to enter the second winning port). On the other hand, in the first modification of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, a game ball that is launched when the skip switch 51c is pressed enters the second winning port 640 and the operating port 670. It is different in that it is provided at a position where a ball is possible. Further, in this modified example, in the right-handed gaming state, the gaming balls do not excessively enter the operating port 670, and therefore the rotating combination 680 is not provided. Since other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first modified example, the second winning opening is placed in the upper right area of the game area where the skip switch 51c is pressed and a game ball (see the broken line a in FIG. 2) launched with a firing strength of 100% can enter. An operating port 670 is provided on the left side of 640. In addition, the second prize opening 640 is provided with a non-electrical accessory 640a as in the first embodiment. When the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state, the game ball that is fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed does not enter the second winning opening 640 but enters the operation opening 670.

  Based on the game ball entering the operation port 670, the non-electrically-powered object 640 a is activated (variable) to the open state, and then the skip ball 51 c is pressed to fire the game ball fired. Enter the second winning opening 640 without entering. Here, since the non-electric accessory 640a is turned to the left by rotating to the left side, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the operation port 670 provided on the left side of the second winning port 640. Thereby, when the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is actuated (variable) to the open state, the game ball launched by pressing the skip switch 51c can be more reliably entered into the second prize opening 640. it can. When a predetermined number of game balls (one ball in the first modified example) enter the second winning opening 640, the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is changed from an open state (shown by a broken line in FIG. 66) to a closed state (a solid line in FIG. 66). (Illustrated).

  As described above, in the first modified example, even when the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state (the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in the closed state), the first game that is fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed. When the ball enters the operation port 670, the second winning port 640 is in an open state (the non-electrical accessory 640a is in an open state), and then the second game ball launched based on the depression of the skip switch 51c is It is possible to enter the second winning opening 640.

  As a result, even when the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state (the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 640 based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c. . As a result, a game ball can be made to enter the second winning opening 640 at any timing of the player, and fluctuations based on the first special symbol can be skipped.

  Further, in the first modification, in order to enter the game balls into the second winning opening 640, it is necessary to launch two game balls based on pressing of the skip switch 51c. Therefore, it can be prevented that the player accidentally presses the skip switch 51c and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is skipped.

  In the present embodiment, the skip effect and the battle effect described above are not configured to be displayed when a game ball enters the second prize opening 640, but when the game ball enters the operation port 670. May be displayed. Further, when a game ball enters the operation port 670, preparation for execution of the skip effect may be started. This is because when a game ball enters the operation port 670, the game ball is likely to enter the second winning port 640 after that. Thereby, the processing load for executing the skip effect can be distributed.

<Second Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed in the second modification. The second modified example is different from the first modified example described above in that the positions of the second winning port 640 and the operating port 670 are changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the second modification, an opening 604 is provided on the lower left side of the launch path 701, and a skip ball entrance passage 606 through which a game ball can flow is formed downward from the opening 604. A second winning port 640, a non-electrically-powered accessory 640 a and an operating port 670 are disposed downstream of the passage 606. The skip ball entry passage 606 is a passage through which a game ball that is launched when the skip switch 51c is pressed down, and a ball entry passage formation member 607 that is erected on the outer rail 62, the guide member 605, and the game board 13. This is a passage in which the width direction is defined by and the front and rear surfaces of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 are defined.

  The game ball that has flowed down in the skip ball entry passage 606 enters the operation port 670 provided in the passage. When the game ball enters the operation port 670, the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is moved from the closed state (shown by a solid line in FIG. 67) to the open state (shown by a broken line in FIG. 67). As a result, the game ball that is fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed next flows down the skip ball entrance passage 606 and enters the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, since the glass unit 16 forms the front surface of the skip ball entry passage 606, the inside of the passage can be visually confirmed. Moreover, inspection in the passage can be easily performed by opening the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached.

  The opening 604 is formed between the outer rail 62 and the guide member 605 constituting the outer peripheral side of the firing path 701 formed in an arc shape. The opening 604 is located on the outer peripheral side of an area in which the launch ball is launched in the upper left direction in the launch path 701 (hereinafter referred to as the lower left chord area), that is, the outer circumference of the launch path 701 when the game ball flows down by its own weight. It is provided at a position that contacts the side (hereinafter referred to as the left lower chord position). The reason why the opening 604 is provided at the lower left chord position in this way is that a game ball generated near the end of the launch path 701 can enter the opening 604 by its own weight. When the opening 604 is provided in the vicinity of the end of the launch path 701, that is, in a region in which the launched game ball moves to the upper right (hereinafter referred to as the upper left chord region), the game ball flows down by its own weight. The position in contact with is the inner peripheral side (inner rail 61) of the firing path 701 (hereinafter referred to as the upper left chord position). In the present embodiment, the launch path 701 has a left arc shape so that the game ball is fired toward the upper left side. However, even if the arc shape other than the present embodiment is adopted, By providing the opening 604 on the side to be contacted by its own weight, it is possible to easily enter the game ball.

  Next, a configuration near the opening 604 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is an enlarged view of the region LXVIII in the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. On the guide member 605 side (right side in FIG. 68) of the opening 604, a guide member 602 for guiding the game ball to the opening is provided. The guide member 602 is formed of an elastic member (urethane), and its mounting base 602a is fixed to the game board 13 with screws. Since the attachment base portion 602a is covered with the protection portion 605b of the guide member 605, the game ball does not collide. The guide member 602 extends to about half the width direction of the launch path 701 in order to receive the game ball, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the start end of the launch path 701. The game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a rolls on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 and then comes into contact with the guide member 602. The tip of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 is guided by the guide member. Since the protection base is formed so as to cover the mounting base 602a of 602, it is the tip of the guide member 602 that comes into contact with the launched game ball. The guiding member 602 is formed of an elastic member, and elastically deforms in a direction in which a tip portion of the guiding member 602 enters the game ball entrance passage 606 when it comes into contact with the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a (dotted line in FIG. 68). Then, a part of the opening 604 is covered. In this state, the guide member 602 faces the opening, and the opening width of the opening 604 becomes narrow.

  Therefore, when the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a passes in the vicinity of the guiding member 602, the guiding member 602 is elastically deformed, so that the firing force is not significantly reduced. Further, since the opening width of the opening 604 is narrowed by elastic deformation of the guide member, it is possible to smoothly launch without falling into the opening. Then, after the launched game ball has passed, the guide member 602 is elastically returned to the original position.

  Next, explanation will be given when the guide member 602 collides with a game ball. The guide member 602 is configured such that the tip end portion protrudes toward the firing path 701 from a straight line connecting the inclined surface 605 a of the guide member 605 and the inclined surface start end portion of the outer rail 62. Further, the outer rail 62 and the opening 604 are formed so that an extension line of the inclined surface of the outer rail 62 toward the opening 604 is directed into the opening 604. In the portion configured as described above, the game ball flowing down from the outer rail 62 side follows one of the following paths and enters the opening 604.

  When entering the opening 604 without touching the guide member 602, the flow speed of the game ball is decreased by the protrusion 605a for preventing the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 from reaching the opening 604 with its momentum. After that, the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 is reached. On the other hand, when entering the opening after contacting the guide member 602, the guide member is elastically deformed in the direction of entering the launch path 701 by an external force received from the game ball. After the flow velocity of the game ball is reduced due to this elastic deformation, it reaches the operating port 670 or the second winning port 640.

  Even if the guide member 602 is elastically deformed in the direction of entering the launch path 701 by an external force received from the game ball, the protection portion 605b of the guide member 605 restricts the change of the guide member 602. The launching path 701 is not blocked by the external force received, and the guiding member 602 is formed only to the extent that the opening width of the opening 604 is widened (to the extent that the gap between the guiding member 602 and the protective portion 605b in FIG. 68 is eliminated). It only elastically deforms. Even in such an elastically deformed state, the passage width of the launch path 701 immediately after passing through the guide member 605 so that the game balls launched by the ball launch unit 112a can pass through the launch path 701 passes two game balls. The width is possible.

  By using such a configuration, it is possible to achieve both a function of receiving the game ball and guiding it to the skip ball entry path 606 and a function of smoothly passing the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a. It becomes. Further, since the elastic deformation of the guide member 602 is limited by using a guide member 605 that is a separate member from the guide member 602, the guide member 602 is moved in one direction (the direction of entering the skip ball entry path 606). Can be easily changed, and it is possible to eliminate the need to use a complicated technique of making the material difficult to change in the other direction (direction in which the launch path is blocked).

  The guide member 602 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and may be any configuration that does not block the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a and that has a function of guiding the game ball to the opening, For example, the mounting base 602a can be rotated and returned to the origin position by a spring configuration, and a variable configuration in which a plate-like member is pivotally supported by the mounting base 602a, or a configuration using a rotating body that can rotate only in the game ball launch direction. But you can.

  Moreover, even if it is a structure which does not change, the structure which has the said function should just be sufficient, for example, a game ball | bowl will flow down to the ball | bowl launch unit 112a side by providing the guide path which tapers gradually along the launch direction of a launch ball. It is good also as a structure which prevents doing. In this embodiment, urethane is used as the elastic member, but any material having excellent impact resilience may be used, and other rubber (silicon rubber or the like) may be used. Further, the mounting position of the guide member 602 may be on the inner rail 61 side.

  In the skip ball entry passage 606, a projection 605c formed integrally with the guide member 605 is provided so as to cover the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640, as will be described in detail later. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the skip ball entry path from colliding with the operation port 670 or the second prize winning port 640 vigorously and being damaged.

<Third Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed. The third modification is different from the above-described second modification in that the position of the opening 604 is changed and the guide member is removed, and the other modifications are the same. About the same part, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the third modified example, the opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the firing path 701, and the game ball flowing down the opening 604 is directed to the operation port 670 or the second prize winning port 640 provided in the game area. It is configured to enter. Further, the skip ball entry path 606 is configured to guide the game ball to the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13. The place where the skip ball entrance passage 606 of the game board 13 is provided is made of highly permeable acrylic resin, so that the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the back side of the game board 13. .

  Here, the flow of the game ball in the launch path 701 will be described. The game balls launched by the ball launch unit 112a are guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. In other words, in the second modified example, since the game balls that have been launched pass along the outer peripheral side of the launch path, the inner circumference side of the launch path where the launched game balls cannot enter Is provided with an opening 604.

  As described above, in the third modified example, the opening 604 is not provided at a position where the launched game ball rolls, and thus it is not necessary to provide the guide member 605. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of a gaming machine can be reduced.

  Here, the game ball launched when the skip switch 51 c is not on (not pressed) passes through the launch path 701 and is guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. On the other hand, a game ball that is fired when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed) does not reach the game area after passing through the firing path 701, and flows backward through the launch path 701. This game ball is guided to the opening 604 by the guide member 602. The game ball that has entered the opening 604 flows down the skip ball entry passage 606 and then flows down to the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 provided in the game board 13.

  It is limited by providing a structure (skip ball entry path 606) for guiding the game ball to the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 as in the third modification, not on the front surface of the game board 13, but on the back surface. Since the front space of the game board 13, that is, the range of the game area is widened, it is easy to mount a device for improving the interest of the game.

  In the third modified example, the opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side in the launch path 701 and the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 is provided in the game area of the game board 13, but provided in another place. May be. For example, the opening 604 may be provided on the outer peripheral side in the firing path 701, and the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 may be provided in the lower right region of the game board 13 (see FIG. 71). By doing so, it is not necessary to provide the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 for entering the game ball in the game area provided on the front surface of the game board 13. Further, by increasing the distance of the passage 606c passing through the back side of the game board 13, an illegal act aiming at the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 can be prevented.

  In addition, the launch path 701 is configured with a depth that allows two game balls to pass in the front-rear direction (depth direction), and the game balls that are launched by the ball launch unit 112a are one game ball on the back side (game board 13 side). You may comprise so that it can launch | shoot in the state which maintained the space | interval which can pass a ball | bowl. In this way, in the case where an opening is provided in the game board 13, the passage width direction of the launch path 701 can be narrowed, so that the left and right direction (width direction) of the game board 13 can be used effectively. Is possible.

<Fourth Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth modification will be described. FIG. 70 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed. The fourth modification is different from the above-described second modification in that the position of the opening 604 is changed and the guide member is removed, and the other modifications are the same. About the same part, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the third modification, the opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the launch path 701, and a foul ball that has flowed down the opening 604 is formed between the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. Then, the ball passes through the opening 604 and enters the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640.

  The flow of game balls in the launch path 701 will be described. The game balls launched by the ball launch unit 112a are guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. In other words, in the fourth modified example, since the game balls that have been launched pass along the outer peripheral side of the launch path, the inner side of the launch path from which the launched game balls cannot enter Is provided with an opening 604.

  As described above, in the second modified example, since the second opening 604 is not provided at a position where the launched game ball rolls, it is not necessary to provide the guide member 605.

  Furthermore, the inner rail 61 is divided into a first inner rail 61a and a second inner rail 61b, and a gap that allows one game ball to pass through is formed between the lower end of the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. By providing the gap between the upper end of the game ball, the gap forms an opening 604, and the game ball can enter the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 without using the guide member 602. It becomes.

<Fifth Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed. The fifth modified example is a further modified example of the third modified example described above, and a point in which the position of the second opening 604, the position of the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 is changed, and the guide member 605 are added. It is different in point, and is the same in other points. About the same part, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the fifth modification, the opening 604 is provided on the outer peripheral side in the launch path 701, and the game ball that has flowed down the opening 604 is provided in the lower right region of the game board 13 or the second operation port 670. It is configured to enter the winning opening 640. Further, the skip ball entry path 606 is configured to guide the game ball to the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 71). Note that the game board 13 is made of a highly permeable acrylic resin so that the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the back side of the game board 13. Further, since the passage 606c provided on the back side of the game board is provided from the left end portion to the right end portion of the game board 13, a path through which the game ball flows from the ball launching unit 112a to the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640 is provided. It is possible to increase the length, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act to the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640.

  The flow of game balls in the launch path 701 will be described. The game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a reaches the guide member 605, and then the game ball that rolls along the guide member 605 jumps over the opening 604 and is guided to the game area. That is, in the fifth modified example, the launched game ball is guided by the guide member 605 so as not to fall into the opening 604 and reaches the game area. The game ball fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed flows backward through the firing path from the terminal end side in the firing path 701 and passes through the opening 604 provided at the lower left chord position of the firing path 701.

  By providing a structure for guiding the game ball to the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 as in the fifth modification on the back surface instead of the front surface of the game board 13, a limited front space of the game board 13, In other words, since the range of the game area is widened, it is easy to mount a device for improving the interest of the game.

  Further, by doing so, it is not necessary to provide the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 for allowing the foul ball to enter the game area provided on the front surface of the game board 13. Further, by increasing the distance of the passage 606c passing through the back side of the game board 13, an illegal act aiming at the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 can be prevented.

<Sixth Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth modification will be described. FIG. 72 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed. The sixth modified example is a modified example of the first embodiment described above, in which the positions of the rotating combination 680 and the operation port 670 are changed, and the front of the rotating combination 680 and the operation port 670 whose positions are changed. The difference is that the second front cover member 663 is provided, and the pseudo out port 660, the pseudo rail member 661, the second front cover member 663, and the passage port 664 are provided, and the other points are the same. is there. About the same part, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the sixth modified example, the operating port 670 is provided in the upper part of the out port 66, and the rotating accessory 680 is provided in the upper part of the operating port 670. Thereby, both of the game ball that has passed through the left side of the variable display device 80 (so-called left-handed game ball) and the game ball that has passed through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called right-handed game ball) A gaming machine that can enter the rotating combination 680 (that is, can enter the operating port 670) can be used.

  In the sixth modification, a pseudo rail member 661 for restricting the downward flow of the game ball is provided on the upper portion of the rotating accessory 680. The pseudo rail member 661 is formed of a resin in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is inclined upward from the center portion in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball whose downward flow is restricted by the pseudo rail member 661 is guided (flows down) to the center of the pseudo rail member 661.

  A pseudo-out port 660 into which a game ball guided (flowed down) to the center of the pseudo-rail member 661 can enter is provided above the center of the pseudo-rail member 661. The shape of the pseudo-out port 660 is the same shape as the out port of the first embodiment described above.

  Further, a second front cover member 663 that makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside is provided in a region below the pseudo rail member 661. Thereby, it is possible to allow the player to recognize that the game area where the game ball can flow is the range above the pseudo rail member 661. Further, since the pseudo out port 660 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area in the range above the pseudo rail member 661, the pseudo out port 66 is connected to any of the winning ports 63, 64, 641, 640, 65. It is possible to make the player recognize that a game ball that has not won a prize is an outlet to enter.

  The game ball that has entered the pseudo-out port 660 flows through a flow path (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 to a passage port 664 provided on the lower side of the pseudo rail member 661. Since the passage opening 664 is provided on the upper side of the rotating combination 680, the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 664 can enter the rotating combination 680.

  A flow path forming member 662 is provided on the left and right of the rotating combination 680, and games that have not entered the rotating combination 680 among the game balls that have passed through the passage port 664 by the flow path forming member 662. A flow path through which the sphere flows down to the out port 66 is formed.

  Specifically, a left channel forming member 662a is disposed on the left side of the rotating combination 680, and a passage port is formed by the case member 682 that is the outer periphery of the rotating combination 680 and the left channel forming member 662. A flow path through which game balls can flow from 664 to the outlet is formed. This flow path is a flow path in which the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 664 do not enter the rotating combination 680 but flow down to the left side of the rotating combination 680 and flow out to the out opening 66. .

  Further, a right flow path forming member 662b is disposed on the right side of the rotating combination 680, and the case member 682, which is the outer peripheral portion of the rotating combination 680, and the right flow path forming member 662b are out of the passage port 664. A channel through which the game ball can flow down to the mouth is formed. This flow path is a flow path in which the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 664 do not enter the rotating combination 680 but flow down to the right side of the rotating combination 680 and flow out to the out opening 66. .

  As described above, in the sixth modification, a game ball that has passed to the left of the variable display device 80 (so-called left-handed game ball) and a game ball that has passed the right-hand side of the variable display device 80 (so-called right-handed) Any of the game balls) can enter the rotating accessory 680 and enter the operation port 670. Thereby, regardless of the gaming state (left-handed gaming state, right-handed gaming state), it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the operation port 670, that is, the non-electrically-powered object 640a can be opened.

  In addition, since the second front cover member 663 whose inside is difficult to visually recognize is provided on the front side of the rotating accessory 680 and the operation port 670, it is determined that the game ball has entered the operation port 670. Is difficult (or impossible) to recognize. This makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize that the non-electrical accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is opened or closed based on the ball entering the operation port 670. Can do.

  In the sixth modified example, a rotating accessory 680 and an operation port 670 are provided at the upper portion of the out port 66, and a game ball that passes through the left side of the variable display device 80 (a so-called left-handed game ball) and a variable display are displayed. Any game ball that has passed the right side of the device 80 (so-called a right-handed game ball) can enter the rotating accessory 680 (that is, can enter the operation port 670). Is not something For example, a rotating accessory 680 and an operation port 670 may be provided on the upper part of the game board 13.

  Further, only the game ball that has passed through the left side of the variable display device 80 (so-called left-handed game ball) may enter the rotating combination 680 (that is, enter the operation port 670). .

  Further, the rotating accessory 680 may not be provided. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the gaming area of the gaming board 13 can be widened. In this case, by providing the operation port 670 in the lower part of the game board 13 as in the sixth modified example, excessive game balls enter the operation port 670 and game balls do not enter other game entrances. And inconveniences can be suppressed.

  Although a plurality of modified examples have been described above, other configurations may be used without being limited thereto. For example, a member that configures the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 may be integrally provided on the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 that configure the firing path 701, or the operation port 670 or the second member that configures the firing path 701. A winning port 640 may be provided.

  In addition, although the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 is provided as a set, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the operating port 670 and the second winning port 640 is placed in another place (for example, a normal position) It may be provided in a game area.

  Further, the non-electrically-operated accessory 640a that is mechanically actuated (variable) based on the winning at the operating port 670 is configured to change whether or not the second winning port 640 can be entered (open / closed state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an electric accessory that is electrically actuated (actuated by driving a solenoid or the like) based on a winning in the actuation port 670 may be used. Further, the electric accessory may be in a closed state based on the passage of a predetermined time. Furthermore, the opening / closing of the electric accessory may be variably controlled based on a predetermined lottery result (lottery result based on entering the operation port 670). Thereby, the probability that the second prize opening will be in an open state can be changed based on the entrance to the operation port 670, and the variation of the game can be increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved. .

  In addition, although output processing based on various determination processes is performed in the main control device 110 in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, all the output information is the audio lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal plate 261. Even when the determination process is performed by a device other than the main control device 110, all the information based on the determination result is output to the audio lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal plate 261. It is configured to be possible. In addition, the output information can be notified to the outside in an identifiable manner, and as means for performing the notification, various devices (LCD, speakers, etc.) connected to the sound lamp control device 113 or directly to the main control device 110 are used. There are connected display units.

  In addition, you may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  You may comprise combining each or all of said each embodiment and a modification, respectively. In addition, although the sub control devices such as the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are configured, the present invention is not limited thereto, and all functions may be integrated into the main control device 110.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Feature A group: Skip function>
A first area in which a game ball can flow down, a second area in which the game ball can flow down, which is different from the first area, and at least one of the first area and the second area And a launching means capable of launching the game ball based on the player's operation, and a game ball by the launching means based on the player's operation so that the game ball can reach the second region. A launch control means for controlling the launch, a first ball entry means arranged in the first area, a judgment means for executing a judgment based on a game ball entering the first ball throw means, and Display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result When displayed on the display means, the player has And determining whether the specific condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means and a second ball entry means arranged in the second area. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determination unit and the specific condition determination unit, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit is performed for the predetermined period. A gaming machine A1 comprising stop means for stopping before the elapse of time.

  Conventionally, a starting board is provided in the game board, and when a game ball enters the starting board, a lottery is executed, and the lottery result is displayed on the display device in a corresponding manner for a predetermined period of time to display a game for the player. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which this is performed (for example, JP-A-9-308730). However, since the next lottery result is not displayed until the symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period and the lottery result is displayed, there is a problem that the game efficiency is lowered. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the efficiency of gaming in order to eliminate such problems.

  According to the gaming machine A1, on the basis of the entry to the first entry means, the dynamic display of the identification information executed for a predetermined time by the dynamic display execution means, the game ball enters the second entry means. And when specific conditions are satisfied, it can be stopped before progress of predetermined time by a stop means. Therefore, since the dynamic display corresponding to the entry to the first entry means can be forcibly terminated before the predetermined time elapses, many games can be performed in a short time, and the efficiency of the game is improved. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

  In the gaming machine A1, the determination means executes determination even when a game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the specific condition is that the game ball is in the second ball entry means. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it is established at least when the determination result by the determination means triggered by entering is the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A1, when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the determination means executes the determination, and the determination result is a specific determination result. Since at least the specific condition is satisfied, even if the dynamic display corresponding to the first ball entry means is forcibly terminated, the specific determination result can be given to the player, and the game can be improved. is there.

  In the gaming machine A2, the determination means, as one of the specific determination results when a game ball enters the second ball entry means, allows the player to use the privilege grant means rather than the specific determination result. A gaming machine configured to be able to determine a specific determination result with a small privilege to be given, wherein the specific condition is satisfied at least when the privilege is a specific determination result with a small privilege A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, the specific condition is satisfied at least when a specific determination result with a small privilege given to the player is determined by the determining means, so the first entry Even if the frequency at which the dynamic display corresponding to the means is forcibly terminated is set high, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a malfunction that causes a great disadvantage on the game store side.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a restricted state that restricts the entry of the game ball into the second entry means, and the game ball is easier to enter the second entry means than the restricted state. Based on a variable member that can be changed to a non-regulated state that is a state and a game ball entering the second ball entry means, the variable member is changed from the non-regulated state to the restricted state. A gaming machine A4, comprising: variable regulation means that varies and varies the variable member from the regulated state to the non-regulated state based on establishment of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the variable member enters the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to restrict the entry into the second entry means.

  In the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A4 has a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball arranged in the first area, and the predetermined condition is that the game ball enters the third ball entry means. A gaming machine A5 that is established based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A4, by entering the third ball entry means, the variable member is varied so that the second ball entry means is in an unregulated state. Since the player intentionally enters the third ball entry means, the second ball entry means can be changed to an unregulated state, so that the player's interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5, the gaming machine A6 is characterized by having suppression means for suppressing the frequency of entering the game ball into the third ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, since the frequency of entering the third ball entry means is suppressed by the suppression means, the frequency at which the second ball entry means is changed to the unregulated state is reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to reduce, and the entry to the second entry means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A6, the suppressing means is configured to be able to guide the gaming ball to the third entering means at every predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, it is possible to guide the gaming ball to the third ball entry means at every predetermined period by the restraining means. There is an effect that it is possible to guide the game ball to the third ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the restraining means includes a holding unit having a holding unit capable of holding at least one game ball, and rotating the holding unit to remove the game ball held in the holding unit. A gaming machine A8, characterized by having guidance means for guiding to a third entry means.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the suppression means has a holding part capable of holding one gaming ball, and rotates and holds it to the third entering means. Since the game ball thus guided is guided, there is an effect that the game ball can be periodically guided to the third ball entry means more reliably.

  In the gaming machine A8, the holding means is rotated by the guide means, thereby allowing an allowable position where a game ball can be received in the holding part, and a restriction for restricting the game ball from entering the holding part. A gaming machine A9 that is variable in position.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, the holding means is changed to an allowable position where the holding ball can be received by the holding portion and a restriction position where the holding ball is restricted by being rotated by the guiding means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the holding portion.

<Characteristic B group: Disposition mechanism>
A ball entry means that is arranged in a specific area in the game area and is given a predetermined game value based on the game ball entering, an operation means that can be operated by the player, Based on the operation, the launching means capable of launching the game ball with varying launch intensity to the game area, and the operation means include: a game ball launched by the launch means to the specific area. A first operation unit capable of launching a game ball by the launching means with a launch intensity that is difficult to reach, and a game ball launched by the launching means different from the first operation unit reaches the specific area. A gaming machine B1 having at least a second operation unit capable of launching a game ball by the launching means with a launch strength that facilitates the launch.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine that adjusts the launch intensity of a game ball that is launched into a game area by adjusting the operation amount of an operation handle and performs a ball game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-308730). Publication). In such a gaming machine, it is necessary for the player to adjust the operation amount of the operation handle in accordance with the gaming state (left-handed gaming state, right-handed gaming state), and the burden on the player's operation is large.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first operation unit capable of launching a game ball by the launching means with the launch intensity that is difficult to reach a specific area in the game area, and the launch that easily reaches the specific area in the game area. And a second operation unit capable of launching a game ball with strength by launching means. Therefore, the player may operate the second operation unit when it wants to fire a game ball to a specific area, and may operate the first operation unit when it does not want to fire the game ball to a specific area. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the burden of the player's operation as compared with the gaming machine in which the player adjusts the operation amount of the operation handle to adjust whether or not to release the game ball to the specific area. .

  The gaming machine B1 has supply means that variably supplies power for launching a game ball to the launching means in response to the operation of the operating means, and the second operation unit is operated. Based on this, the gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the supply means supplies power equal to or higher than the maximum power supplied by operating the first operation unit.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, based on the operation of the second operation unit, the power more than the maximum power supplied from the supply means by operating the first operation unit Therefore, there is an effect that the firing intensity can be varied with a simple operation.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the first operation unit is configured so that a player can perform a rotation operation, and the firing strength is variable depending on a rotation amount, and the second operation unit is operated by a player. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that a game ball is fired by the launching means at a specific launch intensity greater than the launch intensity of the maximum rotation amount.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, by operating the second operation unit, the first operation unit is fired with a greater firing strength than the maximum rotation, Since it is possible to launch a game ball with a larger launch intensity with a simple operation, it is possible to change the launch intensity with agility and to allow a player to perform various games.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a second entry means capable of entering at least a game ball that is launched based on an operation by the first operation unit, and a game ball enters the second entry means. Based on the above, the determination means for executing the determination, the display means for displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the second identification information displayed by the display means for a predetermined period, A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying; a privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the second identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means; Ending means for ending the effect executed by the effect executing means before the predetermined period elapses when a specific condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball means. What you have Game machine B4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. In other words, the dynamic display corresponding to the entry into the second entry means can be terminated before the predetermined time elapses by operating the second operation unit to enter the entry means. There is an effect that the dynamic display corresponding to the first ball entry means can be performed efficiently.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the determination unit executes determination even when a game ball enters the ball entry unit, and the display unit receives a game ball in the ball entry unit. The first identification information indicating the determination result executed by the determination means when the ball is played is displayed, and the privilege giving means is displayed when the first identification information indicating the specific determination result of the display means is displayed. The game machine B5 is characterized in that it gives a smaller privilege than when the specific determination result is indicated by the second identification information.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the first identification information is the specific determination result when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result when the ball entering means is entered. As a bonus is smaller than in the case of the game, even if the player can intentionally easily enter the second entry means by operating the second operation part, the disadvantage of the amusement shop side is reduced. There is an effect that it can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, there is a restriction state that restricts the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the entry means than the restriction state. Based on a variable member that can be changed to a restricted state and a game ball entering the ball entry means, the variable member is changed from the non-restricted state to the restricted state, A gaming variable B6, comprising: regulation variable means for varying the variable member from the regulation state to the non-regulation state based on establishment.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B5, the ball entry means can be changed from the non-regulated state to the restricted state by the variable member, so that the game ball enters the ball entry means. There is an effect that can be easily restricted.

  In the gaming machine B6, there is a third ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and the predetermined condition is established based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means. A gaming machine B7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B6, a predetermined condition is established based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means, so that the player changes from the restricted state to the non-restricted state. There is an effect that it can be changed intentionally.

  In the gaming machine B7, the gaming machine B8 is characterized by having suppression means for suppressing the frequency of entering the game ball into the third ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B7, the frequency of entering the third ball entry means is suppressed by the suppression means, so that the frequency at which the ball entry means is changed to the non-regulated state can be reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress entry into the second entry means.

  In the gaming machine B8, the suppressing means is configured to be able to guide a gaming ball to the third entering means at every predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 8, it is possible to guide the gaming ball to the third ball entry means at every predetermined period by the restraining means. There is an effect that it is possible to guide the game ball to the third ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine B8 or B9, the suppression means includes a holding unit having a holding unit capable of holding at least one game ball, and rotating the holding unit to remove the gaming ball held in the holding unit. A gaming machine B10 having guidance means for guiding to a third entry means.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8 or B9, the suppression means has a holding part capable of holding one gaming ball, and rotates and holds it to the third entering means. Since the game ball thus guided is guided, there is an effect that the game ball can be periodically guided to the third ball entry means more reliably.

  In the gaming machine B10, the holding means is rotated by the guide means, thereby allowing an allowable position where a game ball can be received in the holding portion, and a restriction for restricting the game ball from entering the holding portion. A gaming machine B11 that is variable to a position.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B10, the holding means is changed into an allowable position where the game ball can be received in the holding portion and a restriction position where the holding ball is restricted by being rotated by the guiding means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the holding portion.

<Characteristic C group: Winning intentionally>
A launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the player's operation, and a game by the launch means based on the player's operation so that the game ball can reach a specific area in the game area. A launch control means for controlling the launch of a ball, a first throwing means arranged in the specific area and given a predetermined game value based on a game ball entering, and placed in the specific area A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a first state in which the game ball is more easily guided to the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, and the first ball entry means. A variable member that is variable to a second state in which it is easier to guide the game ball to the second ball entry means, and a variable control means that varies the variable member from the second state to the first state; Revariable control means for varying the first state to the second state; Gaming machine C1, characterized in that to obtain.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine having a gaming property that adjusts the firing strength of a launching device and aims at a predetermined location in a game area when a specific state (a hit state) is reached. (For example, JP-A-9-308730). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if a game ball is fired at a location other than a predetermined location during the above-described specific state, an unintended prize is generated, which is disadvantageous for the player. There was a problem. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress such unintended winnings.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in order to enter the first entry means arranged in the specific area, the game ball can be entered by entering the second entry means arranged in the specific area. It is necessary to change the member to the first state. As a result, even if a game ball is fired to a specific area where the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged based on the operation means being operated by a predetermined operation, the second ball entry is first performed. A game ball enters the ball means. As a result, even if the player does not intend (inadvertently) operate the operation means with a predetermined operation, the game ball does not enter the first ball entry means, and the unintended winning is suppressed. be able to.

  The gaming machine C1 has selection means that allows the player to select and change the timing at which the variable member is changed from the first state to the second state by the re-variable control means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the variable member is changed by selecting the timing at which the selection means is changed from the first state to the second state, so that the player can play the game. There is an effect that it is possible to participate directly and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine C2, the selection means changes the variable member from the first state to the second state based on a predetermined number of game balls entering the first ball entry means. A gaming machine C3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the variable member can be changed to the second state by launching the game ball by the player's operation and entering the first entrance means, so that the player can By intentionally aiming at the first ball entry means and launching the game ball, there is an effect that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the variable control means can change the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A gaming machine C4, characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C3, there is an effect that it is possible to easily limit the entrance to the second entrance means.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the variable member is disposed at a position that restricts the game ball from entering the second ball entry means in the first state, and in the second state, A gaming machine C5, wherein the gaming machine C5 is disposed at a position that restricts the game ball from entering the first ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the variable member restricts entry into the second entry means in the first state, and restricts entry into the first entry means in the second state. There is an effect that the entrance rate to the first entrance means and the second entrance means can be limited well.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the third entry means arranged in an area different from the specific area, and the movement of the identification information based on the game ball entering the third entry means. Dynamic display execution means for executing a specific display for a predetermined period, determination means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the determination means satisfies the specific condition And a stop means for stopping the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display executing means based on the determination that it has been made before the lapse of the predetermined period. Machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the third entry means when the determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied based on the entry to the first entry means. Since the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the entry into the ball is forcibly stopped by the stop means before the lapse of the predetermined period, the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the third entry means can be efficiently executed. There is an effect.

<Feature D group> (skip notification)
A first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a determination means for executing a determination based on the game ball entering the first entry means, and a first result indicating a determination result by the determination means Display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information displayed on the display means for a predetermined period, and the first indicating the determination result specific to the display means When the identification information is displayed, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, a second entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball entering the second entry means A variable member that can be changed between a first state and a second state in which entry of a game ball is more difficult than the first state, and the variable member is configured to change the first state or the State variable means for changing to the second state, and a game ball enters the second ball entry means And when the specific condition is satisfied, the stop means for stopping the first identification information that is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means before the lapse of the predetermined period, and the variable member is in the state A gaming machine D1 characterized by having an effect execution means for executing different effects depending on whether the variable state is changed to the first state or the second state. .

  Conventionally, a starting board is provided in the game board, and when a game ball enters the starting board, a lottery is executed, and the lottery result is displayed on the display device in a corresponding manner for a predetermined period of time to display a game for the player. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which this is performed (for example, JP-A-9-308730). However, in the above-described gaming machine, since the symbol change period is unilaterally selected and determined regardless of the player's intention, the efficiency of the game has deteriorated. However, if efficiency is improved by simply configuring the variation period to be short, there is a problem that the effects of the game become monotonous and the interest of the game decreases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game while improving the efficiency of the game. Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving gaming efficiency and improving the fun of gaming.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the first identification information in the dynamic display is forcibly stopped by the stop unit before a predetermined period of time by causing the second entry unit to enter and the specific condition being satisfied. . The case where the variable member is changed to the first state where the game ball enters the second ball entry means is different from the case where the variable member is changed to the second state where the ball entry into the second ball entry means is difficult. Since the performance is executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to present whether or not the player can stop the first identification information before the lapse of the predetermined period, while increasing the efficiency of the game. Has the effect of improving the fun of gaming.

  In the gaming machine D1, the specific condition is that the first identification information other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine D2 that is characterized by at least one.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the case where the first identification information whose specific condition is other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed is one of the establishment conditions. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the dynamic display as the determination result is forcibly stopped before the predetermined period has elapsed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the variable member is changed to the first state by the state variable means, the effect executing means executes the first effect and is changed to the second state. If there is a game machine D3, the second effect is executed, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second effect is switched to a different effect.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, since the predetermined condition is satisfied, the production can be switched to the production different from the second production, so that the production different from the second production can be executed. There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D2 or D3, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means, an acquisition means for acquiring information used for the determination by the determination means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means Storage means for storing at least until it is determined by the determination means, and pre-determination means for determining information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means A gaming machine D4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the information used for determination when entering the first ball entry means is determined by the prior determination means before the determination means determines the information used for the determination. Since the determination is made, there is an effect that an effect using the determination result can be executed before the dynamic display of the first identification information is started.

  In the gaming machine D4, the effect execution means executes at least the effect when the prior determination means determines that it is different from the specific first determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4, the effect is executed by the effect execution means when it is determined by the prior determination means that it is different from the specific first determination result. There is an effect that the player can make a preparation in advance by determining whether or not the means can be entered by determining whether or not the means can be entered, and making the entry into the second entry means. Moreover, since the determination result can be recognized in advance by the effect executed by the effect executing means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the effect execution means is more than the newly acquired information based on the fact that the information newly acquired by the prior determination means is determined to be the specific determination result. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the presentation is executed during dynamic display of the first identification information with respect to previously acquired information.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the information determined that the effect executed by the effect executing means becomes a specific determination result is started. Since it is continuously executed until it is played, there is an effect that the expectation that a specific determination result can be obtained by the effect executed by the effect executing means can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature E group> (Skip production)
A first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a determination means for executing a first determination based on the game ball entering the first entry means, and a first determination result by the determination means Display means for displaying the first identification information indicating the display, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information displayed on the display means, and dynamic display for a predetermined period by the dynamic display means. A dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the display unit. And a second entry means that allows a game ball to enter, and the determination means performs a second determination based on the game ball entering the second entry means. And the second determination results in the specific first determination result in the first determination. The second determination result is determined with a high probability, and the display means displays second identification information indicating a second determination result by the determination means, and the dynamic display means. Is to dynamically display the second identification information, and the dynamic display mode determination means is to determine a dynamic display mode of the second identification information, and the specific first determination result and When the first identification information displayed with different determination results is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display of the second identification information that becomes the specific second determination result is started, In the case where the dynamic display mode determination unit has a determination result other than the specific second determination result, the dynamic display mode determination unit includes a stop unit that stops the dynamic display of the first identification information before the predetermined period has elapsed As a dynamic display mode of the second identification information, Gaming machine E1, characterized in that is what determines the specific dynamic display mode for varying the effect of the dynamic display mode of the first identification information being displayed.

  Conventionally, a starting board is provided in the game board, and when a game ball enters the starting board, a lottery is executed, and the lottery result is displayed on the display device in a corresponding manner for a predetermined period of time to display a game for the player. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which this is performed (for example, JP-A-9-308730). However, in the above-described gaming machine, since the symbol change period is unilaterally selected and determined regardless of the player's intention, the efficiency of the game has deteriorated. However, if efficiency is improved by simply configuring the variation period to be short, there is a problem that the effects of the game become monotonous and the interest of the game decreases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game while improving the efficiency of the game. Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving gaming efficiency and improving the fun of gaming.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the first identification information in the dynamic display is forcibly stopped by the stop unit before a predetermined period of time by allowing the second entry unit to enter and the specific condition is satisfied. . If a specific second determination result is not obtained when the ball enters the second ball entry means, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information is also variably displayed in the special dynamic display mode. The dynamic display of the first identification information can provide an expectation that is a specific first determination result, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved while increasing the efficiency of the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the special dynamic display mode includes a dedicated dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and a dedicated dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. Characteristic gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the special dynamic display mode includes a dedicated dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and a dedicated dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. Are included, which has the effect of making it possible for the player to play a game that is easy to understand.

  In the gaming machine E1 or 2, the special dynamic display mode includes an effect indicating whether or not the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the special dynamic display mode includes an effect indicating whether or not the privilege is given by the privilege granting means, so that a privilege is given to the player There is an effect that it can be expected by the special dynamic display mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the game machine has setting means capable of setting at least one of a special gaming state advantageous to the player and a normal gaming state disadvantageous to the player over the special gaming state, The privilege granting unit is configured to easily grant a privilege that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific first determination result to the specific second determination result when the normal gaming state is set. And when the special gaming state is set, it is configured to easily give a privilege more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state to the specific second determination result. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E1 to E3, when the normal gaming state is set, the player is more than the specific first determination result with respect to the specific second determination result. When a special gaming state is set, an advantage that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state can be easily given to the specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game in the special game state can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent an illegal act in which a game ball is inserted only into the second ball entry means in the normal game state so that an unfavorable privilege is easily given, so that it can be prevented.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the stopping unit is configured to display the specific second information when the second identification information displayed with a determination result different from the specific second determination result is dynamically displayed. The dynamic display of the second identification information is stopped before the predetermined period elapses based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information that is one determination result. Game machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the second identification information displayed with a determination result different from the specific second determination result is dynamically displayed, Since the dynamic display of the second identification information is stopped by the stopping means before the lapse of the predetermined period based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information as the specific first determination result, the second There is an effect that the dynamic display of the identification information can be performed efficiently.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the game apparatus has state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states with different benefits obtained by the player, and the dynamic display mode determining means includes the state setting means The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the corresponding special dynamic display mode is determined in accordance with the gaming state set by (1).

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the special dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit according to the gaming state set by the state setting unit. Therefore, it is possible to switch to the special dynamic display mode corresponding to the gaming state, and there is an effect that diversification of the game can be realized.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board (game area)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
112 Firing control device (firing control means)
640 Second entrance (first entry means, re-variable control means)
640a Non-electrical accessory (variable member)
670 Actuation port (second ball entry means, variable control means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, when a specific state ( for example, a hit state) is reached, the ball entry means can be changed so that a game ball can enter, and the launch intensity of the launch device can be adjusted to enter the ball. There is known a gaming machine having a gaming property of launching a gaming ball to the incoming ball means .

JP-A-9-308730

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a more suitable gaming machine has been demanded.

Furthermore, it aims at providing the gaming machine which made the game suitable .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on a player's operation, and the game ball can reach a specific area in the game area. The launch control means for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch means based on the operation of the player, the first throwing means arranged in the specific area and capable of entering the game ball, A second ball entry means arranged in a specific area and different from the first ball entry means, a third ball entry means arranged in an area different from the specific area, and a game for the third ball entry means Dynamic display executing means capable of executing a dynamic display of identification information for a predetermined period based on the ball entering, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information, Privilege game execution means for executing an advantageous privilege game, and the first Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball means, a determination means capable of determining whether a specific condition is satisfied during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; A first position that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the second entry means and a second position that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first entry means than the second entry means. And a variable member, and when the variable member is variable to the first position, the variable member is based on a first predetermined number of game balls entering the second ball entry means. A first variable means for changing the first position to the second position; and when the variable member is changed to the second position, a second predetermined number of game balls have entered the first ball entry means. Based on the second variable means for changing the variable member to the first position and the determination means. Ending means for ending dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display executing means based on the determination that the condition is satisfied, before the elapse of the predetermined period, When it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied when the first entry means is entered during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, a period corresponding to a period until the specific condition is satisfied The specific effect indicating that the dynamic display of the identification information is terminated is executed .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the launching means capable of launching the game ball to the game area based on the player's operation, and the game ball so that the game ball can reach a specific area in the game area. A launch control means for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch means based on a user's operation, a first entrance means that is placed in the specific area and into which the game ball can enter, and is placed in the specific area A second incoming ball means different from the first incoming ball means, a third incoming ball means arranged in an area different from the specific area, and a game ball has entered the third incoming ball means. And a dynamic display executing means capable of executing dynamic display of identification information for a predetermined period of time, and a special game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information. A bonus game executing means for executing a game ball on the first entrance means Based on the fact that the player has played a ball, the determination means that can determine whether the specific condition is satisfied during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, A variable member that can be varied between a first position that makes it easier for a ball to enter and a second position that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first entry means than the second entry means; When the variable member is changed to the first position, the variable member is moved to the second position based on the first predetermined number of game balls entering the second ball entry means. First variable means to be varied, and when the variable member is varied to the second position, the variable member is based on the fact that a second predetermined number of game balls have entered the first ball entry means. When the specific condition is satisfied by the second variable means for changing the position to the first position and the determination means Ending means for ending the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the fact that the predetermined information has not passed. If it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied when the first entry means is entered during the period indicated by the target, the identification information constituted by a period corresponding to the period until the specific condition is satisfied The specific effect indicating that the dynamic display is terminated on the way is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be made suitable.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) And (b) is the partial expanded front view which saw through a part of back of the game board in 1st Embodiment from the front side. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the 3rd symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen of the apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the effect screen of the press suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the effect screen of the press suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the discharge control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) showed typically the content of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. FIG. (A) is the figure which showed typically the 1st hit random number table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the 1st hit type selection table in 1st Embodiment typically. (C) is the figure which showed typically the 2nd random number table in 1st Embodiment, (d) is the figure which showed typically the content of the fluctuation | variation pattern table in 1st Embodiment. . (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for 1st special symbols in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the variation pattern table for special figure 1 big hits in 1st Embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for extraordinary (unusual) variation in FIG. 1 in the first embodiment, and (d) is a diagram in the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram schematically showing a deviation pattern table (probability change). (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for 2nd special symbols in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the variation pattern table for special figure 2 jackpots in 1st Embodiment. (C) is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 2 small hits in 1st Embodiment, (d) is the figure 2 in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the fluctuation pattern table for deviation typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the effect change selection table in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of the work RAM of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation in 1st Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A in 1st Embodiment, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the effect change process at the time of winning performed performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo production change process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation change process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the suggestion effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the V interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed round number command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production change command processing which is done. (A) is the flowchart which showed the suggestion effect command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of a 1st embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 4th modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 5th modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 6th modification of a 1st embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 65, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a view of the game board 13 when the game board 13 is viewed from the front. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged front view of the back side, and FIG. 4 is a back view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a certain firing strength (second prize opening 640 (described later) A skip switch 51c for launching a game ball with a launch intensity) that can enter the ball (see FIG. 2), and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. Built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. It should be noted that, here, even if the ball is fired with the maximum amount of rotation, the game ball hits the second winning opening 640, which will be described later, so that the game ball collides with the return rubber 600a. Fired at a firing intensity). As a result, even if the operation handle 51 is rotated and the game ball is fired, the second winning opening 640 can not be won (difficult to win). In order to win the second winning slot 640, skip. It can be configured to easily win a prize by firing a game ball using the switch 51c. Therefore, the operation for making a prize at the second prize opening 640 can be another operation, and the player can intentionally make a prize at the second prize opening 640 easily. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  When the skip switch 51c of the operation handle 51 is on (when pressed), a ball is launched with a constant strength regardless of the resistance value of the variable resistor described above. Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, by changing the power value (voltage value) supplied to the launch solenoid 142 (see FIG. 8), the launch intensity of the game ball is changed from 0% which is the minimum launch intensity to the maximum. It is configured to be variable up to 100%, which is the firing intensity. When the skip switch 51c is off (when the skip switch 51c is not pressed), the firing strength ranges from 0% (a state in which no game ball is fired) to 90% (in FIG. 2). 2 (see the broken line b), and when the skip switch 51c is on (depressed), 100% (the broken line in FIG. 2) regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. a)).

  As will be described in detail later, when the skip switch 51c is turned on, the firing strength at which the game ball is fired is the largest of the firing strengths (0 to 90%) that can be varied according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The firing intensity (100%, see broken line a in FIG. 2) is stronger than the firing intensity (90%, see broken line b in FIG. 2). This 100% launch intensity is such that the game ball can reach a second prize opening 640 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the skip switch is off (when not pressed), the game ball is launched at a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 as described above. As a result, at the firing strength (0 to 90%) corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, the game ball does not reach the second winning opening 640 (or is difficult). Thereby, only when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the game ball can be entered into the second winning opening 640 (or can be easily entered).

  In the present embodiment, by pressing the skip switch 51c, the game ball is fired with a firing strength (100%) different from the firing strength (0 to 90%) corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation range (turning range) of the operation handle 51 may be expanded (or varied) by pressing the skip switch 51c. Good.

  Specifically, when the skip switch 51c is not pressed, a rotation operation that rotates rightward (clockwise) at a position where the rotation operation amount becomes a predetermined firing intensity (90%). To regulate. On the other hand, when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the restriction is released, and it is possible to further rotate rightward (clockwise) from a position where the rotation operation amount becomes a predetermined firing intensity (90%). Accordingly, by pressing the skip switch 51c, it is possible to perform a turning operation in a range where the firing intensity is 0 to 100%. As a result, the amount of rotation operation can be increased when the skip switch 51c is pressed, and the firing strength at which a game ball can be shot can be changed depending on whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the second winning opening 640 only when the skip switch 51c is pressed as described above.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 may be changed by pressing the skip switch 51c. Specifically, two types of variable resistors for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 are provided, and the firing strength is determined based on the electric resistance of which variable resistor depending on whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed. What is necessary is just to make it switch. In this case, even if the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51c is the same, the type of the variable resistor used is switched according to whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed. Therefore, the detected electric resistance is different, that is, the set firing intensity is different. As a result, the firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 can be changed according to whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed.

  Thereby, for example, when the skip switch 51c is not pressed, the firing strength based on the operation of the operation handle 51 is set to the firing strength (0 to 50%) at which the game ball is launched on the left side of the game board 13, while When the skip switch 51c is pressed, the firing strength based on the operation of the operation handle 51 is set to a firing strength (50 to 100%) at which a game ball is launched on the right side of the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of easily hitting the game balls on the left side and the right side of the game board 13.

  Note that the skip switch 51c in the present embodiment is turned on only while the player is pressing, but is not limited to this, and the on state and the off state are switched every time the player performs a pressing operation. Things can be used. Thus, when the skip switch 51c is continuously turned on, it is not necessary to keep pressing the skip switch 51c, so that the operation load on the player can be reduced.

  Although the skip switch 51c is provided on the operation handle 51, the invention is not limited to this, and the skip switch 51c may be disposed at another position or may be shared with other buttons (for example, the frame button 22). Further, the skip switch 51c is not limited to a button, and may be other operation means such as a lever. When the frame button 22 and the skip switch 51c are shared, the game ball is fired based on the operation of the frame button 22 only in a specific state (for example, during execution of the press suggestion effect). In other states, the game ball may not be fired. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being fired during an effect (so-called button press effect) that suggests pressing the frame button 22 simply for the purpose of improving the effect of the effect.

  Further, the launch strength is changed based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c so that the player can launch at the launch strength intended by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and the player can set the launch strength. It is good also as a structure which makes it easy to recognize. For example, when the operation handle 51 is rotated to the right (clockwise) and is rotated to the right (clockwise) from the position where the rotation operation amount becomes a predetermined firing intensity (90%). (In other words, when the firing intensity exceeds 90%), the player is notified by turning on the LED, outputting a sound, or displaying a screen. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily recognize that the game is being executed with the firing strength exceeding the predetermined firing strength (90%).

  Further, without providing the skip switch 51c, the rotation range of the operation handle 51 is set to a firing intensity of 0% to 100%, and the turning force required for the rotation corresponding to the range of 90% to 100% is set high. You may comprise so that it may leave. With this configuration, the player can intentionally increase the turning power and rotate the operation handle 51 to launch the game ball with a firing strength stronger than 90%. By operating the operation handle 51 with a turning force smaller than the turning force corresponding to the firing strength stronger than%, it is possible to easily launch the game ball with any firing strength between 0% and 90% ( That is, the problem of unintentionally launching a game ball with a launch intensity higher than 90% can be suppressed).

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, A winning opening 64, a right first winning opening 641, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a normal winning opening (through gate) 67, a rotating accessory 680, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof. The part is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is provided on the right side of the center of the game board 13. The normal winning opening 67 is a winning opening having a gate-type sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal winning opening 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed in response to the passing of the game ball to the normal winning opening 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “○” and “×” are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “×”) is stopped (lit). If a ball passes through the normal winning opening 67 while the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed.

  If it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory 641a is activated, and the ordinary electric accessory provided along with the first right winning opening 641 that is normally maintained in an upright position. 641a is moved to a substantially V-shape (reverse C-shape) from a state in which it stands up substantially vertically. As a result, the game ball is guided by the ordinary electric accessory 641a moved in a substantially V shape (inverted C shape), and enters the right first winning opening 641 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). It becomes easy to sphere. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display device 83.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose variation display is not executed among the balls won in the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641, the second winning port 640, and the normal winning port 67. A certain number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds of big hits and error indications are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left 7-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display (in this embodiment, 7 segments) is determined until the variable time (dynamic display time) elapses, which is determined based on winning in the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641. After the center segment blinks), it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. In the case where the determination result is off, a symbol “-” indicating that the center segment is off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbol indicating a deviation such as symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the win is displayed. The second lottery game is configured similarly to the first lottery game. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a variation time is set for each variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time by a variation pattern that becomes reach and a variation pattern that does not reach. As described above, even when the time is roughly sorted according to a constant reference (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the dynamics related to the time information Corresponds to the display mode.

  In addition, the time information until the fluctuation start time corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the rough fluctuation pattern time information described above (for example, whether it is a long-time fluctuation pattern). Information on time information determined based on (for example, the number of long-time variation patterns performed before the start of variation) also falls under this category.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol lottery is performed in response to the winning of the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641, and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, the jackpot type selected corresponding to the set gaming state and the special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) is set.

  In the normal gaming state where the jackpot probability is low and the normal symbol hit probability is also set to a low probability, the jackpot type of the first special symbol is jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot (until next time electric power support)), jackpot B (16R hour junior big hit (electric support 100 times)) is prepared. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol, jackpot E (2R probability variation with time short and large jackpot (no electric support) (so-called 2R latent probability variation jackpot)), jackpot F (2R normal jackpot (no electric support)) is prepared Yes.

  In addition, in the electric support game state (probability game state, short-time game state) in which the jackpot probability is low or high and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a high probability, the jackpot type of the first special symbol is as described above. A jackpot type similar to that in the normal gaming state is prepared. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol, “jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot (until next time electric support))” and “hit D (2R short time jackpot (electric support 100 times))” are prepared.

  As described above, by setting the jackpot type, in the normal gaming state, the details will be described later, but it is easy for the player to intentionally win the second winning port 640, but the bonus game bonus that can be obtained It is less than the first special symbol. Specifically, if you win a jackpot with the first special symbol, a jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot (until next time electric support)) or jackpot B (16R short-term jackpot (electric support 100 times)) will be set, so it will be a big hit of 16 rounds One round of 100 game balls can be obtained, and 16 rounds of 1600 game balls can be obtained. On the other hand, even if the second special symbol is a big hit ("big hit E (2R probability change time short no big hit (no electric support))" or "big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))") In addition, in one round, since it is an open time (one round 0.5 seconds) as to whether or not one ball can win a specific entrance 65a, which will be described later, it is a big hit that almost no game balls can be obtained It has become. Furthermore, in the first special symbol, after the big hit game, it always shifts to the electric support state that makes it easy for the game ball to win the right first winning port 641, but in the second special symbol, it shifts to the electric support state after the big hit game. It has a configuration that does not.

  Thereby, even when a fraud in which a game is played so that a game ball is awarded only to the second winning port 640, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game store side is greatly damaged. Further, as will be described later, if lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed in a state where the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed for a predetermined time or more, an error display (display mode for calling a store clerk or current A display mode indicating that the gaming method is illegal) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an alarm sound or sound indicating an error is output even by sound. Further, an error signal is also output to the external output terminal 261 and notified to the hall computer. Thereby, the game store side can also identify an unauthorized game method at an early stage, and can suppress damage caused by an unauthorized game.

  The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. Indicated.

  Here, “16R probable jackpot (with electric support)” means that the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds (one round is 30 seconds or up to 10 balls), and then a special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) It is a big hit that shifts to a high probability state in which a lottery probability of symbols is set high and becomes a short-time state (a normal symbol has a high probability of winning). In addition, “16R short junior jackpot” shifts to a low probability state in which the lottery probability of a special symbol is set low after the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds (one round is up to 30 seconds or 10 ball winning), Between the predetermined number of fluctuations (in this embodiment, 100 fluctuations) is a big hit that results in a short time state. "2R latent probability variation jackpot (no electric support)" is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds (1 round is 0.5 seconds or up to 10 balls). is there. In this case, unlike the big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support)), the short time state (electric support state) is not given. The “2R normal jackpot (without electric support)” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot game with respect to the above-mentioned 2R latent probability variation jackpot (without electric support). The jackpot of “2R probable jackpot (until next time for electric support)” is that the maximum number of rounds will be two rounds (one round is up to 0.5 seconds or 10 ball winnings), then the transition to a high probability state and the next time It is a big hit that shifts to the short-time gaming state until the big hit. The jackpot of “2R regular jackpot (100 times of power support)” is a transition to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is two rounds (one round is up to 0.5 seconds or 10 ball winnings), and it is off It is a big hit that shifts to the short-time gaming state up to a maximum of 100 variations of special symbols.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the right first winning opening 641. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. Also, the short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the normal symbol hit probability is increased, and the right first winning opening 641 It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a state of a game in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the normal symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probability change (excluding the latent probability change state) and during time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, but the time and number of times that the electric accessory 641a attached to the right first winning opening 641 is opened are also changed. A longer time and a larger number of times of opening than the inside are set. When the electric accessory 641a is in an open state (open state), the ball wins the right first prize opening 641 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 641a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Thus, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the right first winning opening 641, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or in a short time, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 641a attached to the right first prize opening 641, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 641a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 641a is released at the time and once the electric accessory 641a attached to the right first winning opening 641 is released. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the probability that the electric symbol 641a associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is not opened or the number of times the electric character 641a is released per time is not given. However, it may be changed so as to be higher than normal. Furthermore, it may be configured to change the length of the fluctuation time without changing the normal symbol hit probability. Specifically, the winning probability is set to 1/1, the normal time is set to 5 minutes or the like, and the normal time is set to 0.5 seconds, so that the right first prize opening 641 is set. The game ball may be set so as to be switchable to a state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball.

  Next, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged below the game area. As game balls win the general winning opening 63, 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls. A variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640. 3D display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that displays the variation of the 3rd symbol, and the normal symbol variation display using the passage of the sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 8). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel. Details of display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 641a attached to the right first winning port 641 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a period of time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 641a of the first right winning port 641. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the right first winning port 641 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It should be noted that the right first prize opening 641 during the probability change or in the short time can be increased by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the probability change or in the time short, and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 641a per time. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A lottery for the first special symbol is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in front view, a right first winning opening 641 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the right first winning port 641, a right first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the right first prize port switch is turned on, the main control device (see FIG. 4) causes the second first prize port switch to be turned on in the same manner as when the first prize port switch is turned on. A lottery of one special symbol is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  Here, the first winning port 64 and the right first winning port 641 are each one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball is won at each prize opening is configured to be the same, but may be different. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the first prize opening 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the right first prize slot 641 is five. Good.

  The right first winning opening 641 is accompanied by an electric accessory 641a. The electric accessory 641a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 641a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the right first winning opening 641. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 641a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the right first winning opening 641.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 641a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and during the time reduction, the time for which the electric accessory 641a is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the right first winning opening 641 when the probability is changing and when the time is shorter than normal.

  Here, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the first right winning port 641, and the ball is in a state where the ball can be always won. On the other hand, the right first winning opening 641 is provided with an electric accessory 641a. During normal times (when the time is not short), it is difficult to open the electric accessory 641a, and a game ball enters the right first winning opening 641. It is in a difficult state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winning combination 641a associated with the right first winning opening 641 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the right first winning opening 641, so the first winning opening without the electric winning combination To 64, the ball is fired so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lottery win lottery opportunity is obtained by winning the first winning opening 64, It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the shortage of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 641a associated with the first right winning port 641 is easily opened, and the right first winning port 641 is likely to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the first right winning opening 641 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 and the electric accessory. It is advantageous for the player to open the 641a and obtain a lot of jackpot lottery opportunities by winning the right first winning opening 641 so as to aim for winning.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Next, in the game area above the right side of the game area and above the through gate 67 and the right first winning opening 641, a sphere is placed on the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the right first winning opening 641. An operation port 670 is disposed at a position where a game ball launched so as to pass (so-called “right-handed”) can enter. The details will be described with reference to FIG. 3, but when a game ball enters the operation port 670, the non-electric accessory 640 a provided along with the second winning port 640 is opened (second state). The winning ball 640 is changed to a state in which a game ball can be entered.

  In addition, on the upper side of the operation port 670, a rotating tool 680 composed of a rotating body 681 and a case member 682 is disposed. The rotating body 681 is pivotally supported by the case member 682 so as to be rotatable, and the case member 682 having an opening through which one game ball can pass at two positions on the outer periphery of the rotating body 681 is a game. It is arranged by being screwed to the board. The operation opening 670 described above is disposed below the lower opening 682b, which is an opening on the lower side of the case member 682, and the game ball flowing down from the lower opening 682b of the case member 682 is the operation opening 670. To enter.

  The rotating body 681 has a circular outer shape and has a thickness equivalent to one game ball. Around the periphery, one recess 681a into which one game ball can enter is formed, and a rotation motor 681a (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 13 makes one rotation 5 seconds in the right direction (clockwise). It is always rotated at a rotational speed of. Therefore, when a game ball enters the upper opening 682a that is the upper opening of the case member 682, if the recess 681a of the rotating body 681 is positioned on the upper side (below the upper opening 682a), A game ball enters the recess 681a. Then, when the rotating body 681 rotates and the concave portion 681a into which the game ball enters is rotated downward (above the lower opening 682b), the game ball is moved from the lower opening 682b to the outside of the case member 682. And then enters a working port 670 disposed immediately below.

  On the other hand, when a game ball enters the upper opening 682a of the case member 682, if the recess 681a of the rotating body 681 is positioned at a position other than the upper side, the game ball enters the inside of the case member 682. I can't. Here, the gap between the case member 682 and the rotating body 681 is very narrow (1 mm in this embodiment), and a part of the outer shape of the rotating body 681 that is not the recess 681a protrudes from the upper opening 682a of the case member 682. It is configured as follows. The case member 682 is formed with a very small thickness (1 mm in this embodiment) with respect to the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, at the right end of the upper opening 682a of the case member 682, a wall portion having a diameter (11 mm) equivalent to one game ball is provided in the vertical direction. As a result, when the recess 681a of the rotating body 681 is located at a position other than the upper side, the game ball that could not enter the inside of the case member 682 is transferred from the upper portion of the rotating body 681 to the rotating body 681. It flows down to the lower left along the outline. Then, after overcoming the thickness (1 mm) of the case member 682 provided on the outer periphery of the rotating body 681, it flows down to the lower game area where the through gate 67 and the right first winning port 641 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, when the nail on the through gate 67 is adjusted so that it does not easily flow down to the through gate 67, the game ball easily flows down to the rotating accessory 680. However, the through gate 67 is provided in the game area in the lower left of the rotating combination 680, which is a gaming area in which game balls that have not entered the inside of the rotating combination 680 flow down. Therefore, even if it is adjusted that it is difficult for the game ball to flow down to the through gate 67, the game ball that does not flow down to the through gate 67 but flows down to the rotating accessory 680 then flows down to the through gate 67. . As a result, the adjustment that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the through gate 67 can be made difficult, and the adjustment that is disadvantageous to the player can be suppressed.

  Thus, in the rotating combination 680, only one ball enters the concave portion 681a of the rotating body 681 every 5 seconds, and enters the operation port 670. As a result, game balls excessively enter the operation opening 670, and it becomes difficult for the game balls to enter the right first winning opening 641 and the specific winning opening 65a provided below the operation opening 670. Can be suppressed.

  Note that the rotational speed of the rotating body 681 in the rotating member 680 is not limited to the above-described one, and it may be possible to enter one ball every 10 seconds, or enter one ball every 3 seconds. It may be possible to make a ball. Further, the rotational speed of the rotating body 681 may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is not a right-handed gaming state, the rotational speed of the rotating body 681 is slowed (the rotational speed at which one ball can be entered every minute), and the gaming state is a right-handed state. The rotational speed of the rotating body 681 is increased (the rotational speed at which one ball can be entered every 5 seconds). Furthermore, if it is not a specific gaming state, it may be controlled so that the rotating body 681 is not rotated, or the rotating speed is high so that a gaming ball cannot enter the receiving portion 681a of the rotating body 681. You may control to. Thus, if the gaming state is not a specific gaming state (for example, a right-handed gaming state), the gaming ball can enter the receiving portion 681a of the rotating body 681, and the gaming ball cannot enter the operating port 670. . As a result, even though the gaming state is not a specific gaming state (for example, a right-handed gaming state), the gaming ball enters the operation port 670 and tries to enter the second winning port 640. Cheating can be suppressed.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that both the rotary body 681 and the case member 682 for restricting the entrance to the rotary body 681 may rotate. Specifically, when both the recess 681a of the rotating body 681 and the opening of the case member 682 are on the upper side, the game ball can enter the recess 681a of the rotating body 681, and the recess of the rotating body 681 When both the opening 681a and the opening of the case member 682 are on the lower side, the game ball in the recess 681a can flow down to the operation port 670. By making the rotational speeds of the rotating body 651 and the case member 682 different, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the timing at which the game ball enters the recess 681a of the rotating body 681. As a result, an illegal act of intentionally causing the game ball to enter the operation port 670 and then entering the second winning port 640 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rotating combination 680 is provided in order to suppress the entry into the operation port 670. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other operations are provided to the operation port 670. It is possible to prevent an excessive amount of game balls from entering. For example, you may make it provide the accessory formed with the bell-shaped board | plate material which slides to the position which protrudes in the upper part of the action | operation opening | mouth 670, and a position buried, and distributes the game ball which entered into the right-and-left or the front-back direction. One of the distribution destinations of the distribution device may be the operation port 670. Further, an electric combination may be provided at the operation port 670, and the electric combination may be operated (variable) to switch between a state where the game ball is easy to enter and a state where it is difficult to enter. Further, this electric accessory may be opened and closed by a lottery result based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 67. Furthermore, an interval of a certain period may be required so that the electric accessory can be operated (variable). Specifically, it is only necessary to enable (variable) the electric combination based on the lottery result executed based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 67 and to increase the time required for the lottery. Thereby, it can suppress that it enters into the operation port 670 excessively. In addition, by suppressing entry into the operation port 670, entry into the second winning opening 640 can be suppressed, and fluctuations based on the first special symbol are excessively skipped (shortened). It can suppress that gambling is too high.

  A second winning port 640 is provided at the upper right side of the game board 13 and further above the operation port 670 and the rotating accessory 680. The second winning port 640 is a winning port through which one ball is paid out as a winning ball when a ball wins. As described above, the position where the second winning opening 640 is provided is configured to easily win a prize by firing a game ball using the skip switch 51c. That is, the player can easily (intentionally) win the second prize opening 640 intentionally. Therefore, the number of winning balls to be paid out based on winning in the second winning opening 640 is set to be smaller than that of the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641. Thereby, even when the player is deliberate to play a game so that the player can intentionally win the game ball only at the second winning port 640, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game store side is greatly damaged.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the winning of the second prize opening 640 is one, whereas in order to enter a game ball into the second prize opening 640, more than one game ball is required. Necessary. Specifically, in order to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 640, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the operation port 670 and to open the non-electrically-powered object 640a. Game balls are required. As a result, the number of game balls required to win a prize to the second prize opening 640 increases with respect to the prize balls paid out based on the winning of the second prize slot 640. Even if the game is fraudulently performed so as to win a prize, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game shop side is greatly damaged. Further, it is possible to weaken the motivation for performing an illegal game such that a player wins a game ball only in the second winning port 640, and the above-described illegal game can be suppressed from being executed.

  When a game ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the second special symbol is drawn in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) due to the second prize opening switch being turned on, a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown in the first symbol display device 37B. . Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed even while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. Then, during the change of the first special symbol, when the result of the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of being a big hit or a small hit, the change display of the first special symbol being changed is forcibly changed. Stopped (hereinafter referred to as forced stop). Therefore, the game ball fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed enters the second winning port 640 that executes the lottery of the second special symbol, so that when the player presses the skip switch 51c, It is possible to forcibly stop, that is, skip (hereinafter referred to as “skip”) the display of fluctuation of one special symbol in the middle of the fluctuation time.

  In the present embodiment, during the change of the first special symbol, when the result of the change display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of being a big hit or small hit, the change of the first special symbol being changed Although the display is forcibly stopped, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the variable display in which the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win is started (or after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display is started), the variable display of the first special symbol being changed is displayed. You may comprise so that it may be forcibly stopped. Thereby, the timing at which the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped can be advanced, and an impression that the variation display is skipped can be given to the player more strongly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the change display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of being a big hit or a small hit during the change of the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol being changed Although the display is forcibly stopped and the lottery result based on the forcibly stopped change is invalidated, the present invention is not limited to this. If the result of the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner that results in a big or small win during the change of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol that is changing is temporarily stopped, The variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped may be resumed after the big hit game or the small hit game of the second special symbol is finished. Thereby, when the lottery result based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is a lottery result advantageous to the player, the lottery result is invalidated and prevented from being disadvantageous to the player. it can.

  The second prize opening 640 is provided with a non-electrical accessory 640a (see FIGS. 3A and 3B). This non-electrical accessory 640a has a closed state (see FIG. 3A) in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the second winning port 640, and a game ball can enter the second winning port 640. It is mechanically actuated (variable) to an open state (see FIG. 3B). Specifically, the non-electrical accessory 640a is disposed at the left end of the second prize opening 640 and is maintained in a standing state (see FIG. 3A), and the lower end of the non-electrical accessory 640a. It is mechanically actuated (variable) to an open state (FIG. 3 (b)) maintained at a position rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the pivot shaft 640b (see FIG. 3). .

  This non-electrical accessory 640a is activated (variable) by opening one game ball into the operation port 670, and closed when one game ball enters the second winning port 640. Is activated (variable).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 3, a structure in which the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is actuated (variable) based on the ball entering the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 is described. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of the back of the gaming board 13 where the operation port 670 and the second winning port 640 are disposed as seen through from the front. FIG. 3A illustrates a state in which the non-electric actor 640a is activated (variable) in the closed state, and FIG. 3B illustrates that the non-electric actor 640a is activated (variable) in the open state. The state is shown. The non-electric accessory 640a is activated (variable) based on the game ball entering the operation port 670 and is activated based on the game ball entering the second winning port 640. (Variable).

  As shown in FIG. 3, an opening / closing switching member 902 for opening / closing the non-electric accessory 640 a is disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and when the opening / closing switching member 902 is rotated, The non-electric accessory 640a is actuated (variable) between a closed state and an open state. The opening / closing switching member 902 has a thin rectangular shape, and a rotation shaft 902a that is pivotally supported by a base body disposed on the back side of the opening / closing switching member 902 (not shown) is formed.

  The opening / closing switching member 902 enters the operation port 670 and the first channel switching member 900f that is rotatably provided in the first discharge channel 900 through which the game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 flows down. A second flow path switching member 901f rotatably provided in the second discharge flow path 901 where the game ball flows down is connected via a first connection member 903 and a second connection member 904, respectively.

  The opening / closing switching member 902 and the first connecting portion 903 are fixed so that the upper portion of the opening / closing switching member 902 (above the rotating shaft 902a) and one end side of the first connecting portion 903 are rotatable. And the 1st connection part 903 and the 1st flow path switching member 903 are fixing so that the other end part of the 1st connection part 903 and the one end side of the 1st flow path switching member 900f can rotate.

  Here, the first flow path switching member 900f is formed in a dogleg shape, and a center portion (rotating shaft 900f3) is rotatably fixed in the first discharge flow path 901. Although the detailed configuration of the first flow path switching member 900f will be described later, the first switching member 903 slides rightward when the rotation switching member 902 rotates rightward about the rotation shaft 902a. Thus, the first flow path switching member 900f is also rotated rightward about the rotation shaft 900f3.

  As a result, the first flow path switching member 900f closes the left first discharge flow path 900d, and the game ball is guided to the right first discharge flow path (the state shown in FIG. 3A). As shown in FIG. 3 (b), the first flow path switching member 900f closes the left first discharge flow path 900d and the right first discharge flow path 900c, and the game ball is moved to the first flow path switching member 900f. It is switched so as to guide to the two walls f2. In addition, the first flow path switching member 900f, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 and collides with the second wall portion 900f2 in the state shown in FIG. 3B, By rotating to the left by force (self-weight), the state shown in FIG. In this case, the first flow path switching member 900f slides the first connecting member 903 leftward, thereby rotating the rotation switching member 902 leftward.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 3A, one end of the second connecting member 904 is rotatably connected to the lower side of the rotation shaft 902a of the rotation switching member 902 as described above. In addition, one end of the second flow path switching member 901f (one end of the third wall portion 901f1) is rotatably connected to the other end side of the second connecting member 904. In the state shown in FIG. 3A, the second flow path switching member 901f is configured such that the first flow path switching member 900f closes the left second discharge flow path 901d and the right second discharge flow path 901c. The game ball is arranged (switched) in a state in which the game ball is guided to the wall portion 901f2. In this case, when a game ball enters the operation port 670, the game ball that has entered the fourth wall portion 901f2 collides, and the second flow path switching member 901f moves to the left (by the force (self-weight) of the game ball ( The second connecting member 904 is slid in the left direction, and the rotation switching member 902 is rotated in the right direction (clockwise) in conjunction with the rotation. When the rotation switching member 902 is rotated to the right, the first connecting member 903 is slid to the right, so that the first flow path switching member 900f is rotated to the right as described above, and FIG. It is switched to the state shown in (b). In addition, as described above, when entering the second winning opening 640 in the state shown in FIG. 3B, the first flow path switching member 900f is rotated in the left direction, and the first connecting member 903 is moved. By sliding leftward, the rotation switching member 902 is rotated leftward (counterclockwise), and the second flow path switching member 901f1 is rotated rightward (clockwise), and FIG. Switch to the state shown in.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, when a game ball enters the operation port 670, the game ball wins the second winning port 640 when the second flow path switching member 901f rotates. Then, the first flow path switching member 900f is flowed down (discharged) to the left first discharge flow path 900c without rotating. Here, in the state shown in FIG. 3A, the weight member 640c is stopped (pressed) in a state where the weight member 640c is rotated clockwise (clockwise) at the upper end portion of the rotation switching member 902. Although the details will be described later, the weight member 640c and the non-electrically-powered object 640a configured in a blade shape are fixed, and are fixed to the rotating shaft 640b so as to rotate together. When the rotation switching member 902 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) as shown in FIG. 3B, the contact between the weight member 640c and the rotation switching member 902 is released, and the weight member The counterweight is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) by the own weight of 640c, and the non-electric accessory 640a is also rotated counterclockwise. In this case, the weight member 640c is rotated to a position facing vertically downward and stopped. Thereby, the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is changed to an open state in which it is easy to win the game ball to the second winning opening 640a.

  Thus, when the first flow path switching member 900f is rotated, the open / close switching member 902 connected to the first flow path switching member 900f via the first connection member 903 is moved to the left (counterclockwise). Is rotated. As a result, the non-electric accessory 640a is closed (see FIG. 3A).

  On the other hand, the second flow path switching member 901f is rotated by the game ball that has entered the operation port 670. When the second flow path switching member 901f is rotated, the open / close switching member 902 connected to the second flow path switching member via the second connecting member 904 is rotated rightward (clockwise). . As a result, the non-electric accessory 640a is opened (see FIG. 3B).

  Specifically, first, a structure in which the opening / closing of the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is mechanically actuated (variable) by the rotation of the opening / closing switching member 902 will be described. Thereafter, a structure in which the opening / closing switching member 902 is rotated based on the ball entering the second winning port 640 or the operation port 670 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3 (a), a rotating shaft 640b rotatably connected to a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing is connected to the lower end portion of the non-electrically-powered object 640a. The upper end portion of the weight member 640c is connected to the rotary shaft 640b on the back side of the first discharge channel on the back side of the base plate 60 and the game balls that have entered the second winning port 640 flow down. The weight member 640c is connected so as to be in a position rotated 60 degrees clockwise around the upper end portion of the weight member 640c when the non-electrically acting object 640a is oriented in the vertical direction, and is not connected to the weight member 640c. The relative position with respect to the electric accessory 640a is fixed so as not to change.

  Below the weight member 640c, an open / close switching member 902 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape is pivotable about the rotation shaft 902a at the center portion, and the upper end portion is pivoted to a position where it can come into contact with the weight member 640c. It is supported. The open / close switching member 902 is pivotally supported so that the longest side is in the vertical direction. The first connecting member 903 is above the rotating shaft 902a, and the second connecting member 904 is below the rotating shaft 902a. Each is connected from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Although details will be described later, the first connecting member 903 and the second connecting member 904 are movable by a predetermined distance (30 mm) in the left-right direction. Since the movable range of the first connecting member 903 and the second connecting member 904 is limited, the rotation range of the opening / closing switching member 902 is also limited.

  Specifically, the opening / closing switching member 902 is a position rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 902a from the vertical state, and the upper end portion of the opening / closing switching member 902 contacts the weight member 640c and the weight member A position where the opening / closing switching member 902 is rotated 30 degrees clockwise around the rotation shaft 902a from a first position where the 640c is rotated 60 degrees clockwise (see FIG. 3A). In the range up to the second position (see FIG. 3B) that does not contact the weight member 640c, it can rotate.

  Therefore, when the first connecting member 903 is moved leftward and the second connecting member 904 is moved rightward, that is, when the open / close switching member 902 is at the first position (see FIG. 3A). Since the weight member 640c is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees by the opening / closing switching member 902 rotated to the left, the non-electrically acting object 640a connected to the weight member 640c via the rotation shaft 640b is provided. It becomes vertical (closed state).

  On the other hand, when the first connecting member 903 is moved to the right and the second connecting member 904 is moved to the left, that is, when the open / close switching member 902 is in the second position (see FIG. 3B). Is rotated to a position where the open / close switching member 902 is in the right direction and does not contact the weight member 640c. Here, the weight member 640c is formed of metal (aluminum), and has a larger mass than the non-electrically acting member 640a formed of resin, and thus the non-electrically acting member 640a and the weight member 640c are connected by the rotation shaft 640b. The position of the center of gravity in this state is approximately the same position as the center of gravity (center) of the weight member 640c. As a result, when the opening / closing switching member 902 is in the second position (see FIG. 3B), the opening / closing switching member 902 does not contact the weight member 640c, so that the weight member 640c has the weight member 640c vertical. At the position, that is, the position where the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise around the lower end (rotary shaft 640b) (the open state).

  In addition, when the position of the center of gravity in the state where the non-electrical accessory 640a and the weight member 640c are connected by the rotation shaft 640b is not approximately the same position as the center of gravity (center) of the weight member 640c, that is, the weight member 640c is not vertical. When stationary in the direction, the relative position (angle) between the weight member 640c and the non-electrically acting member 640a may be adjusted as appropriate.

  Thus, the open / close switching member 902 rotates between the first position (see FIG. 3A) that contacts the weight member 640c and the second position (see FIG. 3A) that does not contact the weight member 640c. By being moved, the non-electrical accessory 640a is opened and closed.

  Next, a structure for rotating the open / close switching member 902 will be described. The first flow path switching member 900f is connected to the other end of the first connection member 903 connected to the open / close switching member 902, and the second flow path switching member 901f is connected to the other end of the second connection member 904. Is connected.

  First, the open / close switching member 902 is moved to the second position by the game ball that enters the second winning port 640 and flows down the first discharge channel 900 (see a state where the open / close switching member 902 is rotated to the right, see FIG. 3B). Will be described from the first position to the first position (the state rotated to the left, see FIG. 3A). Thereafter, the game ball that enters the operation port 670 and flows down the second discharge channel 901 causes the opening / closing switching member to move from the first position (the state in which the opening / closing switching member is rotated to the left, see FIG. 3A). The case where it is rotated to two positions (the state rotated rightward, see FIG. 3B) will be described.

  The game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 passes through a through hole provided at the mounting position of the second winning port 640 and flows down to the first discharge channel 900 on the back side of the game board 13. The first discharge channel 900 is formed in a substantially U shape so that a game ball can flow inside, and is arranged with the back side of the position where the second winning port 640 is arranged as the upper end. Is done. The first discharge channel is formed in the first guide channel 900a from the upper end, which is the position on the back side of the second winning port 640, to the lower left direction toward the left side of the open / close switching member 902. .

  A first channel switching unit 900b is formed at the lower end of the first guide channel. A first channel switching member 900f is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the game board 13 so as to be rotatable about the rotation shaft 900f3, and is downstream of the first channel switching unit 900b. On the side, a right first discharge channel 900c and a left first discharge channel 900d are formed downward. Although details will be described later, when the first flow path switching member 900 is in the first position (see FIG. 3A), the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 enters the right first discharge flow path 900c. When the first flow path switching member 900d is in the second position (see FIG. 3B), the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 moves the first flow path switching member 900d to the first position. While rotating to the position, it flows down to the left first discharge flow path 900d. The game ball that has flowed down to the right first discharge channel 900c or the left first discharge channel 900d is a channel member for discharging the game ball from the back side of the game board 13 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (island facilities, etc.). It flows down to the collective cage (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 together with the game balls that have entered the other winning holes.

  Here, the first channel switching member 900f that is pivotally supported by the first channel switching unit 900b will be described. The first flow path switching member 900f includes a rectangular parallelepiped first wall portion 900f1 formed with the rotating shaft 900f3 as a lower end, and the first wall portion 900f1 at a position of 100 degrees counterclockwise from the first wall portion 900f1. A second wall portion 900f2 is formed in the same manner, and a housing portion capable of receiving one game ball is formed between the first wall portion 900f1 and the second wall portion 900f2. A right first discharge flow path 900c is formed at the lower right of the first flow path switching member 900f, and is on the left side of the right first discharge flow path 900c with the branch portion 900e interposed therebetween. A left first discharge channel 900d is formed in the lower left of the switching member 900f.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, when the first flow path switching member 900f is located at the first position (a state where the first flow path switching member 900 is rotated to the maximum angle in the left direction), the first flow path switching member. The accommodating portion of 900f is directed downward to the left and does not face the first guide channel 900a. In this case, in the first flow path switching member 900f, the second wall portion 900f2 on the left side of the housing portion is in contact with the branch portion 900e, and is not further rotated leftward (counterclockwise). The left first discharge channel 900d is blocked by the one channel switching member 900f. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path switching unit 900b flows down to the right first discharge flow path 900c without entering the housing portion of the first flow path switching member 900f.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the first flow path switching member 900f is located at the second position (a state where the first flow path switching member 900 is rotated to the maximum angle in the right direction), the first flow path The accommodating portion of the switching member 900f is upward and faces the first guide channel 900a. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path switching unit 900b enters the housing portion of the first flow path switching member 900f and rotates the first flow path switching member 900f to the left (counterclockwise). And flow down to the first right discharge channel 900c. Here, in the present embodiment, when the first flow path switching member 900f is in the second position, the second wall portion 900f3 on the left side of the housing portion is horizontal than the first wall portion 900f1 on the right side of the housing portion. As a result, the weight of the game ball that has entered the housing portion is more applied to the second wall portion 900f3 on the left side of the housing portion, so that the first flow path switching member 900f rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise). Moved.

  In this way, when the first flow path switching member 900f is located at the first position (the state where the first flow path switching member 900 is rotated to the maximum angle in the left direction), the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is Then, it flows down to the right first discharge channel 900c. On the other hand, when the first flow path switching member 900f is positioned at the second position (the state where the first flow path switching member 900 is rotated to the maximum angle in the right direction), the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is The one flow path switching member 900f is rotated to the first position and flows down to the left first discharge flow path 900d. Accordingly, the game balls that have entered the second winning opening 640 flow down to the left first discharge flow path 900d by one ball when the first flow path switching member 900f is at the second position, and the other game balls are moved to the right side. It flows down to 1 discharge flow path 900c.

  Next, the relationship between the first flow path switching member 900f and the open / close switching member 902 will be described. An attachment hole 900f4 is provided at the upper end of the first wall portion 900f1 of the first flow path switching member 900f (on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 900f3), and a connecting member 903 provided on the back surface of the first discharge flow path 900. It is attached. In the first flow path switching unit 900b on the back side of the first flow path switching member 900f, through holes are formed by router processing at locations corresponding to the movable range of the mounting holes 900f4. As a result, the mounting hole 900f4 of the first flow path switching member 900f and the connecting member 903 can be attached across the flow path member of the first discharge flow path 900, and the first state with the connecting member 903 attached. The flow path switching member 900f is rotatable.

  As described above, the connecting member 903 is attached to the upper side of the rotation shaft 902a of the opening / closing switching member 902. Therefore, when the first flow path switching member 900f rotates in the left direction (counterclockwise), the connecting member 903 attached to the mounting hole 900f4 provided in the first wall portion 900f1 of the first flow path switching member 900f. Moves to the left. When the connecting member 903 moves leftward, the opening / closing switching member 902 rotates leftward (counterclockwise) about the rotation shaft 902a and is rotated to the first position.

  As described above, when the opening / closing switching member 902 is in the first position (that is, when the first flow path switching member 900f is in the first position), the opening / closing switching member 902 contacts the weight member 640c, and the weight This is a case where the non-electrically-powered article 640a is closed by moving the member 640c to the left (see FIG. 3A). On the other hand, when the opening / closing switching member 902 is in the second position (that is, when the first flow path switching member 900f is in the second position), the opening / closing switching member 902 does not contact the weight member 640c, and the weight member This is a case where 640c is in the vertical direction and the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in an open state (see FIG. 3B). Therefore, when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the open state (that is, when the first flow path switching member 900f is in the second position), the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, so that the first The flow path switching member 900f is rotated from the second position to the first position, and the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is actuated (variable) from the open state to the closed state. In addition, when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state (that is, when the first flow path switching member 900f is in the first position), even if a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the first Since the flow path switching member 900f remains in the first position, the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is not actuated (variable).

  Next, the open / close switching member is moved from the first position (the state rotated to the left, see FIG. 3A) from the first position by the game ball entering the operation port 670 and flowing down the second discharge channel 901. The case where it is rotated to two positions (the state rotated rightward, see FIG. 3B) will be described.

  The game ball that has entered the operation port 670 flows through the through hole provided at the position where the operation port 670 is attached and flows down to the second discharge channel 901 on the back side of the game board 13. The second discharge channel 901 has the same structure as the first discharge channel 900 described above, but the opening / closing switching member 902 is rotated from the first position (rotated to the left) to the second position (rotated to the right). It is different in that it is configured to be rotated to the state of Since the other points are the same as those of the first discharge channel 900 described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Specifically, in the second discharge channel 901, similarly to the above-described first discharge channel, the first position (to the left) is changed from the second position (the state rotated to the right) by the operation port that has entered the ball. A second flow path switching member 901f that is rotated to a rotated state is provided. The second flow path switching member 901f is connected to the open / close switching member 902 by the second connecting member 904. Unlike the first flow path switching member 900f, the second flow path switching member 901f is located below the rotation shaft 902a of the open / close switching member 902. Connected with. Thus, when the second flow path switching member 901f is in the first position (rotated to the left), the open / close switching member 902 is in the second position, and the second flow path switching member 901f is in the second position (turned to the right). In the moved state), the open / close switching member 902 is in the first position.

  As described above, when the opening / closing switching member 902 is in the second position (that is, when the second flow path switching member 901f is in the first position), the opening / closing switching member 902 does not contact the weight member 640c, This is a case where the weight member 640c is in the vertical direction and the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is opened. On the other hand, when the opening / closing switching member 902 is in the first position (that is, when the second flow path switching member 901f is in the second position), the opening / closing switching member 902 contacts the weight member 640c, and the weight member 640c is left This is a case where the non-electrically-powered article 640a is closed by being moved in the direction (see FIG. 3A).

  Therefore, when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state (that is, when the second flow path switching member 901f is in the second position), the game ball enters the operation port 670, so that the second flow path The switching member 901f is rotated from the second position to the first position, and the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is actuated (variable) from the closed state to the open state. In addition, even when the game ball enters the operation port 670 when the non-electrically-powered article 640a is already open (that is, when the second flow path switching member 901f is at the first position), the second flow Since the path switching member 901f remains in the first position, the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is not actuated (variable).

  As described above, when the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in the closed state, the first flow path switching member 900f is in the first position, and the second flow path switching member 901f is in the second position. On the other hand, when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the open state, the first flow path switching member 900f is in the second position, and the second flow path switching member 901f is in the first position. Here, the first flow path switching member 900f and the second flow path switching member 901f are actuated (variable) when a game ball enters (passes) when in the second position, but are in the first position. In some cases it is not activated (variable). Therefore, when one of the flow path switching members (the first flow path switching member 900f or the second flow path switching member 901f) is operable (variable), the other flow path switching member (the second flow path switching member) 901f or the first flow path switching member 900f) is not activated (variable). Thereby, even when a game ball enters the operating port 670 and the second winning port 640 at the same time, the flow path switching member (the first flow path switching member 900f or the second flow path switching member 901f) can be moved without any trouble ( Variable).

  Here, when the ball is fired toward the first right winning opening 641 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), the game ball enters the operation port 670. Also enters. As described above, based on the game ball entering the operation port 670, the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a provided in association with the second winning port 640 is opened. When the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in the open state, a game ball that has been launched based on the depression of the skip switch 51c can enter the second winning opening 640.

  The non-electrical accessory 640a is maintained in an open state until one game ball enters the second winning opening 640, and operates (variable) when the gaming ball enters the second winning opening 640. Is done. As a result, when the ball is launched so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), the game ball enters the operation port 670 and the non-electrically-powered object 640a is Since the open state is maintained, the game ball that is launched by pressing the skip switch 51c can enter a state where it can enter the second winning opening 640.

  Note that the positions at which the operation port 670 and the rotating accessory 680 described above are disposed are not limited to the right side of the variable display device 80. For example, when the working port 670 and the rotating accessory 680 are provided on the left side of the variable display device 80 and the ball is launched so as to pass the left of the variable display device 80 (so-called “left-handed”), An arrangement in which a game ball can enter the operation port 670 may be adopted. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of stopping (skipping) the change display of the first special symbol even in the left-handed gaming state.

  Further, the operation port 670 and the rotating accessory 680 may be provided below the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 72). Accordingly, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of stopping (skipping) the change display of the first special symbol in both the left-handed gaming state and the right-handed gaming state. Details of the case where the operating port 670 and the rotating accessory 680 are provided below the first winning port 64 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, among the game balls that are launched based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c, the game balls that have not entered the second winning opening 640 enter because the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state. You may provide the rotary accessory 680 and the action port 670 in the position to perform. In addition, a guiding member may be provided so that a game ball that has not entered the second winning port 640 is guided to the rotating accessory 680 and the operating port 670. Accordingly, in order to enter the game ball into the operation port 670, the game ball can be inserted into the operation port 670 by pressing the skip switch 51c without adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. A gaming machine capable of

  Furthermore, in this case, two game balls (or more than two) may be fired consecutively based on pressing of the skip switch 51c. As a result, among the game balls that are continuously fired, the first game ball enters the second prize opening 640, and the non-electrically-powered object 640a is closed. After that, among the game balls continuously fired, the second game ball enters the operation port 670 because the non-electrically-powered object 640a is in the closed state, and again the non-electrically-charged object 640a. Becomes open. Thereby, since the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is always in an open state, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can always allow a game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by pressing the skip switch 51c.

  Examples of a method for causing two (or more) game balls to be fired in succession include the following methods. For example, the structure of the skip switch 51c may be a structure that is in a pressed state in which two (or more) game balls are fired by a single pressing operation. Specifically, a mechanism is provided that attenuates the repulsive force necessary for the skip switch 51c to return from the pressed state to the non-pressed state after the skip switch 51c is pressed. Then, the time required for the skip switch 51c to return from the pressed state to the non-pressed state may be set so that two game balls are fired (or more). Examples of the mechanism for attenuating the reaction force include a damper and a shock absorber in addition to a low repulsion material.

  In addition, when the skip switch 51c is pressed, power for launching two (or more) game balls may be supplied to the ball launch unit 112a. Specifically, a capacitor for storing electric power for launching a game ball to the ball launch unit 112a is provided based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, and two (or more) game balls are launched on the capacitor. What is necessary is just to comprise so that electric power can be stored.

  Furthermore, a firing control device 112 capable of changing the firing intensity of the firing solenoid based on a signal input from the main control device 110 is provided. In the firing control process (S108), the pressing state of the skip switch 51c and the operation handle 51 are set. Based on the operation amount, a signal instructing the launch intensity is transmitted to the launch control device 112. Then, based on pressing of the skip switch 51c, it may be configured to control so that two (or more) game balls are fired at a launch intensity of 100%.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A transparent plastic front cover member 600 is attached to the upper right side of the game board 13 at a position that covers the above-described operation port 670, rotating accessory 680, and second winning port 640. The front cover member 600 is colored in black so that the upper part covering the second winning opening 640 has a low light transmittance and the inside is difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the lower part that covers the rotating accessory 680 and the second prize opening 640 is not colored (colorless and transparent), but has a pattern (mosaic) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside. . As a result, in the game area where the front cover member 600 is attached, the lower part where the rotating combination 680 and the second winning opening 640 are covered is the game area where the game ball flows down to the player. It is possible to make the player recognize that the area where the second winning port 640 that is the upper part is disposed is a region where the game ball does not flow down.

  A return rubber 600a is attached to the left end of the front cover member 600 at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere when the skip switch 51c is not pressed, and fired based on the maximum operation amount of the operation handle 51. The played game ball (that is, the game ball launched at a firing strength of 90%, see the broken line b in FIG. 2) hits the return rubber 600a and is bounced back toward the center while the momentum is attenuated. This allows the player to recognize that the area above the position where the return rubber 600a is attached is not an area where the game ball flows down (game area).

  The front cover member 600 is not limited to the one described above, and the inside of the front cover member 600 may be easily visible, or the front cover member may not be provided. Thereby, since it becomes easy for a player to visually recognize the open / closed state of the non-electrically-powered article 640a and the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 640, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, the game ball launched when the skip switch 51c is pressed (that is, the game ball launched at a firing strength of 90%, see the broken line a in FIG. 2) passes above the return rubber 600a, If the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the open state, the player enters the second winning opening 640. Therefore, a game ball is launched into an area that the player recognizes is not a game area, and enters the second winning opening 640. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the first special symbol is stopped based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first special symbol is determined based on the operation of the skip switch 51c. An impression that the special symbol is stopped can be given.

  The return rubber 600a is attached to the closed non-electrically-powered object 640a with a gap that allows one game ball to flow down, and the non-electrically-charged object 640a is opened to fill the gap. Is activated (variable). Therefore, if the non-electrical accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened, the game ball flowing down the upper side of the return rubber 600a is guided to the second winning opening 640 by the non-electrical accessory 640a. The On the other hand, if the non-electrical accessory 640a is not opened, the game balls flowing down the upper side of the return rubber 600a are prevented from entering the second winning opening 640 by the non-electrical accessory 640a, and the non-electrical accessory 640a. Then, it passes through the gap between the return rubber 600a and flows down to a game area where the lower through gate 67 and the like are disposed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower left side of the first right winning port 641, and a first specific winning port 65 a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery performed due to winning at the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640 becomes a big hit, a predetermined time (variation time) After the elapse of time, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a jackpot stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to win a jackpot Occurrence is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  In addition, when the lottery performed due to winning at the second winning opening 640 becomes a small hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or The first symbol display device 37B is turned on and a stop symbol corresponding to the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the small hit. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a small hit game state in which it is difficult for the ball to win in comparison with the special game state described above. In this small hit game state, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 that is normally closed is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment). In addition, the opening / closing operation is performed twice in the small hit game state, and in this small hit game state, the game ball hardly enters the specific winning opening 65a.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a and a large opening solenoid 65b (not shown) for driving to open and close to the right with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. )). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid 65b is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front side, and an open state in which the ball is likely to win the first specific winning opening 65a is temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of plural (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, For example, it may be below the first winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Out board 66 is provided in game board 13. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 641, 640, 65 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the out opening 66. The out port 66 is disposed below the first winning port 64 and at the lower end of the game area (the lower end of the inner rail 61).

  Therefore, a ball that flows down the game area, does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 641, 640, 65, and reaches the inner rail 61 that is the outer edge of the game area, It flows down along the inclination of 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the out port 66.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 4 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 4, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are diagrams for explaining an effect screen of a press suggestion effect in the pachinko machine 10.

  First, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting on the display screen, and FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first winning port 641 or the right first winning port 641 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the ball enters the ball. The number of held balls is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 is configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  In the present embodiment, the second winning opening 640 is configured not to be held. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is similar to the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 described above. It may be configured to be held up to 4 times. Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  Next, the contents of effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7 schematically illustrate an example of a pressing suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the variation based on the first special symbol is being executed and the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the open state. It is the schematic diagram shown.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of an opening press suggestion effect that is a press suggestion effect displayed when the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in an open state during the variation based on the first special symbol. When the variation based on the first special symbol is executed, the third symbol is variably displayed at the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the variation based on the first special symbol is being executed (displayed), if the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the open state, the push of the skip switch 51c is suggested at the lower right portion of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. An opening press suggestion effect is displayed. Specifically, an image of a button imitating the operation handle 51 and the skip switch 51c having the character “PUSH” at the lower position of the screen is displayed together with the character “battle or skip”. When the variation based on the first special symbol is started, if the non-electrical accessory 640a is already in the open state, the pressing suggestion effect at the time of opening from the time when the variation based on the first special symbol is started. Is displayed.

  If the skip switch 51c is pressed during the display of the opening press suggestion effect and a game ball enters the second winning opening, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. The lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit with a high probability (388/400). When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win, and the variation C (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern based on the lottery result of the small bonus, the skip effect shown in FIG. Is displayed. Specifically, the letters “Skip!” Are displayed below the variable display of the third symbol displayed at the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the variation of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variation of the second special symbol is stopped, and the variation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “Skip!” May be displayed, and the variation of the first special symbol may be stopped and displayed, or the variation of the first special symbol is difficult to view (or cannot be performed). You may change to Thereby, when the character “Skip!” Is displayed, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the change in the first special symbol has been stopped.

  This skip effect is displayed for 2.5 seconds until the change C (0.5 seconds) based on the small hit of the second special symbol is executed and the subsequent small hit game (2.0 seconds) is executed. . The display of the skip effect ends when the small hit game ends and a new change based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is started. As described above, the characters “Skip!” Are displayed at the center of the screen where the player can easily see, and the variable display based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed at the upper right of the screen where the player is difficult to see. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the variation based on the small hit of the second special symbol or the small hit game has been executed. Thus, based on the fact that the skip switch 51c is pressed during the variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol being executed can be skipped and a new variation of the first special symbol can be started. The impression that it is a possible gaming machine can be given.

  Next, referring to FIG. 7A, the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the variation A (30 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern based on the lottery result of the small bonus. The battle effect displayed when) is selected will be described.

  In the battle effect shown in FIG. 7A, the variation display of the third symbol displayed in the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced and displayed in the upper left portion of the screen and stopped. The characters “Battle!” Are displayed, the hero image is displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and the monster image is displayed on the right side of the center of the screen. In addition, a variable display based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, even when a game ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, the battle effect described above is displayed by the pseudo effect change process (FIG. 46). It is configured as follows. This is because if the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, even if the game ball enters the second winning port 640, the skip effect and the battle effect described above are not executed. This is because the player can easily determine that the special symbol variation is a big hit. When the above-described battle effect is displayed by the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 46), when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the battle effect regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. (See FIG. 7A) is displayed, it can be difficult to determine that the variation in the first special symbol is a big hit, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In this battle effect, when the first special symbol is not a big hit and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped based on the winning to the second winning opening 640, the hero is defeated in the battle with the monster after that. A production (out-of-game battle production) is displayed, and the words “Sorry! Then, when the variation of the second special symbol and the small hit game are finished, the display changes to the normal display content, and a new variation of the first special symbol is started. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is a big hit and a battle effect is being executed based on winning the second prize opening 640, then the main character wins the battle with the monster (winning battle effect) Is displayed, and the words “Yeah! Then, when the variation of the first special symbol ends, the game shifts to the jackpot game of the first special symbol.

  A bar-shaped HP gauge is displayed on the upper side of the monster displayed in this battle effect (see FIG. 7A), and the length of this HP gauge indicates the expectation that the hero will win the battle with the monster. It is suggested. Specifically, when the first special symbol is not a big hit and the first special symbol changes based on winning the second prize opening 640, the hero loses the battle with the monster. When an effect to be displayed is displayed, an effect with a long HP gauge is configured to be easily selected. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is a big hit and a battle effect is being executed based on a winning at the second winning port 640, then an effect in which the main character wins the battle with the monster is displayed. In this case, it is easy to select an effect with a short HP gauge. Thereby, when an effect with a short HP gauge is displayed, an effect in which the main character wins a battle with a monster is displayed, and it can be suggested that there is a high possibility of being a big hit. In addition, the aspect which suggests an expectation degree is not restricted to HP gauge, You may make it suggest an expectation degree by another production aspect. For example, the type of the monster that appears may vary depending on the degree of expectation that results in a jackpot, or the type of music that is output may vary depending on the degree of expectation that results in a jackpot.

  The battle effect described above is ended in synchronization with the end of the variation display based on the big hit of the first special symbol or the small hit game of the second special symbol. Specifically, the variation display based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the effect that the hero wins the battle with the monster (winning battle effect) is finished, and the jackpot game is started. In addition, when the small hit game of the second special symbol is finished, the effect that the hero is defeated by the battle with the monster (outward battle effect) is finished, and a new variable display based on the first special symbol is started.

  Here, the effect time of the battle effect will be described. The out-of-game battle effect in this embodiment is a total of 12 seconds including a battle effect period (30 seconds) that is a period for displaying the battle effect and an effect result notification period (2 seconds) that is a period for notifying the result of the battle effect. It is configured to be a production time. This out-of-game battle effect is started when the variation A (30 seconds) based on the small bonus of the second special symbol is started, and the variation A (30 seconds) based on the small bonus of the second special symbol. Is executed, and thereafter, the small hit game (2 seconds) to be executed ends, that is, after 32 seconds have elapsed since the start of the long fluctuation based on the small hit of the second special symbol. Therefore, the end timing of the out-of-game battle effect displayed based on the game ball entering the second winning port 640 can be matched with the end timing of the variable display based on the second special symbol, On the other hand, it is possible to provide a production without a sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, as the hit battle effect in the present embodiment, a resurrection battle effect (direction time: 20 seconds to 30 seconds), a first hit battle effect (effect time: 10 seconds to 20 seconds), and a second hit battle effect ( There are three types of performance time: 5 seconds to 10 seconds). This winning battle effect starts when a game ball enters the second winning port 640 during the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol Any one of the three types of hit battle effects is selected according to the remaining fluctuation time. As a result, during the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, the end timing of the battle effect displayed based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 and the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol The end timing, that is, the start timing of the jackpot game of the first special symbol can be matched, and an effect without a sense of incongruity can be provided to the player.

  When the winning battle effect is executed, the variation of the second special symbol (variation A (30 seconds)) is started based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640. Therefore, since the variation (30 seconds) of the second special symbol is longer than each battle effect described above, the variation of the second special symbol is left at the end of each battle effect. However, in the present embodiment, when the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped, the variation of the second special symbol is configured to be forcibly stopped. Therefore, based on the jackpot of the first special symbol The fluctuation can be matched with the stop timing, that is, the end timing of each battle effect, and the stop timing of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, so that an effect without a sense of incongruity can be provided to the player.

  Further, when the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less, the battle effect described above cannot be executed (displayed) because the remaining variation time (effect time) is short. Therefore, the present embodiment is configured to execute (display) a single notification effect for notifying the jackpot. Thereby, even when the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is short, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, it is not restricted to this, You may make it perform (display) the battle effect mentioned above irrespective of the remaining variation time of a 1st special symbol. For example, a battle effect or the like may be executed (displayed) in accordance with the variation time of the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7 (b), a closing suggestion effect at closing, which is a pressing suggestion effect that is displayed when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state during the fluctuation based on the first special symbol, will be described. . FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating an example of a closing suggestion effect at the time of closing.

  When the variation based on the first special symbol is executed, the third symbol is variably displayed at the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the non-electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the pressing at the time of closing suggesting the pressing of the skip switch 51c at the lower right portion of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern and the value of the effect counter 223e. Suggested effects are displayed.

  Specifically, an image of a button imitating the operation handle 51 and the skip switch 51c having the characters “PUSH” displayed in the lower right portion of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the pressing-down suggestion effect at the time of opening is displayed. At the same time, a gauge is displayed at the top, and further, a text “Comment appears when MAX is reached by long pressing the button” is displayed at the top. The gauge is such that the area to be lit up increases starting from the left end, based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c. When all the areas of the gauge are lit up, that is, when the gauge increases to MAX, a comment is displayed at the bottom of the variation display of the third symbol displayed at the center of the screen. The comment displayed here suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit.

  Thereby, since the privilege that the comment indicating the expectation level that is a big hit is displayed based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c is given, it is possible to prompt the player to press the skip switch 51c. In addition, when the skip switch 51c is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls (that is, game value) are consumed, but a comment that indicates an expectation level that is a big hit instead of the consumed game value is displayed. Since the privilege of giving is given, the disadvantage of the player can be reduced.

  As described above, when the first special symbol is a big hit and the remaining variation time of the variation based on the first special symbol is short (less than 5 seconds), the game ball is sent to the second winning opening 640. When entering the ball, a one-shot announcement effect is displayed. This is because, when the remaining variation time based on the first special symbol is short (5 seconds or less), when the battle effect is displayed, the first special symbol is displayed even though the battle effect is being displayed. The fluctuation based on the game ends and the jackpot game is started, which causes a problem that the player is confused.

  Therefore, in the state where the remaining variation time of the variation based on the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less, the display mode of the opening press suggestion effect may be changed. As a result, when the opening pressing suggestion effect is displayed, an effect (one-shot notification effect) different from the effect (battle effect or the like) displayed based on the entrance to the second winning opening 640 is executed. Can be recognized by the player. Note that the change timing of this push suggestion effect is not limited to the above-described one (the remaining variation time of the variation based on the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less). For example, the remaining variation time of the variation based on the first special symbol is 10 It may be less than 2 seconds, or less than 3 seconds. Furthermore, the display timing of the press suggestion effect may be varied according to the expectation that the fluctuation based on the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is a big hit, a predetermined counter value, and the like.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above, and when the game ball enters the second winning port 640 in a state where the remaining variation time of the variation based on the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less, any effect change is performed. It may be left as it is. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that a game ball has not entered the second prize opening 640 or that the lottery result based on the prize winning to the second prize opening 640 has been lost. By doing so, an unexpectedness can be given to a player and an interest can be improved.

  The button images (button images simulating the operation handle 51 and the skip switch 51c) displayed in the opening pressing suggestion effect and the closing press suggestion effect in the present embodiment are effects suggesting pressing of the frame button 22. The image is different from the button image used (columnar button image). Thereby, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player which button to press, and an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

  In addition, the image of the button displayed in the opening suggestion effect at the time of opening and the suggestion effect at the time of closing is not limited to this. ). This makes it easier for the player to understand that the skip switch 51c has been pressed.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described skip effect and battle effect are configured to be displayed when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, it may be displayed when the skip switch 51c is pressed. Thereby, the impression that the skip effect is displayed by pressing the skip switch 51c can be strengthened. Further, during the period from when the skip switch 51c is pressed until the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, an effect different from the skip effect or the battle effect may be separately performed. Thereby, the display of the effect (skip effect or the like) displayed based on the press of the skip switch 51c, and the entry or entry of the game ball fired based on the press of the skip switch 51c into the second winning opening 640 Inconsistency with the lottery result based on can be suppressed.

  Moreover, you may change the probability that the press suggestion effect mentioned above (the press suggestion effect at the time of opening, the press suggestion effect at the time of closing) is displayed according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is large, the press suggestion effect is easily displayed, and when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the press suggestion effect is hardly displayed. . Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to easily skip the fluctuation of the first special symbol by displaying the press suggestion effect, and to prevent the incoming ball from overflowing. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is small, the press suggestion effect is not displayed, so that the variation of the first special symbol is not skipped, so the reserved ball is consumed quickly and the time when the variation display is not performed increases. Inconvenience can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, you may change the content of the press suggestion effect according to the number of reserved balls of a 1st special symbol. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is large, an effect that strongly urges the user to press the skip switch 51c (for example, “press the skip switch!”) Is displayed, and the first special symbol is reserved. When the number of balls is small, an effect (for example, “may I press the skip switch?”) That promptly presses the skip switch 51c may be displayed. As a result, when the number of held balls is large, a press suggesting effect that strongly presses the skip switch 51c is displayed, thereby making it easy to skip the fluctuation of the first special symbol and suppressing the overflow of the incoming ball. it can. On the other hand, when the number of held balls is small, a press suggestion effect that weakly presses the skip switch 51c is displayed, and a press suggestion effect that strongly presses the skip switch 51c is not displayed, so that the variation of the first special symbol is skipped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time when the reserved ball is digested and the fluctuation display is not performed.

  Further, the above-described opening press suggestion effect and closing press suggestion effect may be executed by prefetching the lottery result of the first special symbol and based on the prefetched result. For example, when it is prefetched that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place, it is easy to display a press suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to skip out-of-range fluctuations, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. Note that the press suggestion effect may be executed based on the prefetched result only in a specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, if it is determined that the third ball of the reserved balls of the first special symbol is a big hit, the skip effect of the first and second reserved balls is continuously displayed (continuous pressing suggestion). An effect of (effect) may be executed (displayed). Specifically, during the change based on the first reserved ball, an effect accompanied by the text “Find the key!” Is displayed and a press suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c is displayed. Then, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters “Obtain a key!” Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the first reserved ball is stopped. Next, during the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball, an effect accompanied by the characters “Open the treasure chest with the obtained key!” And a suggestion effect for pressing the skip switch 51c are displayed. Then, based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters “Treasure box opened!” Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball is stopped. Thereafter, in the variation based on the third reserved ball that is a big hit, an effect accompanied by the characters “Congratulations!

  By executing (displaying) such a continuous pressing suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that is a big hit step by step, so that the interest of the player can be improved. It should be noted that, since the fluctuation based on the big ball holding ball cannot be forcibly stopped, the fluctuation based on the big ball holding ball may not imply pressing the skip switch 51c. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is suggested that the skip switch 51c be pressed during the fluctuation based on the holding ball that is a big hit, and the aspect of the effect is changed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Also good.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct operations to the peripheral control devices (sub control devices) such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 However, such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111 via the connectors 207 and 217 and the sound lamp control device 113 via the connectors 208 and 228, respectively. In addition, the input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 206 including a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a firing control device 112, an external output terminal plate 261, a switch group and a sensor group not shown. ing. A hall computer 262 can be connected to the external output terminal plate 261, and data or the like can be output from the main controller 110 to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball feed solenoid 154 so that the ball is placed on the front surface of the launch solenoid 142 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, and controls the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The firing solenoid 142 is controlled so as to obtain the launching strength of the corresponding ball. The firing solenoid 142 and the ball feed solenoid 154 are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met.

  Specifically, the payout control is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). A firing permission signal SG3 is input from the signal conversion circuit 241 of the substrate 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. When the launch permission signal SG 3 is input to the input / output port 205, the MPU 201 outputs the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β from the input / output port 205 to the launch control device 112. When the firing control signal α is input to the firing control device 112, a voltage is supplied to the firing solenoid 142, and the firing solenoid 142 turns a ball previously disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 to turn the operation handle 51. Fire towards the game area with strength according to the. When the ball feed control signal β is input to the firing control device 112, a voltage is supplied to the ball feed solenoid 154, and the game ball is placed in front of the launch solenoid 142.

  Here, the firing permission signal SG3 will be described. The launch permission signal SG3 is a signal output from the signal conversion circuit 241 in the payout control device 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The signal conversion circuit 241 that outputs the firing permission signal SG3 mainly includes an AND circuit that is a logic circuit. The firing permission signal SG3 is turned on only when the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the stop switch 51b is turned off, and is turned off when any of the sensors does not satisfy the above condition. When the player rotates the operation handle 51 with the intention of launching, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the stop switch 51b is turned off. In a state where the 51 rotation operation is performed, a ball is launched by the firing solenoid 142.

  It should be noted that the firing of the ball of the firing solenoid 142 and the placement of the ball on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 performed by the ball feed solenoid 154 are not simultaneous.

  The launch control device 112 is connected to a skip switch 51c (see FIG. 1). When the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), the rotation operation of the operation handle 51c described above is performed. Regardless of the amount, the firing solenoid 142 is controlled to have a constant launch strength (fire strength = 100%). On the other hand, when the skip switch 51c is off (when the skip switch 51c is not pressed), as described above, the launch strength (launch strength = 0% to 90%) of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51c, and The firing solenoid 142 is controlled so that

  Here, in this embodiment, when the skip switch 51c is off (not pressed), the launching strength of the launching solenoid 142 (launching strength = 0% to 90%) The launch intensity does not reach the 2-winning opening 640 (see the broken line b in FIG. 2). On the other hand, when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), the launching strength (launching strength 100%) of the firing solenoid 142 is the firing strength at which the launched game ball can reach the second winning opening 640. (See the broken line a in FIG. 2). Therefore, when the skip switch 51c is not pressed, the game ball does not enter the second winning port 640, and when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the game ball can enter the second winning port 640. .

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  In the work area of the RAM 213, a total prize ball number memory 213a, an upper command storage buffer 213b, a payout error flag 213c, and a payout permission flag 213d are provided.

  The total prize ball number memory 213a is a memory for storing the total number of unpaid prize balls to be paid out by the payout control device 111. A ball that has been driven into the game area wins one of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, and when this is detected by the main control device 110, a payout of the number of prize balls according to the winning is a prize ball command. The main controller 110 instructs the payout controller 111. In the total prize ball number memory 213a, the number of payout of prize balls designated by the prize ball command is added and stored. If the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a is not 0, the prize ball is paid out, and the value is decremented by 1 every time one prize ball is detected. The payout of prize balls is performed until the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a becomes zero.

  The upper command storage buffer 213b is a buffer for storing an upper command (first byte command) among 2-byte commands output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. The main controller 110 outputs a payout return command, a payout initialization command, and 15 types of prize ball commands to the payout control device 111. These upper commands (99H) are output to the upper command storage buffer 213b. , AAH, F0H to FEH) are stored. The contents of the upper command storage buffer 213b are cleared to 0 when a lower command (second byte command) is input.

  The payout error flag 213c is a flag that is turned on when the payout control device 111 cannot normally input a 2-byte command output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. When the payout error flag 213c is turned on, the character “C” is displayed on the 7-segment LED 121 to notify the occurrence of a command error. The payout error flag 213c once turned on is turned off when a normal command of 2 bytes is input. When the payout error flag 213c is turned off, the error display of the 7 segment LED 121 is also canceled.

  The payout permission flag 213d is a flag for permitting the payout of the winning ball or the loaned ball, and is turned off in the start-up process (S1614 in FIG. 38), while the normal command (payout) output from the main controller 110 is issued. It is turned on when an initialization command, payout power recovery command, prize ball command, etc.) are input. That is, the payout permission flag 213d is a flag for confirming that the main control device 110 is up.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110 is connected to the input / output port 215 via connectors 207 and 217, and a 7-segment LED 121, a payout motor 216, an external output terminal plate 261, and the like are connected to each other. The payout control device 111 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 241. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out is connected. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The 7-segment LED 121 is a display (display means) for notifying the state of the payout control device 111. When the payout control device 111 inputs a command output from the main control device 110, and it is determined that the command is an unspecified command (invalid command), the 7-segment LED 121 causes the character “C” to be displayed. Displayed to notify the occurrence of a command error. In addition, a hall computer 262 can be connected to the external output terminal plate 261, and data or the like can be output from the payout control device 111 to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261. Errors generated in the payout control device 111 can also be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 262.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and the display control device 114. The setting of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 performed in is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110 is connected to the input / output port 225 via connectors 208 and 228, and the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  Further, the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the working port guide channel switch 800. The working port guide channel switch 800 is a switch for detecting a game ball passing between the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a and the return rubber 600a at the left end portion of the front cover member 600 (working port guide channel). . When the non-electrically-powered object 640a is in the closed state, the operation port guide channel has a game ball that is launched based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c (that is, the non-electrically-charged object 640a is in the closed state, Game balls that have not entered the second winning opening 640 flow down. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the working port guide channel is guided to the rotating combination 680 as described above. Therefore, when the operation port guide channel switch 800 is turned on (that is, when the game ball passes through the operation port guide channel), the game ball subsequently enters the rotating accessory 680 and moves to the operation port 670. This is when there is a high possibility that a game ball will enter.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure and the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 having a RAM erase switch 123. ing. The power supply unit 251 supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches, solenoids, motors, etc. 12 volts, logic 5 volts, RAM A backup voltage or the like for backup is generated, and a necessary voltage is supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like using the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 VDC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts, Power failure signal SG1 is output to main controller 110 and payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Accordingly, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit that outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 123 is pressed. When the RAM control signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data (contents of the RAM 203).

  Next, the firing control device 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the launch control device 112. The firing control device 112 includes a voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, an addition voltage adjustment unit 302, an addition circuit unit 303, a voltage supply unit 304, a firing solenoid control unit 305, and a ball feed solenoid control unit 306. Has been.

  The voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is a circuit that divides a DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and includes an operational amplifier OP1 and a variable resistor whose resistance value is variable. And VR2. Here, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 can be adjusted by an operation knob 122a (not shown).

  The positive input terminal (non-inverted input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1, which is the input side of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, has a variable resistor VR1 that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance, or a resistance value. It is configured to be connected to one of the fixed resistors R8. Whether the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 is connected to the variable resistor VR1 or the resistor R8 is determined by the state (ON or OFF) of the skip switch 51c. Specifically, when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), the resistor R8 is connected to the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and when the skip switch 51c is off (not pressed). The variable resistor VR1 is connected to the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1.

  Here, a 5-volt DC power supply DC1 is connected to one end of the variable resistor VR1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR1 is grounded. This is because the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 changes according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR1, and the generated DC voltage ( This is because the signal SA1) is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1.

  On the other hand, a DC power source DC1 of 5 volts is connected to one end of the resistor R8, similarly to the variable resistor VR1 described above, and the other end of the resistor R8 is grounded. Thus, when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), a signal based on the current generated by the DC power source DC1 (5 volts) and the resistor R8 (regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51) ( The signal SA1) can be input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1.

  In the present embodiment, the resistance value of the resistor R8 is smaller than the minimum resistance value of the variable resistor VR1. Thereby, the current generated in the resistor R8 can be larger than the current generated in the variable resistor VR1, and a signal based on the current is input to the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1. Thereby, the firing strength (100%) determined by the signal based on the current generated in the resistor R8 is stronger than the firing strength (0 to 90%) determined by the signal based on the current generated in the variable resistor VR1. Can be fired.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above, and only when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), a voltage (5 volts) may be applied to the resistor R8 and the current value thereof may be measured. Further, when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), the voltage (5 volts) may not be applied to the variable resistor VR1. Thereby, it is possible to save the current (that is, consumed power) generated by the resistor (resistor R8 or variable resistor VR1) that is not input to the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1.

  Next, the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 is short-circuited with the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the output of the operational amplifier OP1 is directly fed back to the negative input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1. Therefore, the operational amplifier OP1 is used as a buffer circuit that outputs a DC voltage input from the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 with an amplification factor of approximately 1.

  One end of the variable resistor VR2 is connected in series to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR2 is grounded. Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SA1) input from the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 with an amplification factor of approximately 1, and the output DC voltage is variable. The voltage is divided by the resistor VR2. The divided DC voltage is input to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303. It should be noted that the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 can be adjusted by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 with the operation knob 122a (not shown).

  Further, by reducing the fluctuation range of the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2, It is possible to adjust the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 and the range width thereof, which are the firing strength with which the ball is driven into the game area. However, since the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 from the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51, the variable resistor VR1. It becomes smaller than the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated at. This reduced voltage can be compensated for by a DC voltage input from the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 described below to the addition circuit unit 303.

  The addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is a circuit that generates a constant DC voltage, a 12-volt DC power supply DC2, a resistor R1 having a fixed resistance value, a variable resistor VR3 having a variable resistance value, a Zener It is constituted by a diode D1 and a capacitor CD1. Here, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 can be adjusted by an operation knob 122b (not shown).

  The other end of the variable resistor VR3 is grounded, and one end of the variable resistor VR3 is connected to the cathode of the Zener diode D1, one end of the capacitor CD1, and one end of the resistor R1. Since the anode of the Zener diode D1 is grounded, the Zener diode D1 and the variable resistor VR3 are connected in parallel. Further, since the other end of the capacitor CD1 is grounded, the capacitor CD1 and the variable resistor VR3 are connected in parallel like the Zener diode D1. Therefore, the capacitor CD1, the Zener diode D1, and the variable resistor VR3 form a parallel circuit. The other end of the resistor R1 is connected to a 12-volt DC power source DC2. The Zener diode D1 is used to stabilize the constant voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 in order to set the DC voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 to a constant value (constant voltage). The resistor R1 is used to limit the current supplied from the 12-volt DC power supply DC2.

  The 12-volt DC voltage supplied from the 12-volt DC power source DC2 is divided by the resistor R1, the parallel circuit of the capacitor CD1, the Zener diode D1, and the variable resistor VR3. The constant DC voltage (zener voltage) generated in the Zener diode D1 is also generated in the variable resistor VR3 connected in parallel with the Zener diode D1. Here, by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 with the operation knob 122b (not shown), the DC voltage output from the variable resistor VR3 can be adjusted to a voltage equal to or lower than the Zener voltage. Note that the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 is input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303. Here, by inputting the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303, the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area, is changed. Only the range can be adjusted (signal SC1 in FIG. 9). Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 is divided by dividing the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301. Even if the voltage becomes smaller than the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1, this reduced voltage can be compensated by the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3.

  Since the DC voltage supplied from the 12 volt DC power source DC2 is made constant by using the Zener diode D1, the DC voltage supplied from the 12 volt DC power source DC2 becomes unstable, and the DC voltage is Even when it changes, the DC voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 becomes a stable constant value (constant voltage). Therefore, a stable constant voltage is generated also in the variable resistor VR3 connected in parallel to the Zener diode D1, so that the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 also becomes a stable constant voltage.

  The addition circuit unit 303 adds (adds) the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. And a circuit for outputting, and is configured by resistors R2, R3, R4, R5 having fixed resistance values and an operational amplifier OP2.

  The variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is connected to one end of the resistor R2, and the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302 is connected to one end of the resistor R3. Here, the resistance values of the resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 are all the same, and the other end of the resistor R2 and the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 are connected to the other end of the resistor R3. ing. The negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 is connected to one end of the resistor R4 and one end of the resistor R5. The other end of the resistor R4 is the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 and the other end of the resistor R5. Is grounded.

  Therefore, the circuit composed of the resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 and the operational amplifier OP2 receives a DC voltage (signal SB1) input from one end of the resistor R2 (generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301). And a DC voltage input from one end of the resistor R3 (generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the added voltage adjusting unit 302) is added (added) to function as an adder circuit that outputs from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2. To do. The DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304.

  The voltage supply unit 304 is a circuit that supplies a voltage to the firing solenoid 142, and includes an operational amplifier OP3, a low-pass filter F1, a DC-DC converter CV1 that is a booster, a DC power source DC3 that supplies a DC voltage of 32 volts, And a capacitor CD2. Since the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 and the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 are short-circuited, the operational amplifier OP3 functions as a buffer amplifier. The positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 is connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303. Therefore, the DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303 is input from the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP3, has an amplification factor of approximately 1, and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3.

  The output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 is connected to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F1, and the low-pass filter F1 reduces noise (high-frequency component) superimposed on the DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is connected to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and further, the DC-DC converter CV1 is connected to a DC power supply DC3 that supplies a DC voltage of 32 volts, and the DC A DC voltage of 32 volts is supplied from the power source DC3 to the DC-DC converter CV1. Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SC1) output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is boosted to the DC voltage Ec by the DC-DC converter CV1.

  One end (plus terminal) of the capacitor CD2 is connected to the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the other end of the capacitor CD2 is grounded. Therefore, the boosted DC voltage Ec output from the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1 is applied to the capacitor CD2 when conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1, which will be described later, is interrupted. As a result, a charge obtained by the product of the capacitance of the capacitor CD2 and the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2 is stored in the capacitor CD2. A voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 142 in accordance with the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD2.

  One end of the firing solenoid 142 is connected to the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the drain terminal D of the FET switch SW1 of the firing solenoid control unit 305 is connected to the other end of the firing solenoid 142. . In addition, a diode D2 is connected between one end and the other end of the firing solenoid 142, which is a subsequent stage of the capacitor CD2. The cathode of the diode D2 is connected to one end of the firing solenoid 142, and the anode of the diode D2 is connected to the firing solenoid 142. Connected to the other end. The diode D2 suppresses the back electromotive force (surge voltage) generated after the ball launching operation of the firing solenoid 142.

  The firing solenoid control unit 305 is a circuit for controlling on / off of the firing solenoid 142, and includes a resistor R6 having a fixed resistance value, a low-pass filter F2, a Schmitt trigger inverter IC1, an FET switch SW1, and a 5-volt voltage. It is comprised by DC power supply DC1 which supplies a DC voltage.

  The input terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and one end of the resistor R6 is connected between the input / output port 205 and the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2. The other end of the resistor R6 is connected to the DC power source DC1, and if the input / output port 205 is in an on state (5 volt state), 5 volt is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2, and the input / output port 205 Is in the off state (zero volt state), the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is in the no-input state (zero volt state). Since the input / output port 205 is repeatedly turned on and off, a firing control signal α that is a pulse signal generated when the input / output port 205 is turned on is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2.

  When the firing control signal α is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2, the noise (high-frequency component) superimposed on the firing control signal α is reduced by the low-pass filter F2. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is connected to the input terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1, and the waveform of the firing control signal α input to the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 is shaped and inverted by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1. And is output as the firing control signal γ from the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1.

  The output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 is connected to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1. The drain terminal D of the FET switch SW1 is connected at one end to the other end of the firing solenoid 142 connected to the DC-DC converter CV1 and the anode of the diode D2, and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is grounded. Therefore, when the firing control signal γ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (5 volt state), the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 are brought into conduction, and the firing solenoid 142 is connected to the capacitor CD2. A voltage E1 (maximum value Ec volts) generated by the stored charge is applied. As a result, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 projects, and the ball disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 is fired toward the game area. The voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD2 becomes the maximum value Ec volts at the moment of application, and the voltage value decreases with time.

  On the other hand, when the firing control signal γ is not input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (zero volt state), the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is cut off, and the voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 142. E1 is not applied. Thereby, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 is returned from the protruding state to the initial state by a spring (not shown) provided inside the firing solenoid 142.

  The ball feed solenoid control unit 306 is a circuit for controlling on / off of the ball feed solenoid 154, and includes a resistor R7 having a fixed resistance value, a low-pass filter F3, a Schmitt trigger inverter IC2, an FET switch SW2, and 5 A DC power source DC1 that supplies a DC voltage of volts and a DC power source DC2 that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts are included.

  The input terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and one end of the resistor R7 is connected between the input / output port 205 and the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3. The other end of the resistor R7 is connected to the DC power source DC1. If the input / output port 205 is in an on state (5 volts), 5 volts is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3. Is in an off state (zero volt state), the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is in a no-input state (zero volt state). Since the input / output port 205 is repeatedly turned on and off, the ball feed control signal β, which is a pulse signal generated when the input / output port 205 is turned on, is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3.

  When the ball feed control signal β is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3, the low-pass filter F3 reduces noise (high frequency component) superimposed on the ball feed control signal β. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is connected to the input terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2. The ball feed control signal β input to the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 is shaped by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2, and the waveform is It is inverted and output as a ball feed control signal δ from the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2.

  The output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 is connected to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2. The drain terminal D of the FET switch SW2 is connected to the other end of the ball feed solenoid 154 and the anode of the diode D3. The DC power supply DC2 that supplies the cathode of the diode D3 and a DC voltage of 12 volts to one end of the ball feed solenoid 154 Is connected. The source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is grounded. Therefore, when the ball feed control signal δ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (5 volt state), the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 are brought into conduction, and the ball feed solenoid 154 has a DC power supply. A DC voltage E2 of 12 volts supplied from DC2 is applied. Thereby, the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned on (excited), and the game ball is accommodated in the holder portion 155a (not shown). The diode D3 suppresses a surge voltage generated when the ball feed solenoid 154 is switched from on to off.

  On the other hand, when the ball feed control signal δ is not input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (zero volt state), the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is cut off, and the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned on. Is not applied with the DC voltage E2. As a result, the delivery member 155 rotates downward due to its own weight, and the sphere G1 accommodated in the holder portion 155a (not shown) is delivered downward and disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a sensor (not shown) in addition to those described above. For example, a vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. In the pachinko machine 10, winning at the winning opening becomes an important factor for determining the gaming state, so it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration and prevent intentional winning at the winning opening. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 39). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203h of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with an execution area (for example, a first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c) and a holding area (for example, a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a) corresponding to each special symbol or normal symbol. In each of these areas, various counter values (for example, the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641, the second winning port 640, the through gate 67) are set in accordance with the timing of entering the ball. Each value of first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2 and stop type selection counter C3) is stored.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 39).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 641 or the right first winning port 641. It is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the timing when the ball has won the second winning opening 640, it is stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d of the RAM 203. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by 202a matches, it is determined that the jackpot of each special symbol. The first random number table 202a includes a special symbol for a low probability (a period during which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability that the special symbol is a big hit from the low probability ( Two types of determination values are included for the period in which the special symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in the table in each state is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the timing at which the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, it is stored in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 640.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this control example), and the ball is the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641, or the second winning symbol. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball execution area 203d of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning the mouth 640.

  Here, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, special If the random number is out of the symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d It becomes an aspect.

  In this embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to select various common counter values. However, the first special symbol (first lottery game) and the second special symbol are selected. Set different counters for each symbol (second lottery game), and update them with different values by changing the triggers and initial values of the counters for the first and second special symbols. Of course, the counter value may be configured.

  Thus, by configuring, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity, different counter values can be acquired. The fluctuation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the malfunction that the determination result of the success / failure is synchronized can be suppressed.

  In addition, even if the variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a problem that the selected variation pattern is synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, the data stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM having a small storage area) can be achieved.

  Here, the first per random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0” is the first random number table 202a for the low probability. (See FIG. 12A). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0-9” is a first random number table 202a (FIG. 12 (a) for high probability. ))). Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/40”.

  In addition, the first special symbol is not provided with a random value which is a small hit at both low probability and high probability. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, there are 398 random numbers that are small hits at a low probability, and the random values “1 to 398” are stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A). Yes. Thus, when the second special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 398 while the total number of random number values is 400, so the probability that the second special symbol is a small hit is “398/400”. It becomes. In addition, when the second special symbol has a high probability, there are 388 random numbers that are small hits of the second special symbol, and the random number values “10 to 398” are stored in the first random number table 202a (FIG. 12A). Stored in the reference). Thus, when the second special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 388 in the total number of random number values, so the probability that the second special symbol is small hits is “388/400”. It becomes. In the present embodiment, a single table (first random number table 202a) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of tables (first special symbol table, second special symbol table, low probability) Time, high probability table, etc.), and these may be used as appropriate.

  Note that the probability of winning a jackpot and the probability of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not limited to those described above. For example, a random number value that is a small hit in the first special symbol may be provided (that is, it may be small hit), and a random number that is a small hit in the second special symbol is reduced (for example, It may be reduced to 100).

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is provided in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 12B). As shown in FIG. 12B, in the case of the big hit of the first special symbol, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 49” is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until electric support next time)) ”, and when the random number value is“ 50 to 99 ”, the big hit type is“ big hit B (short-time big hit at 16R (electric support 100 times)) ”.

  On the other hand, the jackpot type of the second special symbol is determined according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 (see S806 in FIG. 30). Specifically, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”, it is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”. If the random number value is “50 to 99”, it becomes “big hit B (short hit big at 16R (electric support 100 times))” (see FIG. 12B).

  In the case of “big hit A (16R probability change big hit (until next time electric support))” or “big hit B (16R short time big hit (electric support 100 times))”, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give game value (game value). Therefore, when the variable display based on “big hit A (16R probability change big hit (until next time electric support))” or “big hit B (16R hour and big big hit (100 times electric support))” is executed, the effect change processing (FIG. 47), a win battle effect for indicating that the player is in an advantageous state (big hit) is displayed (see FIG. 15B).

  In addition, in “big jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot (until next time electric power support))”, since the probability variation gaming state is given after the jackpot game, the battle per probability variation to suggest that the probability variation gaming state is granted The effect is displayed, and in “Big Bonus B (16R short and big jackpot (electric support 100 times))”, the short-time gaming state is given after the big jackpot game, so that it is suggested that it is the big hit that the short-time gaming state is given Time effect per battle is displayed. In the battle effect per chance change and the battle effect per hour, the same effect is displayed in the first half of the effect. As a result, it is determined whether it is a battle effect per chance change (a big hit A (16R probability change big hit (until next time electric power support))) or a short time per battle effect (big hit B (16R time short hit per day (100 times electric support))). It can be made indistinguishable until the second half of the production. As a result, it is possible to keep the player interested in the second half of the battle production, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, an arrangement capable of discriminating between “big hit A (16R probable big hit (until next time electric support))” and “big hit B (short hit at 16R (100 times electric support))” is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is difficult to determine which one of the big hits, “Big Jack A (16R Probable Big Hit (until next time of electric support))” or “Big Hit B (16R short time big hit (100 times of electric support))” ( Or, it may be a production that cannot be performed). This makes it difficult (or not possible) for the player to determine whether the gaming state has changed to the probable gaming state or the short-time gaming state after the jackpot game ends. As a result, the player continues the game with the expectation that the game state may be a probability-changing game state that is more advantageous than the short-time game state, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”, it becomes “big hit C (2R probability variable big hit (until next time electric support))”, and a random value Is “50 to 99”, it becomes “big hit D (short hit big hit at 2R (electric support 100 times))” (see FIG. 12B). In “Big Jack C (2R Probable Big Bonus (until next time electric power support))” or “Big Bonus D (2R Time Short Jackpot (electric support 100 times))”, the promising variable gaming state is given after the big jackpot game, so the gaming state is short time game The promotion rank-up effect is displayed to suggest that it is a big hit that shifts from the state to the probabilistic gaming state, and in “Big Jack B (16R short-time big jackpot (100 times electric support))”, the short-time gaming state after the big jackpot game Since it is given again (added), an additional rank-up effect is displayed to suggest that the short-time gaming state is a big hit that is given again (added) (see FIG. 15B).

  In the promotion rank-up effect and the added rank-up effect, the same effect is displayed in the first half of the effect. As a result, it is ranked whether it is a promotion rank-up production (big hit C (2R probable big hit (until next time support))) or an additional rank up production (hit D (2R short time jackpot (100 times power support)))) It can be made indistinguishable until the second half of the up production. As a result, it is possible to keep the player interested in the second half of the rank-up effect, so that the interest of the player can be improved. Further, by displaying the promotion rank-up effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the subsequent game state becoming a probable game state. Furthermore, by displaying the added rank-up effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the time-short gaming state being given again 100 times.

  In the present embodiment, an arrangement capable of discriminating “big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))” and “big hit D (2R short time big hit (electric support 100 times))” is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is difficult to determine whether the big hit C (2R probable big hit (until next time electric support)) or "big hit D (2R short time big hit (100 times electric support))" Or, it may be a production that cannot be performed). This makes it difficult (or not possible) for the player to determine whether the gaming state has changed to the probable gaming state or the short-time gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. As a result, the player continues the game with the expectation that the game state may be a probability-changing game state that is more advantageous than the short-time game state, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”, it becomes “big hit E (2R probability change time short and big big hit (no electric support))”, When the random value is “50 to 99”, it becomes “big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))” (see FIG. 12B).

  The opening / closing operation of the specific prize opening 65a is repeatedly executed twice (two rounds), but the time for the specific prize opening 65a to be in an open state is short (0.5 seconds), and the player is given a game value (game Value) is not (or is difficult to). Therefore, when a variable display based on “big hit E (2R probability variable time short and short big hit (no electric support))” or “big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))” is executed, a skip effect is displayed. (See FIG. 15B). As a result, it is difficult to recognize that the player has become a “big hit E (2R probability change time short no big hit (no electric support))” or “big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))” (or Not possible). As a result, a promiscuous gaming state is granted after the jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot E (2R probability change time short and no big hit (no electric support)), but the probability change game state is given to the player. Recognition can be difficult (or impossible).

  Here, the “big hit E (2R probability variable time short and short big hit (no electric support))” or “big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))” is the second winning hole 640 in the normal gaming state. This is a case where a game ball enters and hits the jackpot. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that it becomes easy to enter a game ball into the second winning opening 640 (execute a lottery of the second special symbol) by pressing the skip switch 51c. In this case, it can be said that in the lottery of the second special symbol, the state where the jackpot that is advantageous to the player is selected is a very advantageous state for the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, in the lottery of the second special symbol, a gaming value (game value) is not given (or is difficult to do) jackpot ("jackpot E (2R probability change time short and short hit big) (No electric support)) and "big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))") are selected.

  Thereby, the game value (game value) obtained by drawing the second special symbol in the normal game state (pressing the skip switch 51c and causing the game ball to enter the second winning port 640) is obtained. Can be reduced. As a result, a gaming machine that is not too advantageous for the player can be provided.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol was “big hit E (2R probability change time short no big hit (no electric support))” or “big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support))” In this case, a skip effect (see FIG. 6B), which is the same effect as the case where a small hit is made, is displayed (see FIG. 15B).

  As a result, the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes “big hit E (2R probability change time short and no big hit (no electric support))”, and even if the probability change game state is given after the skip effect is displayed, It is possible to determine whether the skip effect has been executed based on the lottery result of E (2R probability change time short and large big hit (no electric support)), big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support)), or small hit Since it cannot (or is difficult), it cannot be determined that the probability variation gaming state has been granted (or is difficult). As a result, in the normal gaming state, the 2nd prize will be awarded in the expectation that the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol will be “Big Jack E (2R Probability Timed Short / No Big Bonus (No Electric Support))”. A game (unauthorized game) to enter the mouth 640 can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is not restricted to what was mentioned above, You may make it not give a probability change game state in the lottery result of a 2nd special symbol. In addition, the probability variation gaming state is not given in the lottery result of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state is imparted in the lottery result of the second special symbol in the short-time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state. May be. In this case, the gaming board 13 is provided with an operating port (so-called V winning port) to which the probability variation gaming state is given based on the passing of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball passes through the operating port (so-called V winning port). What is necessary is just to provide the control member which can be controlled based on the lottery result of a special symbol whether or not to do.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this control example, the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach has occurred, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the RAM 203 is at the timing when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641. Are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and are stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the second winning opening 640.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. The range of random values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99, and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random number range corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is 0 to ensure the time for entering the ball into the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641. A table with a narrow low probability of 79 is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out”. Further, in the low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so that it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641, and the third symbol display device 81 The variable display is easily performed continuously. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from when the variation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, when the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as. Based on the variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 39) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 12 to 14) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. (See FIG. 11A).

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 12 (d), the variation pattern table 202d includes a first special symbol variation pattern table 202d1 that defines the variation based on the ball entering the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641, and A special figure 2 special symbol variation pattern table 202d2 that defines the variation based on the ball entering the second winning port 640 is set.

  First, the details of the first special symbol variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 13A, the first special symbol variation pattern table 202d1 includes the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d1a (see FIG. 13B) and the special figure 1 deviation (normal) variation. At least a pattern table 202d1b (see FIG. 13C) and a variation pattern table 202d1c (see FIG. 13D) for extraordinary figure 1 deviation (probability change) are set. Although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern table or the like in the short-time gaming state is also set.

  First, the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d1a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d1a. The special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d1a is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot variation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, “0-50” for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), “51-179” for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), various special reach (90 seconds). ) Is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set Is selected from the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d1a.

  FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the extraordinary (normal) variation pattern table 202d1b for the special figure 1. The special pattern deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1b is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place is set. When the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  For outreach, “0 to 149” for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and “150 to 197” for various types of superreach (60 seconds). For various types (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state, and based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 A variation pattern is selected from the one-out (normal) variation pattern table 202d1b.

  FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d1c for extraordinary figure 1 deviation (probability variation). This special figure 1 deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d1c is a data table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol to be removed when the game state is the probability variation game state. This special figure 1 deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d1c is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the above-mentioned special figure 1 deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1b.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. , The outreach reach is determined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  Next, the details of the special pattern 2 special symbol variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14 (a), the special figure 2 special symbol variation pattern table 202d2 includes the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202d2a (see FIG. 14 (b)) and the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern. At least a table 202d2b (see FIG. 14C) and a special pattern 2 deviation variation pattern table 202d2c (see FIG. 14D) are set.

  First, the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202d2a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202d2a. The special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202d2a is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win.

  The variation A (30 seconds) is set as the jackpot variation pattern when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. In the probability variation gaming state, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), Variation A (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, a variation B (10 seconds) is set as a variation pattern in the short-time gaming state, and in the short-time gaming state, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), the variation B (10 Second) is selected. Furthermore, a variation C (0.5 seconds) is set as a variation pattern in the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), the variation C (0.5 seconds) is selected.

  Specifically, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, it corresponds to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 and the gaming state. A variation pattern for which a determination value is set is selected from the big hit variation pattern table 202d2a.

  Although details will be described later, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability change gaming state, a probability effect or a time reduction battle effect is executed (see FIG. 15B). Since this probability change or time reduction battle effect is an effect of 30 seconds, the timing at which the variation A (30 seconds) ends can be matched with the timing of the probability change or time reduction battle effect (30 seconds).

  Further, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the short-time gaming state, a promotion or an additional rank-up effect is executed (see FIG. 15B). This promotion or addition rank-up effect is a 12-second effect. If the second special symbol is a jackpot in the short-time gaming state, the jackpot of 2 rounds (jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot (until next time)) or jackpot D (2R hourly jackpot (100 times power support))) The game time of the jackpot game selected is 2 seconds (the opening time of the specific winning opening is 0.5 seconds and the closing time is 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing at which the variation B (10 seconds) ends and the subsequent jackpot game (2 seconds) ends (12 seconds in total) can coincide with the end timing (12 seconds) of the promotion or addition rank-up effect. .

  Further, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, a skip effect is executed (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect is a 2.5 second effect. In the normal gaming state, if the second special symbol is a big hit, two rounds of big hit ("big hit E (2R probability variable time short no big hit (no electric support))" or "big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support) )) ”) Is selected, and the game time of the jackpot game is 2 seconds (the opening time of the specific winning opening is 0.5 seconds and the closing time is 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing at which the variation C (0.5 seconds) ends and the subsequent jackpot game (2 seconds) ends (a total of 2.5 seconds) matches the end timing of the skip effect (2.5 seconds). Can do. As a result, the fact that the jackpot game has been executed can be made difficult (or impossible) to be recognized by the player, and it is difficult to recognize that the lottery result based on the second special symbol is a jackpot (or Can not).

  FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern table 202d2b. The special pattern 2 small hit variation pattern table 202d2b is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the second special symbol is small hit. As a variation pattern for small hits, only variation C (0.5 seconds) is set in any gaming state. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  In the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern table 202d2b, only the variation C (0.5 seconds) is set as the small hit variation pattern, regardless of the gaming state and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (value). Is 0 to 198), the variation C (0.5 seconds) is selected.

  Specifically, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 sets a determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 when selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit. The selected variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table 202d2b for small hits.

  Here, the skip effect is an effect of 2.5 seconds. When the second special symbol is a small hit, a two-round small hit game is executed, and the game time of the small hit game is 2 seconds (the opening time of the specific winning opening is 0.5 seconds and the closing time is 0.5 seconds). Second x 2). Therefore, the timing at which the variation C (0.5 seconds) ends and the subsequent small hit game (2 seconds) ends (a total of 2.5 seconds) matches the end timing of the skip effect (2.5 seconds). be able to.

  FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 202d2c. The special pattern 2 deviation variation pattern table 202d2c is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the second special symbol is unacceptable.

  A variation A (30 seconds) is set as a variation pattern in which the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state, and regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the probability variation gaming state (when the value is 0 to 198), Variation A (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, a variation B (10 seconds) is set as a variation pattern in the short-time gaming state, and in the short-time gaming state, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), the variation B (10 Second) is selected. Furthermore, a variation A (30 seconds) is set as a variation pattern in the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), the variation A (30 Second) is selected.

  Specifically, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of the way, the MPU 201 corresponds to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 and the gaming state. The variation pattern in which the determination value is set is selected from the variation pattern table for deviation 202d2c.

  Although details will be described later, when the second special symbol is lost in the probability variation gaming state, the off battle effect is executed (see FIG. 15B). Since the outlier battle effect is an effect of 30 seconds, the timing at which the variation A (30 seconds) ends can coincide with the end timing of the outlier battle effect (30 seconds).

  In addition, when a variation in losing based on the first special symbol is being executed, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is losing, a losing battle effect is executed. In this case, when the fluctuation of the deviation based on the first special symbol is stopped during the display of the deviation battle effect, the fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the next hold is started in a state where the deviation battle effect is continued. On the other hand, in the case where the deviation variation based on the first special symbol is continuously executed even at the time of the termination of the outlier battle effect, the variation variation display based on the first special symbol is displayed after the termination battle effect is terminated. Will be executed for the remaining time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the outlier battle effect may be extended by the remaining time of the outlier variation display based on the first special symbol, or a separate effect may be performed.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 12C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit when it matches the value of the random number set in the second hit random number table 202c. Further, the second random number table 202c is used for a normal symbol at a low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and at a high probability (ordinary symbol) at which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than the low probability. And the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  There are 24 random numbers that are hit by a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second per random number table 202c for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability of a jackpot of ordinary symbols is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal winning slot 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first right winning opening 641 is opened “only once for 0.2 seconds”. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the right first winning port 641 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second per random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 while the total number of random number values is 240, and thus the probability that the normal symbol jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal winning opening 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first right winning opening 641 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the right first winning opening 641 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the right first winning opening 641. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the right first winning opening 641 is opened “only once per second × 2” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 39).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least the first per-random number table 202a, the first per-type selection table 202b, the second per-random number table 202c, and the variation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 39), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 38) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 37) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, a second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g. Normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, hour / hour counter 203k, probability variation flag 203m, special figure 1 big hit flag 203o, special figure 2 big hit flag 203p, special figure 2 small hit flag 203r, short time flag 203s Other memory areas 203z are included.

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a stores various counter values acquired based on winning in the first winning port 641 or the right first winning port 641 up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). It is a storage area for storing.

  The first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variably displaying, the first special symbol is stored. When various counter values are stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored.

  The second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640. This is a storage area for directly storing various acquired counter values. Therefore, the second special symbol is not put on hold based on the winning.

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d are obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 10) upon detection of the start winning. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), the MPU 201 receives each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer. The value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second winning opening 640, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer and directly stored in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, in order to execute processing such as jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data corresponding to each start winning (stored in the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to one starting winning is used as the first special symbol holding ball. Shift to execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e goes to the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 23) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Are counters that respectively count the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect performed on the first symbol display device 37 (variable display effect performed on the third symbol display device 81). The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 38, S1614). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4. Each time the variable display effect is executed, a special symbol counter corresponding to the executed effect is decremented by one.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is based on the fact that the game ball has won the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641. When the counter value is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reservation ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d, the MPU 201 The data stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d is used as the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 24). In step S206), a lottery lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second change pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g passes the game ball through the normal winning hole 67 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 23) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as “start winning”). The number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the second symbol display device 83) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on Is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the normal winning opening 67. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 38, S1614). Then, every time the winning prize is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 (see S1404 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see S1309 in FIG. 35).

  The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is a storage area for storing the second per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 10) upon detection of the start winning at the normal winning opening 67. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed (starting winning) in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 23), the MPU 201 of the second control random number counter C4 The value is acquired and stored in the second per random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4) can be stored (held) for a maximum of four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data of the holding balls are stored in order from the holding area with the fastest digestion order among the holding areas where the data is vacant in the order of passing to the normal winning opening 67 (start winning prize). The

  Further, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery or the first symbol This is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in the process of setting the display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variable display effect, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold in order to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize (the value of the second random number counter C4) stored in the ball storage area 203h, the data corresponding to one starting prize is shifted to the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i. . Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is a counter area in which the hour / hour count 100 is set after the 16R hour / short hit game is executed. When the number of time reductions is set, the normal symbol lottery is executed based on the second per-random number table for high probability until the time reduction number is set to zero. Further, when the symbol “◯” indicating the winning of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the normal electric accessory 641a is opened for a longer opening time (1 s in this embodiment) than in the normal gaming state. The operation is repeated twice. Hereinafter, this gaming state is referred to as a time-saving gaming state.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is decremented by 1 every time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing display. When the value of the hour / hour counter 203k becomes 0, the normal symbol is changed from the hour / short gaming state. When the second random number table 202c for the low probability of the hit random number counter 202c is set, and the symbol “◯” indicating the normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the release time is 0.2 s. Thus, the blades of the ordinary electric accessory 641a are opened by setting the number of times of opening once.

  The probability variation flag 203m is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is notified that the 16R probability variable jackpot game has been won, and when the 16R probability variable jackpot game is executed, a flag that is set to ON based on the fact that the jackpot game has ended It is. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON and is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol or the second special symbol indicating the jackpot (all types), it is set to OFF, and after the jackpot game, the jackpot game Set to ON according to jackpot type. Specifically, the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot (until next time electric support)), jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot (until next time power support)), jackpot E (2R probability variation with short and no big hit (no power support)) Is set to ON.

  The special figure 1 big hit flag 203o is turned on when it is determined that the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is a win based on winning in the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641. Is a flag set to Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is a win based on winning the second winning slot 640. . Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is a flag indicating that the second special symbol hit determination is determined to be a small hit. This special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is set to ON when the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit in the second special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 30) described later (see FIG. 30). (See S808 in FIG. 30). Then, it is referred to in the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29), and set to OFF at the timing when the small hit game ends in the small hit control process of the main process (see FIG. 39) (see S1705 in FIG. 39). .

  When the above-described special figure 2 big hit flag 203p or special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is on, it is a case where the big special or small hit game of the second special symbol is executed. If it is being executed, the fluctuation is stopped (S706 in FIG. 29). Here, the big hit (or small win) of the first random number table 202a is made so that the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn based on the winning to the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit or small hit with high probability. ) A determination value is set (see FIG. 12A). Thereby, the fluctuation | variation of a 1st special symbol can be stopped based on a game ball having entered into the 2nd prize opening 640. FIG.

  In addition, as described above, it is possible to enter the second winning opening 640 when the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is in an open state. When this non-electrical accessory 640a is in an open state, a push-down suggestion effect (see FIG. 6A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This opening press suggestion effect can prompt the player to press the skip button 51c.

  Further, in the present embodiment, among the game balls that are launched based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c, the game balls that have not entered the second winning opening 640 are placed at positions where the game balls can easily enter. An operating port 670 is provided for operating the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a to an open state based on the sphere. When the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state, a closing suggestion effect (see FIG. 6A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This closing press suggestion effect prompts the player to press the skip button 51c, and prompts the player to fire a game ball to the operation port 670 (that is, to open the non-electrical accessory 640a). Prompt).

  When the skip button 51c is pressed, the game ball fired by the firing control device 112 is fired to the second winning opening 640. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, as described above, the change of the first special symbol is stopped and the skip effect indicating that the change of the first special symbol is skipped (FIG. 6B). )) Or a battle effect (see FIG. 7A). Thereby, an impression can be given to the player as if the effect was changed based on the pressing of the skip button 51c.

  Further, a front cover member 600 that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the inside is disposed on the front side of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the game ball that is launched based on the press of the skip button 51c has entered the second winning opening 640. As a result, based on having won the second prize opening 640, the variation of the first special symbol is stopped, and the skip effect (see FIG. 6B) or the battle effect (see FIG. 7A). In spite of being displayed, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the presentation has been changed based on pressing of the skip button 51c.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the big hit game or the small hit game of the second special symbol is executed (when the big win or the small win is displayed as the lottery result of the second special symbol), the change of the first special symbol The display is forcibly stopped (forced stop). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the lottery result of a normal symbol is a win, the display of the first special symbol may be stopped. Good, if the first special symbol jackpot game or small bonus game is executed (if the first special symbol lottery result is a big winner or small winner), the change display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped (Forced stop) may be configured.

  In addition, during the change of the first special symbol, when the variable display in which the lottery result of the second special symbol is the big hit or the small win is started, the change display of the changing first special symbol is forcibly stopped. You may comprise. Thereby, the timing at which the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped can be advanced, and an impression that the variation display is skipped can be given to the player more strongly.

  Further, a skip effect that gives an impression that the change of the first special symbol is skipped by the effect display without performing the above-described forced stop may be executed (displayed). For example, the variation of the first special symbol may be changed to a mode in which it is difficult to view (or impossible) so that the characters “Skip!” Are displayed. In addition, during the change of the first special symbol, it may be possible only to change the aspect of the effect being displayed based on pressing of the skip switch 51c or entering the second winning opening 640. Thereby, the player can select a favorite effect mode by pressing the skip switch 51, and can improve the interest of the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the small win is not set as the lottery result of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small bonus may be set as the lottery result of the first special symbol. In this case, a special figure 1 small hit flag which is a flag indicating that the first special symbol hit determination is determined to be a small hit is provided, and is set and referred to in the same manner as the special figure 2 small hit flag. do it. Furthermore, the small symbol (or big hit) is not set as the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped only when the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes the big bonus (or small bonus). You may do it.

  In addition, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (or small win), the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is stopped, but the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (or big hit) If this happens, the variable display of the other special symbol may not be stopped. Furthermore, the variable display of the other special symbol may be stopped according to the type of big hit (or small hit).

  The short time flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is a short time gaming state. The short time flag 203s indicates that the gaming state is the short time gaming state when it is on, and indicates that the gaming state is not the short time gaming state when it is off. The time-short flag 203s is determined to be a promising jackpot ending at the start timing of the ending effect by a jackpot control process (see FIG. 40) described later (S1813: Yes in FIG. 40), and the jackpot E (2R probability changing presence). If it is not the ending of the timeless big hit (no electric support) (S1815: No in FIG. 40), it is set to ON, and it is determined that it is an odd end big hit and the end of the timeless big hit (ie, the normal jackpot ending) (S1817 in FIG. 40: No) is set to off.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table 222a and an effect change selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern table 222a is already well known and will be described briefly. However, the sound lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and roughly describes the variation contents indicated by the variation pattern command. More detailed variation contents are determined from the variation pattern table 222a based on (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from the main control device 110, one fluctuation mode is determined from a plurality of types by lottery.

  When the suggestion effect suggesting pressing of the skip switch 51c is displayed during the fluctuation based on the deviation of the first special symbol, the effect change selection table 222b is displayed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 ( That is, this is a table for selecting an effect to be displayed (changed) when a variation based on the second special symbol is executed). This effect change selection table 222b is referred to in an effect change process (see FIG. 47) described later, and an effect is selected according to the lottery result of the second special symbol and the gaming state.

  Here, with reference to FIG.15 (b), the detail of an effect change selection table is demonstrated. When the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, the battle effect per probability variation (30 seconds) is selected, If it is a big hit B (16R short and big hit (electric support 100 times)), a short time per battle effect (30 seconds) is selected, and if it is a "small hit", a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected. "Is selected, the off-battle effect (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, “big hit D (2R short time big hit (electric support 100 times) )) ”,“ Big hit E (2R probability variation time short and big big hit (no electric support)) ”or“ Big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support)) ”(see FIG. 12B).

  In addition, when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit C (2R probable big hit (until next time))”, the probable rank-up effect (12 seconds) is selected. If “Big hit D (2R short time big hit (electric support 100 times))” is selected, the rank-up effect (12 seconds) is selected, and if “Small hit”, the skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected. If it is “out”, the out-ranking effect (12 seconds) is selected. When the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, “big hit B (16R short time big hit (electric support 100 times) )) ”,“ Big hit E (2R probability variation time short and big big hit (no electric support)) ”or“ Big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support)) ”(see FIG. 12B).

  Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit E (2R probability change time short and big big hit (no electric support))”, “big hit F (2R normal big hit (electric support) “None))” or “Small hit”, the skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected, and if “Out”, the miss battle effect (30 seconds) is selected. When the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, “big hit B (16R short time big hit (electric support 100 times) )) ”,“ Big hit C (2R probable big hit (until next time electric support)) ”or“ Big hit D (2R short time big hit (100 times electric support)) ”(see FIG. 12B).

  As described above, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability changing gaming state, a battle effect (30 seconds) per probability change or shorter time is executed (see FIG. 15B). Since the variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14B), the timing when variation A (30 seconds) ends It is possible to match the end timing of the certainty change or the battle effect per short time (30 seconds).

  Further, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state, a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state is variation C (0.5 seconds) (see FIG. 14C), and the gaming time of the small bonus game is 2 seconds. (Open time of specific winning opening 0.5 seconds and closing time 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing at which the variation C (0.5 seconds) ends and the subsequent small hit game (2 seconds) ends (a total of 2.5 seconds) matches the end timing of the skip effect (2.5 seconds). be able to. Since this skip effect is displayed until the end timing of the small hit game, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize that the small hit has occurred and that the small hit game has been executed. The player is given an impression that the change of the first special symbol is stopped by the display of the skip effect and the change based on the hold of the next first special symbol is started (skipped). Can do.

  Further, when the second special symbol is lost in the probability variation gaming state, the off battle effect (30 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is off in the probability variation gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore, the timing at which the variation A (30 seconds) ends can coincide with the timing at which the off-balance battle effect (30 seconds) ends.

  Next, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the short-time gaming state, the promotion or the rank-up effect (12 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a jackpot in the short-time gaming state is the variation B (10 seconds) (see FIG. 14B), and the gaming time of the jackpot game is 2 seconds (specific winning a prize opening) Open time 0.5 seconds and closing time 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing at which the variation B (10 seconds) ends and the subsequent jackpot game (2 seconds) ends (12 seconds in total) can coincide with the end timing (12 seconds) of the promotion or addition rank-up effect. .

  Further, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the short-time gaming state, a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is the same as when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state, and the end timing (2.5 seconds in total) of the small hit game executed in the short-time gaming state. The end timing is the same.

  Further, when the second special symbol is out of play in the short-time gaming state, the out-of-rank rank effect (10 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is out of play in the short-time gaming state is variation B (10 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore, it is possible to match the end timing of the variation B (10 seconds) with the end timing of the off-ranking effect (10 seconds).

  Here, although the promotion time or the rank-up effect (12 seconds) and the off-ranking effect (10 seconds) are different in the production time, the first half of each production is the same production, and the latter half of the production It is an effect that can determine whether the rank-up effect is an promoted rank-up effect, an added rank-up effect, or an outlier rank-up effect when 8 seconds have elapsed since the effect was displayed. Thereby, since interest can be continuously given to the player until the second half of the rank-up effect, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is similar to the case where the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation game state or the short-time game state, and the end timing of the big hit game executed in the normal game state (total 2.5). Second) and the end timing match. As a result, the fact that the jackpot game has been executed can be made difficult (or impossible) to be recognized by the player, and it is difficult to recognize that the lottery result based on the second special symbol is a jackpot (or Can not).

  Also, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the normal gaming state, the skip effect is executed similarly (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is the same as when the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, or when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state. The end timing (2.5 seconds in total) of the small hit game executed in the state coincides with the end timing.

  Furthermore, when the second special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state, the out-of-game battle effect (30 seconds) is executed. The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore. The timing at which the variation A (30 seconds) executed based on the deviation of the second special symbol ends can be matched with the timing at which the off battle effect (30 seconds) ends.

  In addition, when a variation in losing based on the first special symbol is being executed, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is losing, a losing battle effect is executed. In this case, when the fluctuation of the deviation based on the first special symbol is stopped during the display of the deviation battle effect, the fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the next hold is started in a state where the deviation battle effect is continued. On the other hand, in the case where the deviation variation based on the first special symbol is continuously executed even at the time of the termination of the outlier battle effect, the variation variation display based on the first special symbol is displayed after the termination battle effect is terminated. Will be executed for the remaining time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the outlier battle effect may be extended by the remaining time of the outlier variation display based on the first special symbol, or a separate effect may be performed.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, a first variation start flag 223c1, a second variation start flag 223c2, a first stop type selection flag 223d1, a second The stop type selection flag 223d2, the effect counter 223e, the suggestion effect flag 223f, the suggestion effect state storage area 223g, the effect change flag 223h, the pseudo effect change flag 223i, the gauge level 223j, the power-off flag 223y, and the other memory area 223m are provided. It has been.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to each special symbol, and each of these areas is winning information. Each value of each counter C1-C3 is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is a first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) in the same manner as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. It is a counter that displays symbols in a variable display (dynamic display), and counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of a variable display effect held in the main control device 110.

  The first variation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. (FIG. 43, S2102). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S2602).

  The second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when a second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. (FIG. 43, S2106). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S2606).

  The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received (FIG. 43, S2109). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S2610).

  The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received (FIG. 43, S2109). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S2610).

  The effect counter 223e is a loop counter of 0 to 198, and is updated in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed in the V interrupt process (FIG. 112) of the display control device 114. When the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received, the suggestion effect flag for executing the suggestion effect is set to ON based on the value of the effect counter 223e and the variation pattern extracted from the received command. (See S2105 in FIG. 43).

  The power-off flag 223y is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 when the main controller 110 detects power-off, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y is turned on. The power-off process is set (S2017 in FIG. 42). In the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 41), when the power-off flag 223y is on, the RAM work area is cleared and the power-off flag 223y is set to off (FIG. 41). S1910).

  The suggestion effect flag 223f is a flag for determining whether or not to execute (display) various suggestion effects (pressing suggestion effect when closed, pressing suggestion effect when opening). The suggestion effect flag 223f is referred to in an suggestion effect process (FIG. 49) described later, and various suggestion effects are executed (displayed) if turned on, and not executed (displayed) if turned off. The suggestion effect flag 223f is set to ON based on the extracted variation pattern and the effect counter when the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (see S2104 in FIG. 43), and various suggestion effects are executed (displayed). When the fluctuation that is being performed is stopped, it is set to off (see S2118 in FIG. 43). Further, when the effect is changed by a winning effect changing process (FIG. 45) described later, since execution (display) of various suggested effects is ended, the suggested effect flag 223f is set to OFF.

  The suggestion effect state storage area 223g is an area that is set when various suggestion effects are being executed. The suggestion effect storage area 223g is classified into the types of suggestion effects currently being executed (displayed) (press suggestion effect when closed, press suggestion effect when opened). This is the area where the value based is stored. This suggestion effect state storage area 223g is referred to in the suggestion effect process (see FIG. 49) described later, and executes (displays) various suggestion effects (press suggestion effect when closed, press suggestion effect when opened). When the various display suggestion effect commands are set, a value based on the set suggestion effect type (pressing suggestion effect at closing, pressing suggestion effect at opening) is stored.

  The effect change flag 223h is a flag for determining whether or not the effect change process is executed in the variable display being executed. If the effect change flag 223h is on, it indicates that the effect change process has been executed in the variable display, and if it is off, it indicates that the effect change process has not been executed in the variable display being executed. The effect change flag 223h is set to ON when the effect change process (see S2309 in FIG. 45) is executed in the winning effect change process (see FIG. 45). When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command for stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol is received, that is, when the change display whose presentation is changed by the presentation change process (see FIG. 47) is stopped. The change flag 223h is set off.

  Although details will be described later, when the effect change flag 223h is on, that is, when the effect is changed in the variable display during execution, in the effect change process upon winning (see FIG. 45), The change (pseudo effect change process and effect change process) is not executed (see S2306: No in FIG. 45). Thereby, although the effect (battle effect or rank-up effect) changed by the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 46) is being executed (displayed), the effect change process (or the pseudo effect change process is performed again). ) Is executed, and the production can be suppressed from being changed.

  The pseudo effect change flag 223i is a flag for determining whether or not the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 46) is executed in the variable display being executed. If the pseudo effect change flag 223h is on, the pseudo effect change process is executed in the variable display being executed, indicating that the effect has been changed, and if it is off, the pseudo effect change process is executed in the variable display being executed. It is not done and shows that the production has not been changed. The pseudo effect change flag 223i is set to ON when the pseudo effect change process (see S2308 in FIG. 45) is executed in the winning effect change process (see FIG. 45). When the opening command for executing (displaying) the opening effect of the jackpot game is received, that is, the variable display in which the effect is changed by the pseudo effect changing process (see FIG. 47) is stopped, and the jackpot game is started. The pseudo effect change flag 223h is set to OFF.

  Although details will be described later, when the pseudo effect change flag 223i is on, that is, when the effect is changed in the variable display during execution, in the effect change process upon winning (see FIG. 45), (Pseudo effect change process and effect change process) are not executed (see S2306: No in FIG. 45). Thereby, although the effect (battle effect or rank-up effect) changed by the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 46) is being executed (displayed), the pseudo effect change process (or effect change process) is performed again. ) Is executed, and the production can be suppressed from being changed.

  The gauge level 223j is used to determine the mode of the gauge (the width of the area where the gauge is lit and displayed) displayed at the right center of the third symbol display device 81 in the closing press effect (see FIG. 7B). It is an area for storing values. The value of the gauge level 223j is set in the range of 0 to 5000. Specifically, when the gauge level 223j is 0, the area where the gauge is lit and displayed is also 0 (that is, only the gauge frame is displayed and the inside is not lit and displayed). When the gauge level 223j is 2500, the width of the area where the gauge is lit and displayed is half the maximum width, and the area from the left end to the center of the gauge frame is lit and displayed. When the gauge level 223j is 5000, the width of the area where the gauge is lit and displayed is the maximum width, and all areas from the left end to the right end of the gauge frame are lit and displayed. In this way, the width of the area that is lit and displayed starting from the left end of the gauge frame is determined according to the value of the gauge level 223j.

  The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 50) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2801 in FIG. 50) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  Next, the image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 22) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 52B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b, a third symbol area 235d, and a power-on title image area 235f are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first winning port 64 and the right first winning port 641 are displayed. Alternatively, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the second winning opening 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 receives the image data corresponding to the power-on main image, the power-on variation image, and the power-on title image area 235f from the character ROM 234. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer to 235a (see FIG. 65).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 18 shows that the display control device 114 is turned on when the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display controller 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to turn on the main power-on main shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 performs the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 18B is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 18C. The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 19B shows the rear surface A corresponding to “Empty stage”, respectively.

  Among the backs A and B, the back images corresponding to the backs A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage receives only a part of the rear surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ′, and the position from the position a including the initial position is set. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation 22, the initial position of the rear surface B is immediately displayed in the third pattern display by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and the scroll display or color tone should not be changed over time. It is possible to display et al. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the ten main symbols (see FIG. 53) having the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the first symbol display device 37 has started a variation effect after the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640 has been entered. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the changing effect is not immediately started in the three-symbol display device 81.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Next, the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, and another storage area 223z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while if the stop type of the variation effect is a big hit, The stop symbol indicating the jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state from now on and the ball restricting plate 654 of the special winning device 650 that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect informs the player of the end of the special gaming state and informs the player of the game value (ordinary symbol short time period) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or a special symbol that is reserved This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of the normal symbol, the more opportunities for the ball to pass through the through gate 67. Therefore, there are more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and more opportunities to hit the normal symbol. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the right first winning opening 641 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, the right first winning opening 641 is a winning opening from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters the ball, so that the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball moves to the right first. As it becomes easier to enter the winning opening 641, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  In addition, in the ending effect, the player may make a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol held by notifying that any lottery result of the special symbol lots on hold will be a big win of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates either the back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either “city stage” or “empty stage”), or a back surface different from the back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is displayed.

  The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the rear surfaces A and B as the drawing target when the rear surface type is specified to display either the rear surface A or B. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the top address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 20) "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 21 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 21).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 21, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 21, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. The simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2805 in FIG. 50). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 63 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3101 in FIG. 52B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 52B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 52B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 52 (b) S3109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 53 to 59) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3105 in FIG. 52B), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 63B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, describing the contents of image drawing instructions for is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 22) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 52 (b)). ), The pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 60) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 22), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 22, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 52B). The time counter 233h is decremented by 1 each time the display setting process (see) is executed (see S4307 in FIG. 60). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S2802 in FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 64). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 64). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4902 in FIG. 65).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 52B) is executed (see S4902 in FIG. 65).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  In addition, the other storage area 233z has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 53) of the display control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

<Regarding control processing of main controller>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process (FIG. 38) activated upon power-on, a main process (FIG. 39) executed after the startup process, and periodically (2 in this embodiment). There is a timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) that is activated (with a millisecond cycle) and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 37) that is activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The interrupt process (FIG. 23) and the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 37) will be described, and then the startup process (FIG. 38) and the main process (FIG. 39) will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the third symbol variation pattern and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and a through gate accompanying the passage of a ball at the normal winning port (through gate) 67 is executed. A passing process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  The firing control process (S108) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on. In this embodiment, when the skip switch 51c provided on the operation handle 51 is pressed, the resistor used for setting the firing intensity of the firing control device 112 is changed and fired from the firing solenoid 142. The launch intensity of the game ball is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a firing control device 112 that can vary the firing strength of the firing solenoid based on a signal input from the main control device 110 is provided, and in the firing control process (S 108) Based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, a signal instructing the emission intensity may be transmitted to the emission control device 112. Thereby, without providing two types of resistors, as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the firing strength can be changed according to whether or not the skip switch 51c is operated, so that the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the special symbol variation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various determinations and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the variation display determined by predetermined control is performed. In this manner, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled so as to be able to perform variable display at the same time, or are controlled to be stopped and displayed in a display manner indicating the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104), it is first determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). If it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). Details of the first special symbol variation stopping process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in a variable display (S202: No), a first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (S203) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, but if the second special symbol is not hit, the reserved data (various counters) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a. If (value) is stored, jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the reserved data is executed. On the other hand, when the second special symbol is a win, the above-described processing is not executed and the variable display is not started. This is to prevent the player from being confused by the simultaneous occurrence of jackpots in the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) or the first special symbol variation stop process (S204) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). If it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variable display (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed. Details of the second special symbol variation stopping process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in a variable display (S205: No), a second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (S206) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. Similar to the first special symbol variation start process (S203), if the first special symbol variation is not successful, If reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a, jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the reserved data is executed. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is a win, the above-described processing is not executed and the variable display is not started. Further, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small jackpot, the first special symbol variably displayed on the first symbol display device is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation starting process (S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is acquired (S301), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. It is determined whether it is larger (S302).

  In the processing of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S302: No), the reserved ball for which the variation display in the first special symbol is not executed is Since no new change is started, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e ( N1) is subtracted by 1 (S303). Then, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  When the process of S304 is finished, it is determined whether or not a variation based on the big hit or the small win of the second special symbol is being executed (S305). In the process of S305, when it is determined that the variation based on the big hit or the small win of the second special symbol is not being executed (S305: No), the lottery result based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol that starts the variation is determined. The first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306), and the process proceeds to S307. Details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the variation based on the big hit or the small win of the second special symbol is being executed (S305: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as out (S308). ), The off symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device is set (S309), and the process proceeds to S307. By the processing of S308 and S309, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol from being a big hit (or small hit) during the fluctuation in which the second special symbol is a big hit or small hit. As a result, the second special symbol and the first special symbol can be a big hit or a small hit at the same time, so that a problem that the player is confused can be suppressed.

  When the process of S306 or S309 is completed, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting and setting a variation pattern based on the determination result of the first special symbol is executed (S307), and this processing is terminated. Details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In this way, when the variation based on the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed, all the lotteries of the first special symbol that are executed during that time are set as out, and the variation based on the out is executed. become. However, the present invention is not limited to this. While the variation based on the big hit or the small bonus of the second special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in an outlier manner. The lottery result of the first special symbol is You may make it preserve | save (store). Then, the jackpot game or the jackpot game may be started based on a lottery result stored (stored) after the jackpot game or the jackpot game of the second special symbol is finished. Furthermore, when the jackpot game is started based on the lottery result stored (stored) after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is finished, an effect as if the jackpot game is continued is executed. It may be.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 25, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 26, S306), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401), and the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (probability change). It is determined whether or not (S402). Whether or not the gaming state is a high probability gaming state is determined based on whether or not the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203m is on (that is, the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (probability variation)) (S402: Yes), based on the first per-random number table 202a for high probability, It is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is off (that is, the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (not being probability changed)) (S402: No), the first per-random number table 202a for low probability is displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  In the process of S405, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S405). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S405: Yes), the jackpot symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, and the special chart one jackpot The flag 203o is set on (S406). As a result, in the first symbol display device 37, the symbol based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 (for example, “7” if 16R probability variation big hit) is set in the left seven-segment LED of the seven-segment display 37b. The

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is OFF (S405: No), the symbol is removed from the first symbol display device 37 and set (S407). In this embodiment, in the case of detachment, “-” indicating detachment is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed when the variable display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 25, S203), will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307). In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), the variation pattern is changed to each counter based on the result of the success / failure determination based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol retention ball execution area 203c. This is a process for selecting based on a value.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol acquired in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) is a jackpot (S501). . In the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S501: Yes), the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big win is determined from the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (S502). . When the variation pattern is set in the process of S502, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, as the fluctuation pattern for losing, `` completely out '', `` outside normal reach '', `` outside super reach '', and `` outside special reach '' are defined, and as the variation pattern for jackpot, `` per normal reach '', Various types of “per win super reach” and “per hit special reach” are defined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the first special symbol is off (S501: No), the fluctuation pattern at the time of the off is determined (S503). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S502, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  Here, the various types of “win superreach” and “outgoing superreach” include “superreach A”, “superreach B” and other superreach, and are based on the value of the variable type counter CS1. Thus, it is selected in the process of S307. In the present control example, the super reach type (“super reach A”, “super reach B”, etc.) is selected by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The MPU 221 may be selected. Thereby, the processing load of MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced.

  When the process of S502 or the process of S503 is completed, a first change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern determined in the process of S502 or S503 is set (S504). Next, a first stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S502 or S503 is set (S505). The first variation pattern command and the first stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are controlled by the voice lamp control in S1701 of the main process (see FIG. 39). Is transmitted to the device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the first stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S505 ends, the process returns to the first special symbol variation start process.

  By starting the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol together with the setting of the first variation pattern command, the variation time can be measured at the same time as the variation start of the first special symbol. Variation time can be measured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104), will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (S204).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 28, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation time of the second special symbol (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is not the end timing (S601: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is the end timing (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203o is set (S601: Yes). S602). In the process of S602, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203o is set (S602: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set off (S603). Various settings of the jackpot game based on the determined variable stop type are made (S604). Specifically, in the case of jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot (until next time electric support)), jackpot B (short jackpot at 16R (electric support 100 times)), the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to 16 The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 30 s.

  After finishing the process of S604, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is set to stop the fluctuation of the second special symbol (S605), and the fluctuation of the second special symbol of the first special symbol display device 37 is stopped. (S606), and the process proceeds to S609.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203o is off (S602: No), it is determined whether the hour / hour counter 203k is larger than "0" (S607). If it is determined that the hour / hour counter 203k is greater than “0” (S607: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203k is decremented by one (S608). That is, every time the first special symbol is variably displayed once, the hour / hour counter 203k is decremented by one. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / counter counter 203k is a value smaller than 0 (that is, 0) (S607: No), the process of S608 is skipped and the process of S609 is executed.

  In the processing of S609, a first variation stop command is set to instruct the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the variation display of the first special symbol (S609). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating the determined determination result (S610), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S206), the second special symbol has no hold in contrast to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 25, S203) described above. The difference is that the number counter subtraction (S303) and the special symbol holding ball storage area shift process (S304) are unnecessary.

  Specifically, in the second special symbol variation start process (S206), first, it is determined whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d (S701). In the present embodiment, since the second special symbol is not reserved, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d. The variation display based on the stored data is stored until the variation is stopped, and the variation is stopped and erased (see S1013 in FIG. 32). Thus, while the variation based on the second special symbol is being executed, new data is not stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, and the variation based on the second special symbol is stopped. New data can be stored.

  In the process of S701, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d (S701: No), this process is finished as it is because it is not the timing for starting the change of the second special symbol. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S701, when it is determined that there is data in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d (S701: Yes), it is determined whether or not a variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed. A determination is made (S702).

  In the processing of S702, when it is determined that the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is not being executed (S702: No), the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (S703) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection The process (S704) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703) will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, and details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S702, when it is determined that the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed (S702: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is not the jackpot or the jackpot. Therefore, it is set in the same manner as the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 25). Specifically, the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as out (S705), the out symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S706), and the process proceeds to S704. .

  As described above, when the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed, all the lotteries of the second special symbol that are executed during that time are set as missed, and the variation based on the miss is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in an outlier manner, but the lottery result of the second special symbol is saved (stored) ) May be kept. And you may start a jackpot game based on the lottery result preserve | saved (stored) after completion | finish of the jackpot game of a 1st special symbol. Furthermore, when the jackpot game is started based on the lottery result stored (stored) after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is finished, an effect as if the jackpot game is continued is executed. It may be.

  Next, a second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703), which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703).

  The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 30, S703) differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 26, S306) described above in that the lottery result includes a small bonus. Since the other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  In the processing from S801 to S804, the lottery result of the second special symbol is acquired based on the data of the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d, similarly to the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (FIG. 26).

  When the processing of S803 or S804 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S805). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S805: Yes), the jackpot symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, and the special symbol 2 jackpot The flag 203p is set on (S806), and the process returns to the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29). Through the processing of S806, the first symbol display device 37 has a symbol based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 (for example, “7” for 16R probability variation big hit) on the right 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b. Set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S805 that the lottery result is not a big win (S805: No), it is then determined whether or not the lottery result is a small win (S807.) In the process of S807, the lottery is determined. When it is determined that the result is a small hit (S807: Yes), the small special symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device is set based on the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2. The special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is set (S808), and the process returns to the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29).

  In the process of S807, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S807: No), the second special symbol outlier symbol is set in the first symbol display device (S809), and the second special symbol variation start is started. Return to the process (see FIG. 29). In the present embodiment, in the case of detachment, “-” indicating detachment is set to the right 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S206), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 31, S704), the first variation pattern command set in S504 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S307) described above is the second The change is made to the variation pattern command (S904), and the first stop type command set in the process of S505 is changed to the second stop type command (S905). In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol, there may be a small win as the lottery result, so when the lottery result is a small hit (S903: Yes), based on the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern table 202d2b. The variation pattern is determined. Since other parts are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process (S207).

  In the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 32, S207), the variation stop processing (S1005 and S1006) for the second special symbol is performed in contrast to the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 28, S204) described above. The difference is that the start of the small hit is set when the fluctuation based on the small hit is stopped. Since the other parts are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207), first, similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 28), the processes from S1001 to S1006 (the first special symbol change stop process is a process from S601 to S606). Execute. The jackpot type in the second special symbol is different from the jackpot type in the first special symbol, and in the setting of the jackpot start set in the processing of S1004, various jackpot games according to the jackpot type in the second special symbol Setting is made.

  Specifically, in the case of jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot (until next time electric support)), jackpot B (short jackpot at 16R (electric support 100 times)), the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to 16 The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 30 s. On the other hand, jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot (until next time electric support)), jackpot D (2R short-term jackpot (electric support 100 times)), jackpot E (2R probability varying time short and big jackpot (no electric support)), jackpot F (2R In the case of a normal jackpot (no electric support), the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to two, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 0.5 s.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1002 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203p is not set (S1002: No), it is then decided whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is set (S1007). In the process of S1007, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is set (S1007: Yes), the start of the small hit is set (S1008), and the process proceeds to S1009. In the process of S1008, the number of rounds in which the small hit game is executed is set to two, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 0.5 s.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1007, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is not set (S1007: No), the process of S1008 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1009. When the process of S1007 or S1008 is completed, the subtraction process (S1009 and S1010) of the hour / middle counter 203k is executed similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 28), and the process proceeds to S1011.

  In the process of S1011, a second variation stop command is set to instruct the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the variation display of the second special symbol (S1011). The second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating the determined determination result (S1012), and the process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, but one of the first and second special symbols can be executed. When a big hit game occurs, the variable display of the other special symbol is stopped. Thereby, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and can play the game.

  Moreover, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Can do. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  In addition, compared with the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed one by one, the pachinko machine 10 has a variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Even if it is relatively short, either one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a state where the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is easy to be executed, thereby increasing the efficiency of the game. The problem that the state in which the special symbol is not variably displayed becomes long can be suppressed.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 23) and wins the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641, or the second winning port 640 (start winning). This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the values when a start winning is determined.

  When the start winning process (S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 (S1101). Here, a ball entering the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 (S1101: Yes), the value of the abnormal winning counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S1102), and the first special symbol is set. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S1103). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1104).

  If there is no winning at the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 (S1101: No), or even if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641, the first special When the value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S1105: No), the process proceeds to S1108. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 (S1101: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1104: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203e (S1105). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S1106).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 39) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol 1 reserved ball in the RAM 223. Stored in the number counter 203e.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the processing of S1106, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) (S1107). Specifically, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, since the winning information is not held in the second special symbol, in the processing from S1108 to S1112, the addition processing of the holding ball number counter and the setting processing of the holding ball number command are performed with respect to the processing from S1101 to S1107. This is different in that various counter values are stored directly in the holding ball execution area without performing the above. In this embodiment, the winning information is not held in the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined number (for example, four balls) of winning information is reserved as in the first special symbol. May be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, unless the first special symbol is changing, a press suggestion effect that suggests pressing the skip switch 51c so as to cause the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 is not displayed. Therefore, when a game ball frequently enters the second winning port 640 even though the first special symbol is not changing, the game ball is illegally inserted into the second winning port 640. Can be considered. Therefore, although the first special symbol is not changing, the number of game balls entering the second prize opening 640 is counted, and if the number of game balls counted exceeds a predetermined number, error processing is performed. (S1109 and S1114 to S1116).

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the second winning port 640 (whether or not a game ball has entered the second winning port 640) (S1108). In the process of S1108, when it is determined that there is no winning in the second winning opening 640 (S1108: No), the process proceeds to S1113 as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1108 that there is a winning at the second winning port 640 (S1108: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the first special symbol is changing (S1109). If it is determined in the process of S1109 that the first special symbol is not changing (S1109: Yes), the abnormal entrance counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111.

  In the process of S1111, it is determined whether or not there is data in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d (S1111). If it is determined in the processing of S1111 that there is no data in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d (S1111: No), the first random number counter C1, the first per category counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 Each value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d (S1112), and the process proceeds to S1113.

  In the process of S1111, when it is determined that there is data in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d (S1111: Yes), since the variation based on the second special symbol is being executed, the process of S1112 is performed. Skip to step S1113. When it is determined that there is data in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d (S1111: Yes), the processing of S1112 is skipped, so that the winning information is not held in the second special symbol. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1109 that the first special symbol is not changing (S1109: No), a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 even though the first special symbol is not changing. Since it is a ball, 1 is added to the value of the abnormal entrance counter 203t (S1114), and the process proceeds to S1115.

  In the process of S1115. It is determined whether or not the value of the abnormal entrance counter 203t is greater than 3 (S1115). The abnormal entry counter 203t is initialized to 0 when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the change of the first special symbol (S1110). Therefore, even if four or more game balls enter the second winning opening 640 in spite of the fact that the first special symbol has not changed, the value of the abnormal ball counter 203 t becomes larger than three.

  The value of the abnormal winning counter 203t is also initialized to 0 when a gaming ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 (S1102). That is, when the first special symbol fluctuates, the value of the abnormal entrance counter 203t is initialized to 0. As a result, an illegal act of entering the game ball into the second winning port 640 without starting the change of the first special symbol (does not enter the game ball into the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641). It can be detected with high accuracy. For example, when the variation of the first special symbol is started, but the game ball does not enter the second winning opening 640 during the variation of the first special symbol because the timing of pressing the skip switch 51c is bad. In this case, since the value of the abnormal entry counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S1102), it is not determined as an illegal act.

  In the process of S1115, if it is determined that the value of the abnormal pitch counter 203t is greater than 3 (S1115: Yes), the first special symbol does not start to change (the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641). In this case, an illegal command for entering the game ball into the second prize opening 640 is executed, so an error command is set (S1116), and the process proceeds to S1113. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1115 that the value of the abnormal ball counter 203t is 3 or less (S1115: No), the process of S1116 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1113.

  The error command set in the processing of S1116 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 or the like by the external output processing of the main processing described later. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives an error command, it performs error processing corresponding to the command (for example, notification by an error sound, notification by lighting of an LED indicating an error, etc.). An error command may be set in the processing of S1116, and a signal indicating the occurrence of the error may be output to the external output terminal board 261. Thereby, in the hall computer which is detecting the signal of the external output terminal board 261, the occurrence of the error can be detected, and the occurrence of the error can be notified to the hall clerk.

  In the process of S1115, if it is determined that the value of the abnormal entry counter 203t is greater than 3 (S1115: Yes), that is, if it is determined that an illegal game is being executed using the skip switch 51c. The game ball may be prevented from being fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed, or the launch intensity of the game ball that is fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed cannot be reached to the second winning opening 640. It may be changed to strength. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the above-described frauds from being continuously performed, and to suppress a problem that the game shop side is greatly damaged.

  After the processing of S1108, S1111, S1115, S1116 or S1109, prefetch processing is executed (S1113), and this processing is terminated. Details of the prefetch process (S1113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, it is impossible (or difficult) to enter the second winning opening 640 except for the game balls that are launched based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c. Yes. Therefore, when a game ball enters the second winning port 640 even though the skip switch 51c is not pressed, there is a possibility that the game ball is illegally inserted into the second winning port 640. Since it is high, you may make it alert | report the said state. Specifically, a signal indicating the state may be output to the external output terminal board 261 so that it can be detected by the hall computer 262, or an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp that has received the error command is received. An error sound may be output by the control device 113 or an LED indicating an error may be turned on. As a result, an illegal act of causing a game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 can be detected.

  Further, when the suggestion effect (FIG. 6 (a)) indicating that the skip switch 51c is pressed is not displayed, the skip switch 51c is pressed for a predetermined time or more, or the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined number of balls. If the player has entered the ball, it may be determined that an illegal act has occurred and the same processing may be performed. Thereby, it is possible to discriminate and notify the illegal act with higher accuracy. In addition, cheating occurred when the number of game balls entering the second winning port 640 increased relative to the number of game balls entering the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641. Or the number of winning balls to be paid out based on winning in the second winning port 640 with respect to the number of winning balls paid out based on winning in the first winning port 64 or the right first winning port 641 It may be determined that fraud has occurred when the number of errors increases. In these cases, error processing may be performed in the same manner as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the prefetching process (S1113) which is one process in the start winning process (refer to S105 of FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S1113).

  In this prefetching process (S1113), it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64, the right first winning opening 641 or the second winning opening 640 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640 (S1201; No), there is no pre-reading winning, so this process is terminated. .

  On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640 (S1201: Yes), the gaming state at the time when the variation based on the winning is started is definitely changed. It is determined whether or not the game state is set (S1202). In the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of variation is the probability variation gaming state (S1202: Yes), based on the first per-random number table 202a for high probability (see FIG. 12A). The lottery result is acquired (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1205. In the processing of S1203, when there is a new winning at the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641, the lottery result is acquired using the jackpot determination value of the first special symbol. On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the second winning opening 640, the lottery result is acquired using the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value of the second special symbol (see FIG. 12A).

  In the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of variation is not the probability variation gaming state (S1202: No), based on the first per-random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 12A). The lottery result is acquired (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1205. In the process of S1204, as in the process of S1203, when there is a new winning at the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641, there is a new winning at the first special symbol and the second winning opening 640. In such a case, the determination value of the second special symbol is used.

  When the processing of S1203 or S1204 is completed, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processing of S1203 and S1204 is set (S1205), and this processing is terminated. In the prefetch process (S1110), not only in the present embodiment, but also the type of variation pattern to be selected (outreach reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) is discriminated and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a winning information command. May be configured to be notified.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device and the electric motor attached to the right first winning port 641. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 641a.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 35, S106), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S1301). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device is showing a hit, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 641a associated with the right first winning port 641 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S1301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S1302), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S1302: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S1307). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is greater than 0 (S1308), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 0 (S1308: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S1308: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (S1309).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is shifted (S1310). In the process of S1310, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is acquired (S1311).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol (S1312). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S1312: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S1314). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S1314: Yes), the process proceeds to S1313.

  If the special symbol jackpot is not being hit in the processing of S1314 (S1314: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so acquired in the processing of S1311 Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table 202c for high probability (FIG. 12C), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S1315). . Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 12C).

  In the process of S1312, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S1312: No), the process proceeds to S1313. In the process of S1313, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1311 is low. Based on the second random number table 202c for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S1313). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 12C).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S1313 or S1315 is a normal symbol win (S1316). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S1316: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S1318). In the processing of S1318, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “O” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-short state (S1319). If the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-short state (S1319: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit for the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S1321). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S1321: Yes), the process proceeds to S1320. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to prevent the game ball from flowing down below the right first winning port 641 due to excessively winning the ball in the right first winning port 641. Even when the normal symbol is hit, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 641a are set in the same manner as when the normal symbol is lost.

  In the process of S1321, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1321: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the right first winning opening The opening period of the electric accessory 641a accompanying 641 is set to 1 second, and the number of opening is set to 2 (S1322), and the process proceeds to S1323. In the process of S1319, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short time state of the normal symbol (S1319: No), the process proceeds to S1320. In the process of S1320, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 641a associated with the first right winning opening 641 is set. In addition to setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S1320), and the process proceeds to S1323.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1316 that the symbol is out of the normal symbols (S1316: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S1317). In the process of S1317, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S1323.

  In the process of S1323, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S1323). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S1323: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is performed. Is set to 3 seconds (S1324), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S1325: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S1325), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the opening period of the right first winning port 641 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the right first winning port 641.

  In the process of S1302, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S1302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S1303). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S1324 or the processing of S1325 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S1303 (S1303: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S1303 (S1303: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1304). In the processing of S1304, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the processing of S1318, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) in the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S1318, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. (S1318). When the stop display is set by the process of S1317, when the second symbol display update process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 39) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S1318 or S1317.

  Next, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 35, S106) when the fluctuation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started is the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a win (S1305). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S1305: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 641a associated with the first right winning opening 641 is set (S1306), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 641a is set by the process of S1306, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 39) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S1320 or the process of S1322 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S1305, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S1305: No), the process of S1306 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67. In addition, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 36, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (S1401). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (S1401: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired ( S1402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1403).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (S1401: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203g ( If M) is not less than 4 (S1403: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (S1401: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1403: Yes), the normal symbol is reserved. The value (M) of the ball counter 203g is incremented by 1 (S1404). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203. (S1405), and the process is terminated. In the process of S1405, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1612 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1612. Note that the RAM determination value is a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, for example, as will be described later in the processing of S1715 of the main processing (FIG. 39). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1612). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1613, S1614) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1613, S1614) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S1610, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Here, when a special symbol that is fluctuating is stored, a power-on variation image (see FIGS. 18B to 18C) is displayed in a variable manner on the display control device 114 with respect to the sound lamp control device 113. You are instructed to do so. Note that this change instruction may be executed, for example, in the initial setting (S1601) in the start-up process, or may be executed in another process. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1611), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each process of S1701 to S1708 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1710 and S1711 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 39), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 23) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 24) or the start winning process (see FIG. 33) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 38) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1704). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). Details of the jackpot control process (S1704) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the big hit control process (S1704) is finished, the small hit control process (S1705) is then executed. In the small hit control process, similar to the big hit control process (S1704) described above, the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a is controlled, and the corresponding command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the start and end timing of the small hit game. Send. Specifically, in the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 32), when the start of a small hit is set, the number of times the specific winning opening 65a is opened (the number of rounds) is controlled to be 2 times. The opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is controlled to 0.5 s. Further, the interval from when the specific winning opening 65a is closed to when it is opened is also controlled to 0.5 s. When the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is executed, a command indicating that the specific winning opening 65a has changed to an open (or closed) state is transmitted to the audio lamp control apparatus 113, whereby the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is displayed. , It becomes possible to determine the state (open state or closed state) of the specific winning opening 65a.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 641a associated with the first right winning port 641 is executed (S1706). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1306 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 35), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S1322 or the processing of S1320 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 27) or the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 31), the variation is determined according to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the variation pattern set by the process of S307 of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 25) or the process of S704 of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) is used. When the corresponding variation time is over, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 25) of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 25). 27) or the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 31), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S1324 or the processing of S1325 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1304 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 35), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S1317 or the processing of S1318 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 35). To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1709: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1710). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1710: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described processes after S1701 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1710: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1711, S1712).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1711). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1712).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1709, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 37 has been executed, the power-off process after S1713 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1713), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1714). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1715), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1716), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  It should be noted that the processing of S1709 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1708 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1711 and S1712 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1601. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific winning prize ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 40, S1704), it is first determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1801). Specifically, if the process of S604 of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 28) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. If the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1801 (S1801: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is turned off (S1802), an opening command is set (S1803), and this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1801 (S1801: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1804). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1804, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1804: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1804 that the special symbol is a big hit (S1804: Yes), the processing of S1805 is executed. In the process of S1805, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1805). If it is determined in the processing of S1805 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1805: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened (S1806) and newly started. A round number command indicating the number of rounds is set (S1807), and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1805 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1805: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is satisfied. (S1808). If the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1808: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1809), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1808, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1808: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1810). The start timing of the ending effect is determined as the start timing of the ending effect when the final round in each jackpot type ends and the specific winning opening 65a is closed. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1810: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag 203o or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203p is turned off (S1811), and an ending command is set (S1812). And it is discriminate | determined whether it is a probable big hit (S1813). In the process of S1813, if the probability change jackpot (S1813: Yes), the probability change flag 203m is set to ON (S1814), and the process proceeds to S1815.

  In the process of S1815, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot E (short and short jackpot with 2R probability change (no electric support)) (S1815). When it is determined in the processing of S1815 that the jackpot type is not a jackpot E (2R probability change time short / no big hit (no electric support)) (S1815: No), the time flag 203s is turned on to give a short game state. After setting (S1816), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1815 that the big hit type is a big hit E (2R probability change time short / no big hit (no electric support)) (S1815: Yes), the process of S1816 is skipped, that is, the time is short. This processing is terminated without giving a gaming state.

  In the process of S1813, when it is determined that it is not a probable big hit (S1813: No), it is then discriminated whether or not it is a time saving big hit (S1817). In the process of S1817, when it is determined that the time-saving hit is made (S1817: Yes), the time-shortage counter 203k is set to 100 (S1818), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1817 that it is not a time saving big hit (S1817: No), since it is a normal big hit where neither the probability variation gaming state nor the time saving gaming state is given, the time saving flag 203s is set to OFF (S1819). Then, 0 is set in the hour / middle counter 203k (S1820), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 49. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (S2000) that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1901). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S2017 (see FIG. 42) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during the execution (S1902). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 42, S2013), it executes a power-off process in S2017. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2017 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1902: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S2017. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1903).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1906. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1903: Yes), the process proceeds to S1904, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1903: No), the process proceeds to S1908.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1903: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1904. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2017, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1903: No), and the process proceeds to S1908.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1902: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S2017, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1904, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1904, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1904). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1905: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1906). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1905: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1907), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1908, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1908). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S2017 is executed (see S2016 in FIG. 42). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S2017 is executed, the process of S1908 with the power-off flag 223y turned on is the same as the current startup process. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2017 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1908: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1909), the power-off flag 223y is turned off (S1910), and the RAM 223 is set. Is set (S1911), interrupt permission is set (S1912), and the process proceeds to the main process (S2000). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag 223y is turned off, the process of S1908 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, and the process of S1904 to S1906 is performed. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1908: No), S1909 and S1910, which are the work area clear processing of the RAM 223, are skipped, the process proceeds to S1911, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1911).

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1909 is that when the process from S1904 to S1906 is reached via the process in S1906, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1904. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, the main process (S2000) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process (S2000). When the main process (S2000) is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S2000) was started or since the previous process of S2001 was executed ( S2001) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S2001: No), the processing proceeds to S2012 without performing the processing in S2002 to S2011. In the process of S2001, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S2002 to S2011 are processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S2012 and the command determination process of S2013 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2013 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S2013 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2001 (S2001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S2003 to S2013 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S2002). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2008 described later are set (S2003), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2004). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2005 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2005, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold number display update process is executed (S2006). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the hold number display update process (S2006), as will be described in detail later, a process of updating the display of the hold symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2007). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S2008), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S2009). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2009, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2010). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2008 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2009 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S2010, the suggestion effect process for executing the above-mentioned suggestion effect when closing the suggestion effect and the press suggestion effect when opening is executed (S2011), and then the process proceeds to S2012. This suggestion effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S2012, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of the variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the variable display setting process (S2012), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S2013). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S2013 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2014). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2014 (S2014: Yes), both the power interruption flag 223y and the power interruption processing flag 223x are turned on (S2016), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2017). . After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2018), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the processing of S2014 (S2014: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2015), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2015: No), the process returns to S2001 and the main process (S2000) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2015: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process (S2000) is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a command determination process (S2013) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2013). This command determination process (S2013) is executed in the main process (S2000) (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Determine. Details of the command determination process (S2013) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 43, S2013), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the winning information storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and analyzed. It is determined whether a first variation pattern command is received from 110 (S2101). Here, the first variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the first special symbol. If it is determined that the first variation pattern command has been received (S2101: Yes), the first variation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2102). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received first variation pattern command (S2103). The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in a variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2603) described later. It is used when setting the first special symbol display variation pattern command to notify the control device 114 of the start of the first special symbol variation display effect and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  When the process of S2103 is completed, the suggestion effect flag 223f is set to ON based on the variation pattern extracted in the process of S2102 and the value of the effect counter 223e. Specifically, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (30 seconds) and the value of the effect counter 223e is 0 to 30, the suggestion effect flag 223f is set to ON in order to execute the suggestion effect. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is not normal reach (30 seconds), or if the value of the effect counter 223e is 31 to 198, the suggestion effect is not executed, so the suggestion effect flag 223f is kept off. Here, when the suggestion effect flag 223f is set to ON, in the suggestion effect process (see FIG. 49) described later, various suggestion effects (pressing suggestion effect at closing, pressing suggestion effect at opening) are displayed. Is done. When the process of S2104 is completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first variation pattern command has not been received (S2101: No), it is determined whether or not the second variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2105). Here, the second variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. If it is determined that the second variation pattern command has been received (S2105: Yes), the second variation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2106). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received second variation pattern command (S2107). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2607) described later. This is used when setting the second special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined that the second variation pattern command has not been received (S2105: No), it is determined whether the first or second stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2108). When it is determined that the first or second stop type command is received (S2108: Yes), when the first stop type command is received, the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON. (S2109). From the received first stop type command or second stop type command, a stop type (either 16R probability variation big hit or 16R time junior big hit) is extracted (S2110). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the first stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Are stored in an identifiable manner.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S2108: No), it is determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2111). If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S2111: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received held ball number command (that is, the main controller 110). And the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2112).

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first winning opening 64 and the right first winning opening 641, so every time there is a starting win. In addition, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 by the processing of S2112. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start prize is won. At the time of detection, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. In the present embodiment, the prize information is not held in the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize information may be reserved in the second special symbol. In this case, the value of the reserved ball number counter of the second special symbol of the sound lamp control device 113 and the main control device 110 can be matched by transmitting the reserved ball number command in the same manner as the first special symbol.

  If it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S2111: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S2113). If it is determined that a winning command has been received (S2113: Yes), winning information is extracted from the received command (win / fail judgment result, stop type, variation pattern), and the winning information is stored in the RAM 233 as winning information. It is stored in 223a (S2114). Then, a prize change effect change process (S2115) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the winning effect changing process (S2115) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S2113: No), it is determined whether the first variation stop command or the second variation stop command has been received (S2116). When it is determined that the first variation stop command or the second variation stop command has been received (S2116: Yes), the display variation stop command for display based on the received first variation stop command or second variation stop command. Is set (S2117), the suggestion effect flag 223f is turned off, the suggestion effect state storage area 223g is cleared (S2118), and the process proceeds to S2119.

  In the process of S2119, it is determined whether or not the received command is a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command (S2119). In the process of S2119, when it is determined that the received command is the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command (S2119: Yes), the effect change flag 223h is set to OFF (S2120), and this process ends. Here, when the effect change flag 223h is on, the effect change process (FIG. 47) is executed in one change based on the second special symbol, and the effect is changed. Therefore, when the effect flag 223h is on, the effect change process (or the pseudo effect change process) is not executed. When it is determined that the command received in the process of S2119 is the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command, the production change process (FIG. 47) is executed, and the variation in which the production is changed is stopped. By turning off the flag 223h, in the next and subsequent fluctuations. The effect change process (FIG. 47) can be executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2119, when it is determined that the change stop command is not the special figure 2 change stop command (S2119: No), the process of S2120 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first fluctuation stop command or the second fluctuation stop command has not been received (S2116: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received (S2121). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S2121: Yes), a jackpot command process is executed (S2122), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot command processing (S2122) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that no jackpot-related command has been received (S2121: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S2123), and this processing is terminated. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the jackpot command processing (S2120) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing (S2120).

  In the jackpot command processing (S2120), it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2201). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2201: Yes), the display opening command is set based on the received opening command (S2202), and the pseudo effect change flag 223i is set to OFF (S2203). ), This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2204). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S2204: Yes), a display round command is set based on the received round number command (S2205), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a round number command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2206). If it is determined in step S2206 that an ending command has not been received (S2206: No), this process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

  If it is determined in step S2206 that an ending command has been received (S2206: Yes), a display ending command is set (S2207), the process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the winning effect changing process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the winning effect changing process (S2115).

  In the winning effect changing process (S2115), first, it is determined whether or not the non-electrical accessory 640a is in an open state (S2301). If it is determined that the non-electrical accessory 640a is not in the open state (S2301: No), the game ball does not enter the second winning opening 640, and thus this process is terminated. In the processing of S2301, the open / close state of the non-electrically-powered object 640a is determined by a rotation sensor (not shown) attached to the rotation shaft 640b of the non-electrically-charged object 640a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the open / close state of the non-electrically-powered article 640a may be determined by determining the rotation state of the open / close switching member 902 or the first flow path switching member 900f using a rotation sensor. Further, by providing a magnetic sensor or an optical sensor at a position that is turned on when the non-electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (or open state), the open / closed state of the non-electric accessory 640a may be discriminated. In addition, by detecting the position of a member (for example, the opening / closing switching member 902 or the first flow path switching member 900f) that is operated to open / close the other non-electrical accessory 640a, the open / closed state of the non-electrical accessory 640a is detected. You may make it discriminate | determine.

  Further, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 even when the non-electrical accessory 640a is not in an open state (when there is a second special symbol winning), error processing (error sound) Output, display of error occurrence, output of a signal indicating an error to the external output terminal board 261, etc.). As a result, an illegal act of illegally entering a game ball into the second winning opening 640 can be detected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the open state (S2301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current winning prize is a winning of the second special symbol (S2302). In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not won (S2302: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the second special symbol is won (S2302: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol is currently changing (S2303). If it is determined that the first special symbol is not changing (S2303: No), if the first special symbol change is not executed (that is, the press suggestion effect is not displayed), the skip switch Since 51c is pressed and a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a game method explanation effect which is an effect for explaining the game method is set (S2304), and this process ends. Specifically, in the game method explanation effect, a character “Please release the skip switch!” Is displayed on the third symbol display device, and a voice “Please release the skip switch” is output.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the game method explanation effect may be set when the skip switch 51c is pressed even though the first special symbol is not changing. Further, a signal indicating the state may be output to the external output terminal plate 261 so that the hall computer 262 can detect it. As a result, it is possible to detect an illegal act such as causing a game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 in spite of the change of the first special symbol not being executed. In this case, when the first special symbol is not fluctuating, it is determined that the skip switch 51c has been pressed for a predetermined time or more, or the second winning opening 640 has been entered for a predetermined number of balls or more. A signal may be output to the external output terminal plate 261. Thereby, it is possible to discriminate and notify the illegal act with higher accuracy.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol is changing (S2303: Yes), it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect flag 223f is on (S2305). In the process of S2305, if it is determined that the suggestion effect flag 223f is off (S2305: No), it is not the timing for displaying the suggestion effect, and thus this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2305 that the suggestion effect flag 223f is on (S2305: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the effect change flag 223h and the pseudo effect change flag 223i are off (S2306).

  When it is determined in the process of S2306 that either the effect change flag 223h or the pseudo effect change flag 223i is on (S2306: No), the effect change process (S2309) or the pseudo effect change process (S2308) has already been performed. Since this is the case where the performance has been changed, the present process is terminated. As a result, a new winning is generated again in spite of the execution of a battle effect or a rank-up effect, which is set by the effect change process (S2309) or the pseudo effect change process (S2308). It is possible to suppress a problem that a battle effect or a rank-up effect is set.

  In the process of S2306, when it is determined that both the effect change flag 223h and the pseudo effect change flag 223i are off (S2306: Yes), the effect change process (S2309) or the pseudo effect change process (S2308) in the change. ) Is not executed, the process proceeds to S2307.

  In the processing of S2307, it is determined whether or not the change being executed is a big hit change of the first special symbol (S2307). In the process of S2307, when it is determined that the variation is a big hit of the first special symbol (S2307: Yes), a pseudo effect changing process is executed (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2310. Details of the pseudo effect changing process (S2306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when it is determined that the fluctuation being executed is not the big hit of the first special symbol (S2307: No), the effect changing process is executed (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. . Details of the effect changing process (S2308) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S2308 or S2309 is completed, the suggestion effect flag 223f is set to OFF, the suggestion effect state storage area 223g is cleared, and this process ends.

  Next, the pseudo effect changing process (S2306) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the pseudo effect changing process (S2306).

  In the pseudo effect changing process (S2306), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is longer than 20 seconds (S2401). If it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is longer than 20 seconds (S2401: Yes), a display effect change command based on the revival battle effect is set according to the remaining variation time (S2402), End the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds or less (S2401: No), is the remaining variation time of the first special symbol longer than 10 seconds? It is determined whether or not (S2403). In the process of S2403, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is longer than 10 seconds (S2403: Yes), a display effect command based on the first per-battle effect is set according to the remaining variation time. (S2404), the process ends.

  In the processing of S2403, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is 10 seconds or less (S2403: No), next, whether or not the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is longer than 5 seconds. Is discriminated (S2405). In the process of S2405, if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is longer than 5 seconds (S2405: Yes), a display effect command based on the second per-battle effect is set according to the remaining variation time. (S2406), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2405, if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less (S2405: No), a display change command based on the one notification effect is set (S2407), The pseudo effect change flag 223i is set to ON (S2408), and this process ends.

  As described above, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, a battle effect is set according to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol. . As a result, the end timing of the battle effect, where the effect is started based on the ball entering the second winning opening, and the end timing of the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, that is, the start of the jackpot game of the first special symbol It is possible to match the timing, and it is possible to provide the player with a sense of incongruity. Also, since the outlier battle effect is not set based on the fact that the second special symbol is out, it is a big hit even though the outlier battle effect is displayed, and the player is confused. Problems can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect changing process (S2307) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this effect changing process (S2307).

  In this effect change process (S2307), first, an effect is selected from the effect change selection table 222b based on the gaming state and the lottery result of the second special symbol (S2501). Specifically, when the gaming state is a probable gaming state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit A (16R probable big hit (until next time))”, a battle effect per probable change (30 seconds) Is selected, and if it is “big hit B (16R short and big hit (electric support 100 times))”, the short time hit battle effect (30 seconds) is selected, and if “small hit”, the skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected. If it is selected and “out”, the off battle effect (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, “big hit D (2R short time big hit (electric support 100 times) )) ”,“ Big hit E (2R probability variation time short and big big hit (no electric support)) ”or“ Big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support)) ”(see FIG. 12B).

  In addition, when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit C (2R probable big hit (until next time))”, the probable rank-up effect (12 seconds) is selected. If “Big hit D (2R short time big hit (electric support 100 times))” is selected, the rank-up effect (12 seconds) is selected, and if “Small hit”, the skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected. If it is “out”, the out-ranking effect (12 seconds) is selected. When the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, “big hit B (16R short time big hit (electric support 100 times) )) ”,“ Big hit E (2R probability variation time short and big big hit (no electric support)) ”or“ Big hit F (2R normal big hit (no electric support)) ”(see FIG. 12B).

  Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit E (2R probability change time short and big big hit (no electric support))”, “big hit F (2R normal big hit (electric support) “None))” or “Small hit”, the skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected, and if “Out”, the miss battle effect (30 seconds) is selected. When the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until next time electric support))”, “big hit B (16R short time big hit (electric support 100 times) )) ”,“ Big hit C (2R probable big hit (until next time electric support)) ”or“ Big hit D (2R short time big hit (100 times electric support)) ”(see FIG. 12B).

  As described above, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability changing gaming state, a battle effect (30 seconds) per probability change or shorter time is executed (see FIG. 15B). Since the variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14B), the timing when variation A (30 seconds) ends It is possible to match the end timing of the certainty change or the battle effect per short time (30 seconds).

  Further, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state, a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state is variation C (0.5 seconds) (see FIG. 14C), and the gaming time of the small bonus game is 2 seconds. (Open time of specific winning opening 0.5 seconds and closing time 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing at which the variation C (0.5 seconds) ends and the subsequent small hit game (2 seconds) ends (a total of 2.5 seconds) matches the end timing of the skip effect (2.5 seconds). be able to. Since this skip effect is displayed until the end timing of the small hit game, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize that the small hit has occurred and that the small hit game has been executed. The player is given an impression that the change of the first special symbol is stopped by the display of the skip effect and the change based on the hold of the next first special symbol is started (skipped). Can do.

  Further, when the second special symbol is lost in the probability variation gaming state, the off battle effect (30 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is off in the probability variation gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore, the timing at which the variation A (30 seconds) ends can coincide with the timing at which the off-balance battle effect (30 seconds) ends.

  Next, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the short-time gaming state, the promotion or the rank-up effect (12 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a jackpot in the short-time gaming state is the variation B (10 seconds) (see FIG. 14B), and the gaming time of the jackpot game is 2 seconds (specific winning a prize opening) Open time 0.5 seconds and closing time 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing at which the variation B (10 seconds) ends and the subsequent jackpot game (2 seconds) ends (12 seconds in total) can coincide with the end timing (12 seconds) of the promotion or addition rank-up effect. .

  Further, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the short-time gaming state, a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is the same as when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state, and the end timing (2.5 seconds in total) of the small hit game executed in the short-time gaming state. The end timing is the same.

  Further, when the second special symbol is out of play in the short-time gaming state, the out-of-rank rank effect (10 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is out of play in the short-time gaming state is variation B (10 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore, it is possible to match the end timing of the variation B (10 seconds) with the end timing of the off-ranking effect (10 seconds).

  Here, although the promotion time or the rank-up effect (12 seconds) and the off-ranking effect (10 seconds) are different in the production time, the first half of each production is the same production, and the latter half of the production It is an effect that can determine whether the rank-up effect is an promoted rank-up effect, an added rank-up effect, or an outlier rank-up effect when 8 seconds have elapsed since the effect was displayed. Thereby, since interest can be continuously given to the player until the second half of the rank-up effect, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, a skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is similar to the case where the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation game state or the short-time game state, and the end timing of the big hit game executed in the normal game state (total 2.5). Second) and the end timing match. As a result, the fact that the jackpot game has been executed can be made difficult (or impossible) to be recognized by the player, and it is difficult to recognize that the lottery result based on the second special symbol is a jackpot (or Can not).

  Also, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the normal gaming state, the skip effect is executed similarly (see FIG. 15B). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is the same as when the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, or when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state. The end timing (2.5 seconds in total) of the small hit game executed in the state coincides with the end timing.

  Furthermore, when the second special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state, the out-of-game battle effect (30 seconds) is executed. The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore. The timing at which the variation A (30 seconds) executed based on the deviation of the second special symbol ends can be matched with the timing at which the off battle effect (30 seconds) ends.

  In this embodiment, during the jackpot variation based on the first special symbol, the outlier battle effect is not set based on the fact that the second special symbol is out, and the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is not set. In response, a jackpot effect is executed (see FIG. 46). That is, when the out-of-game battle effect is executed, since both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are out-of-game, it is a big hit even though the out-of-game battle effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand for the player. In addition, when the variation of the outflow based on the first special symbol is executed when the variation of the outflow based on the first special symbol is executed when the outlier battle effect is performed, In the state where the battle effect is continued, the first special symbol based on the next hold is started. On the other hand, in the case where the deviation variation based on the first special symbol is continuously executed even at the time of the termination of the outlier battle effect, the variation variation display based on the first special symbol is displayed after the termination battle effect is terminated. Will be executed for the remaining time.

  When the process of S2501 is completed, an effect change command for display is set based on the effect selected in the process of S2501 (S2502), and an effect change flag 223h is displayed to indicate that the effect has been changed in the effect change process. It is set to ON (S2503), and this process ends.

  In this way, the off-battle effect is caused when the change other than the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped by the effect changing process based on the fact that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, Displayed when the jackpot game is not executed after the end of the battle effect. In addition, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol by the pseudo effect changing process described above, that is, when the jackpot game is executed after the battle effect ends. Shows the winning battle effect and the hit battle effect in which the first half of the effect is the same effect. Thereby, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, it can be determined whether or not the variation of the first special symbol is a big hit until the second half of the battle effect. As a result, it is possible to keep the player interested in the second half of the battle production, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described skip effect and battle effect are configured to be displayed when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, it may be displayed when the skip switch 51c is pressed. Thereby, the impression that the skip effect is displayed by pressing the skip switch 51c can be strengthened. Further, during the period from when the skip switch 51c is pressed until the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, an effect different from the skip effect or the battle effect may be separately performed. Thereby, the display of the effect (skip effect or the like) displayed based on the press of the skip switch 51c, and the entry or entry of the game ball fired based on the press of the skip switch 51c into the second winning opening 640 Inconsistency with the lottery result based on can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the variable display setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S2012). This variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2012) is one process of the main process (S2000) (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2012) is based on the first or second variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the process of setting the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (16R probability variation big hit, 16R time big hit), a process of setting the first or second stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2012), first, it is determined whether or not the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2601). If it is determined that the first variation start flag 223c1 is off (S2601: No), the first variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, so the processing of S2605 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S2601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to off (S2602).

  Next, in the processing of S2603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the first variation pattern command in the processing of S2103 of the command determination processing (FIG. 43, S2013) is displayed in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Is obtained and the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set (S2603). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is “10”, it indicates that the first special symbol is supported, and if it is “01”, the second special symbol. It is comprised so that it may respond | correspond to.

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the processing of S2603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output processing (S2002) of the main processing (FIG. 42, S2000). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, and the special control pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  Here, when the display control device 114 receives the first special symbol display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command in the display area at the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. The first special symbol (third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the first special symbol). (The display is set), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is decreased by 1, and there is one reserved data corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Shifted to previous holding area.

  When the processing of S2603 is finished, measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is started (S2604). Specifically, the counter value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern set in the processing of S2603 is stored in the RAM 223, and measurement is performed by subtracting every 1 ms in the main processing. The variation time of the first special symbol measured here is referred to in the pseudo effect changing process (see FIG. 46), and various battle effects are set according to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol. As a result, during the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, the end timing of the battle effect displayed based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 and the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol The end timing, that is, the start timing of the jackpot game of the first special symbol can be matched, and an effect without a sense of incongruity can be provided to the player.

  When the process of S2601 or S2604 is finished, it is determined whether the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2605). If it is determined that the second variation start flag 223c2 is not on (that is, is off) (S2605: No), the first variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S2609 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation start flag 223c2 is on (S2605: Yes), the second variation start flag 223c2 is set to off (S2606).

  In the process of S2107 of the command determination process (FIG. 43, S2013), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the second variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the second A special symbol display variation pattern command is set (S2607).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the processing of S2607 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output processing (S2002) of the main processing (FIG. 42, S2000). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and receives the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  When the process of S2607 is completed, the measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol is started in the same manner as the process of S2604 (S2608).

  When the processing of S2605 or S2608 is completed, it is next determined whether the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON (S2609). If it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 are not set to ON (that is, OFF) (S2609: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S2609: Yes), if the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is on, If the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to off and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on, the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to off (S2610).

  Next, in the process of S2110 of the command determination process (FIG. 43, S2013), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command is set (S2611). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 is given a stop type (whether it is a 16R probability variation big hit or a 16R time junior big hit). A first stop type command for display for notification is set. Further, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 determines whether it is a stop type (16R probability variation big hit or 16R time junior big hit) ) For displaying the second stop type command is set (S2612). Note that the first or second stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even when the determination result is out of place. . If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred to and the out symbol is set.

  With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed simultaneously.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the suggestion effect process (S2011) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this suggestion effect process (S2011). This suggestion effect process (FIG. 49, S2011) is one process of the main process (S2000) (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the suggestion effect process (FIG. 49, S2011), first, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect flag 223f is on (S2701). If it is determined in the process of S2701 that the suggestion effect flag 223h is not on (S2701: No), this process is terminated as it is not the timing for executing (displaying) the suggestion effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the suggestion effect flag 223h is on (S2701: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability change or a short-time gaming state (S2702).

  If it is determined in the process of S2702 that the gaming state is not a certain change or short-time gaming state (S2702: No), the suggestion effect that suggests pressing of the skip switch 51c is not executed (displayed), and thus this process is terminated. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2702 that the gaming state is a probable change or a short-time gaming state (S2702: Yes), the process proceeds to S2703 in order to execute (display) the suggestive effect.

  In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is changing (S2703). If it is determined in the process of S2703 that the first special symbol is not changing (S2703: No), the suggestion effect is not executed (displayed), and thus this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2703 that the first special symbol is changing (S2703: Yes), the process proceeds to S2704 in order to execute (display) the suggestive effect.

  In the process of S2704, it is determined whether or not the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in a closed state (S2704). In the process of S2704, when it is determined that the non-electrical accessory 640a is in a closed state (S2704: Yes), an effect suggesting that the skip switch 51c be pressed when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in a closed state. In order to execute (display) the closing suggestion effect at the time, the process proceeds to S2705.

  In the process of S2705, it is determined whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed (S2705). When the skip switch 51 c is pressed, a command indicating that the skip switch 51 c is pressed is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed is determined based on whether or not this command is received. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and pressing of the skip switch 51c may be directly detected by the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S2705, when it is determined that the skip switch 51c is pressed (S2705: Yes), the gauge level 223j is incremented by 1 (S2706), and the process proceeds to S2707. By the processing of S2706, when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the gauge level 223j increases, so the area where the gauge is lit up and displayed in the closing press suggestion effect increases.

  In the process of S2707, it is determined whether or not the value of the gauge level 223j is greater than 4500 (S2707). In the process of S2707, when it is determined that the value of the gauge level 223j is larger than 4500 (S2707: Yes), the value of the gauge level 223j is set to 4500, and the process proceeds to S2710. By the process of S2707, the value of the gauge level 223j set based on the depression of the skip switch 51c is limited to a value up to 4500. As a result, the area where the gauge is displayed in the closing-indicating effect when closed by pressing the skip switch 51c is limited to 90% of the maximum width. When the area where the gauge is lit and displayed is limited to 90% of the maximum width, the area where the gauge is lit and displayed is repeatedly increased and decreased between 88% and 92% of the maximum width. Good. Thereby, the increase in a gauge will be restrict | limited and the malfunction that a player will get tired early can be suppressed because production becomes monotonous.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2705 that the skip switch 51c has not been pressed (S2705: No), the gauge level 223j is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S2710. When the skip switch 51c is not pressed by the processing of S2709, the gauge level 223j is 0, and the area of the gauge that is displayed in the closing press suggestion effect is 0.

  In the process of S2710, it is determined whether or not the working port guide flow path switch 800 is on. If it is determined that the operation port guide flow path switch 800 is on (S2710: Yes), the gauge level 223j is set to 5000 (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2712.

  By the processing of S2711, the value of the gauge level 223j is set to the maximum value of 5000, so the area where the gauge is lit and displayed in the closing press suggestion effect is maximized (that is, the entire area of the gauge is lit). Is displayed). In addition, when the value of the gauge level 223j is 5000, a comment is displayed in the closing press suggestion effect.

  Here, the operation port guide flow path switch 800 is turned on when a game ball enters the operation port 670 and the non-electrically-powered article 640a is opened. Although details will be described later, when the non-electrically-powered article 640a is in an open state, an opening-time pressing suggestion effect is executed (displayed). As a result, by pressing the skip switch 51c, the area where the gauges are displayed to be displayed in the closing press suggestion effect increases, and when all the gauges are displayed to be lit, a comment is displayed, which will be described later. It is possible to give an impression to the player that the display is switched to the push-down suggestion effect. Note that when a game ball enters the operation port 670, the value of the gauge level 223j may be set to 5000.

  In the process of S2710, when it is determined that the operation port guide flow path switch 800 is not ON (S2710: No), the process of S2711 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2712.

  In the process of S2712, a display closing suggestion effect command is set based on the value of the gauge level 223j (S2712), and a value indicating that the closing pressing suggestion effect is being performed is set in the suggestion effect state storage area 223g ( S2713), the process is terminated. In addition, the value of the gauge level 223j is also stored in the suggestion effect state storage area (or a value indicating the value of the gauge level 223j and the value indicating that the closing pressing suggestion effect is stored), and the closing pressing suggestion effect is stored. When the value of the gauge level 223j is not changed, the process of S2712 may be skipped. Thereby, since the command transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 can be reduced, processing load can be reduced.

  In the process of S2704, if it is determined that the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in the open state (S2704: No), it is then determined whether or not the opening pressing suggestion effect is being performed (S2714). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the suggestion effect state storage area 223g is a value indicating a press suggestion effect at the time of opening.

  In the process of S2714, if it is determined that the opening pressing suggestion effect is being executed (displayed) (S2714: Yes), the opening pressing suggestion effect is already displayed, and thus this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2714, if it is determined that the opening press suggestion effect is not being executed (displayed) (S2714: No), the display opening press suggestion for executing (displaying) the opening press suggestion effect is performed. An effect command is set (S2715), a value indicating that the pressing-indicating effect at the time of opening is stored in the suggestion effect state storage area 223g (S2716), and this process is terminated.

  In addition, you may change the probability that the press suggestion effect mentioned above (the press suggestion effect at the time of opening, the press suggestion effect at the time of closing) is displayed according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is large, the press suggestion effect is easily displayed, and when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the press suggestion effect is hardly displayed. . Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to easily skip the fluctuation of the first special symbol by displaying the press suggestion effect, and to prevent the incoming ball from overflowing. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is small, the press suggestion effect is not displayed, so that the variation of the first special symbol is not skipped, so that the reserved ball is consumed and the time during which the variation display is not performed may be reduced. it can.

  Further, the content of the press suggesting effect may be changed according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is large, an effect (for example, “push the switch!”) That strongly presses the skip switch 51c is displayed, and the reserved ball of the first special symbol is displayed. When the number is small, an effect (for example, “may I press the switch?”) That promptly presses down the skip switch 51c may be displayed. As a result, when the number of held balls is large, a press suggesting effect that strongly presses the skip switch 51c is displayed, thereby making it easy to skip the fluctuation of the first special symbol and suppressing the overflow of the incoming ball. it can. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is small, the press suggestion effect that strongly presses the skip switch 51c is not displayed, so that the skip switch 51c is not pressed and the change in the first special symbol is not skipped. It is possible to suppress inconvenience that the time when the change display is not performed increases due to digestion quickly.

  Furthermore, you may make it display the press suggestion effect mentioned above according to the lottery result of a 1st special symbol. For example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is off, a press suggestion effect is displayed. Conversely, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the press suggestion effect is not displayed. Thereby, it is possible to perform the press suggestion effect only during the fluctuation based on the deviation that can forcibly stop the lottery result of the first special symbol.

  Further, the above-described opening press suggestion effect and closing press suggestion effect may be executed by prefetching the lottery result of the first special symbol and based on the prefetched result. For example, when it is prefetched that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place, it is easy to display a press suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to skip out-of-range fluctuations, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. Note that the press suggestion effect may be executed based on the prefetched result only in a specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, if it is determined that the third ball of the reserved balls of the first special symbol is a big hit, the skip effect of the first and second reserved balls is continuously displayed (continuous pressing suggestion). An effect of (effect) may be executed (displayed). Specifically, during the change based on the first reserved ball, an effect accompanied by the text “Find the key!” Is displayed and a press suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c is displayed. Then, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters “Obtain a key!” Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the first reserved ball is stopped. Next, during the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball, an effect accompanied by the characters “Open the treasure chest with the obtained key!” And a suggestion effect for pressing the skip switch 51c are displayed. Then, based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters “Treasure box opened!” Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball is stopped. Thereafter, in the variation based on the third reserved ball that is a big hit, an effect accompanied by the characters “Congratulations!

  By executing (displaying) such a continuous pressing suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that is a big hit step by step, so that the interest of the player can be improved. It should be noted that, since the fluctuation based on the big ball holding ball cannot be forcibly stopped, the fluctuation based on the big ball holding ball may not imply pressing the skip switch 51c. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is suggested that the skip switch 51c be pressed during the fluctuation based on the holding ball that is a big hit, and the aspect of the effect is changed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Also good.

<Control processing of display control device>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 65, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2801), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2801 in FIG. 50). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 50) (S2905), the execution of the boot program is finished and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2801), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from the work RAM 233 constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed, and can perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 51, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2902 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2903 to S2905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2901. The processing of S2903 to S2905 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2902.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2903 to S2905 without performing the processes of S2901 and S2902. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the display control in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2803). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2803, then the power-on variation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2804). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2804, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 63A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S4602 in FIG. 63A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 52B), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (see FIG. 18), which are images when the power is turned on, are drawn. Command determination processing (see S3108 in FIG. 52B) and simple display setting processing (see S3109 in FIG. 52B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start prize) at the first winning port 64, the right first winning port 641 or the second winning port 640, and the variable effect. When the start instruction is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (see FIG. 18) is displayed during the variation effect period. Can be displayed immediately and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2805, interrupt permission is set (S2806). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3001), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52 (b), a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 22) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 52B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S3101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (see FIG. 18A), In order to display a normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S3102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S3102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S3103), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3102) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S3104). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S3103) or the simple display setting process (S3109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S3105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S3106). In this drawing process, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S3104), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3105) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3107, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach complete, ) And the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 18) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3109) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 to 59, details of the above-described command determination process (S3102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 53, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S3201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3202), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S3203).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S3204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S3204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3205), the process returns to S3201.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S3205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302). Of the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3301 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S3303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3303, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3304), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3306), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3305, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S3302. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3304, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the process of S3204 (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3206). If there is a display variation type command (S3206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S3207), and the processing returns to S3201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S3207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of big hits A to F, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. The third symbol display device 81 is determined (S3401) by comparing the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 52B) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed on is finally set (S3402).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S3403), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3402 is described. In the task process (S3104) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S3402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S3403, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S3402.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3206 that there is no display stop type command (S3206: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S3208). In the process of S3208, when it is determined that there is a jackpot related command (S3208: Yes), the jackpot related command process is executed (S3209), and the process returns to S3201.

  Here, the details of the jackpot related command processing (S3209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing (S3209). This jackpot related command processing (S3209) is processing corresponding to various commands (display opening command, display round number command, display ending command) for executing the jackpot effect received from the sound lamp control device 113. This is a process for execution.

  In the jackpot related command processing (S3209), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S3501). In the process of S3501, when it is determined that there is a display opening command (S3501: Yes), an opening command process (S3502) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3503.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S3502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this opening command process, first, an opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3601). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3601 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3605), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3604, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S3602. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. After the display round number command is received, the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 16 rounds). If image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. May occur, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in this control example, when a display opening command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that point, and until the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. Thereby, when the opening effect is finished in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the 3rd symbol display device 81 (for 16 rounds). ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect ends before the variation effect that is a big hit ends in the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 ends, the opening effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so the player is concerned that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3501 that there is no display opening command (S3501: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3503). If there is a command round number command (S3503: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3504) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S3504). This round number command processing (S3504) is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3702).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3705), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3503 that there is no display round number command (S3503: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3505), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S3505: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3506) and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if there is no display ending command in the process of S3505 (S3505: No), the process of S3506 is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S3506) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the ending command process (S3506). This ending command process (S3506) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d. (S3801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3802). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the process of S3801 is turned on, Data table discrimination flags corresponding to other ending display data tables are set to OFF (S3803). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of the ending effect by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3803. Can be easily determined.

  Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3804), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3805). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3806), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no jackpot related command in the process of S3208 (S3208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3210), and the back image change is performed. If there is a command (S3210: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S3211), and the process returns to S3201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 58A, details of the rear image change command processing (S3211) will be described. FIG. 58A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this back image change command process, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4603) of a back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command is set to ON (S3901). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3902), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  The rear image change flag set here is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64). In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the back image change command process is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back images A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the current time is determined from the set back image discrimination flag. The rear image type to be displayed is specified, and the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored (for resident use) Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the back image change command processing, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3210 that there is no rear image change command (S3210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect change command among the unprocessed commands (S3212). If there is a production change command (S3212: Yes), a production change command process is executed (S3213), and the process returns to S3201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 58B, details of the effect change command process (S3213) will be described. FIG. 58B is a flowchart showing the effect change command process (S3213). This effect change command process (S3213) executes a process corresponding to the display effect change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the effect change command process, first, an effect change display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4002). Then, based on the effect change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4005), the effect change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3212 that there is no display effect change command (S3212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display press suggesting effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3214). If there are various display suggestion effect commands (S3214: Yes), the suggestion effect command process is executed (S3215), and the process returns to S3201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59A, details of the suggestion effect command process (S3215) will be described. FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the suggestion effect command process (S3215). This suggestion effect command process (S3215) executes a process corresponding to the display suggestion effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the suggestion effect command processing, first, an suggestion effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4102). Then, based on the suggested effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4101, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4105), the suggestion effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3214 that there is no display suggestion effect command (S3214: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3216). If there is (S3216: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3217), and the processing returns to S3201.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S3217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S4202). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S4202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S4202 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S3216 (S3216: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S3218), and the processing returns to S3201.

  In the process of S3201 that is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes). ), The processing of S3202 to S3218 is executed again. Then, the processing of S3202 to S3218 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S3201 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination End the process.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 52B), the simple command determination process (S3108) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying a power-on image (see FIG. 18) from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command. Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 54 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 54 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others For this command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  In addition, when the power interruption occurs during the change of the special symbol and then recovered, the special control message transmitted in S1610 of the start-up process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 described above when the power is turned on. In the process of S2004 of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the effect permission command including that the design is changing, the display control device When the display control device 114 receives the change start command of the power-on variation image output to 114 (reception processing in S2117 of command determination processing (FIG. 43, S2013)), simple command determination processing (S3108) In the simple display setting process (S3109) that is received at Change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d of the image) is set. It should be noted that at the timing at which the main controller 110 outputs an instruction to start changing the power-on change image corresponding to the special symbol that was changing when the power was turned off, the power-on change image is the power of the resident video RAM 235. Since it has already been transferred to the variation image area 235b at the time of insertion, the start of variation display is immediately executed (starts display) in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the power-on variation images shown in FIGS. 18B to 18C are alternately displayed.

  It should be noted that an effect permission command based on the game that was being executed when the power was turned off is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 38), and then executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command for stopping the fluctuation display is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of the stop command. The display control device 114 determines that the display stop command has been received by a simple command determination process (see FIG. 52B), and displays a power-on variation image in a display mode based on the received command (FIG. 18B). Or (see (c)) is stopped.

  Note that if the display controller 114 completes the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 before receiving the display stop command for stopping the above-described power-on variation image, only the power-on variation image is displayed. Is displayed at the coordinate position for normal performance (see FIG. 18A) of the third symbol display device 81. This is because the display stop command for stopping the power-on variation image defines the stop mode of the power-on variation image, and therefore cannot select the normal effect stop mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control device 114 may determine and display the stop mode based on the stop mode (big hit or miss) of the power-on variation image. Thereby, even when the fluctuation of the fluctuation image at the time of power-on is being executed, it is possible to switch from the point in time when the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is completed to the normal effect, and to improve the interest of the player. .

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 54A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3302, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (S3103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 60, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S4301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S4302 to S4304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S4302), and S4303 to S4304. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4304).

  Details of the warning image setting process (S4304) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4401).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4304) or in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S4303: No), the process proceeds to S4305.

  In S4305, pointer update processing is executed (S4305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S4503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4505), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S4506), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4306 together with the warning image previously expanded and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S4308: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S4309).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S4309: Yes), the confirmation display effect has not yet been produced and the decision display effect has been performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S4315 is used to identify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task processing (S3104), until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started, the previous stop change determination flag set in S4315 is specified and the stop effect of the change effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S4316). If the demo display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S4317), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4318). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4321), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S4316, if the demo display flag is on (S4316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 52B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S3109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. 18) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, the details of the transfer setting process (S3105) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S4602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4601, that is, if it is off (S4601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4701), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S4701: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S4702). In the process of S4702, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S4702 that the transfer process has not ended (S4702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to S4703. Also, as a result of the process of S4701, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to S4703.

  In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S4703 (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 52B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 52B) and the simple display setting process (see S3109 in FIG. 52B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 53 to 59) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed, and the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) (FIG. 63 (a)). ) S4601: No).

  The MPU 231 executes the resident image transfer setting process to the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image, the power-on variation image, and the power-on title image that have already been transferred in the main process. All the resident object image data to be resident can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S4603), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the display setting process (S3103) executed previously is used. Information described at the indicated address is acquired (S4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802), and if it is transfer data information (S4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S4803, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S4804), and the process proceeds to step S4805.

  In the process of S4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4802: No), the process of S4803 and S4804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S4806).

  In the process of S4806, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process in S4806 (S4806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4806: Yes), the process proceeds to S4807. Also, as a result of the processing in S4805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing has ended (S4805: No), the processing proceeds to S4807.

  In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807). If the transfer start flag is on (S4807: Yes), there is image data to start transfer, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S4803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4807: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S4809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S4809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S4811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4813.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S4809, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

  In the processing of S4813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The determination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S4814). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4814, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, when the normal image transfer process is executed, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the back image is displayed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the above-described drawing process (S3106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and a transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated (S4901). That is, in the process of S4901, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3104). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3105), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4902, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 52B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the game ball has a firing strength (0 to 90%) that makes it difficult (or impossible) to reach the second winning opening 640 by the rotation operation of the operation handle 51. Is fired. On the other hand, when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the game ball is fired at a firing strength (100%) at which the game ball can reach the second winning opening 640. As a result, even if the operation handle 51 is rotated and the game ball is fired, the second winning opening 640 can not be won (difficult to win). In order to win the second winning slot 640, skip. It can be configured to easily win a prize by firing a game ball using the switch 51c. Therefore, the operation for making a prize at the second prize opening 640 can be another operation, and the player can intentionally make a prize at the second prize opening 640 easily.

  Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible for the player to intentionally easily win the game ball to the second winning port 640. Therefore, in a specific gaming state (normal gaming state), the number of benefits (such as a jackpot privilege) obtained based on winning a prize to the second winning port 640 is reduced. Thereby, even when a fraud in which a game is played so that a game ball is awarded only to the second winning port 640, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game store side is greatly damaged.

  Furthermore, in a specific gaming state (normal gaming state), when the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed in a state where the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed for a predetermined time or more, an error display (sales clerk) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an alarm sound or sound indicating an error is output even by voice. An error signal is also output to the external output terminal 261 and notified to the hall computer. Thereby, the game store side can also identify an unauthorized game method at an early stage, and can suppress damage caused by an unauthorized game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed even while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. Then, when the change display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of being a big hit or a small hit during the change of the first special symbol, the change display of the first special symbol being changed is forcibly stopped. The Therefore, the game ball fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed enters the second winning port 640 that executes the lottery of the second special symbol, so that when the player presses the skip switch 51c, It is configured to be able to forcibly stop the variable display of one special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, during the change of the first special symbol, when the result of the change display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of being a big hit or small hit, the change of the first special symbol being changed Although the display is forcibly stopped, the present invention is not limited to this. While the first special symbol is changing, the change display of the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped when the change display that the lottery result of the second special symbol is the big hit or the small win is started. May be. Thereby, the timing at which the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped can be advanced, and an impression that the variation display is skipped can be given to the player more strongly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the first special symbol variation display, a press suggestion effect (a press suggestion effect at the time of opening or a press suggestion effect at the time of closing) for executing the pressing of the skip switch 51c is executed (displayed). . As a result, the player can be prompted to press the skip switch 51c, and the change in the first special symbol is forcibly stopped (skip), so the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Further, in the press suggestion effect, the state of the non-electrical accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 (that is, whether or not the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c). ), The pressing effect to be executed (displayed) is different. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second prize opening 640 based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c (when the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in an open state), a battle is performed based on the pressing of the skip switch 51. An opening pressing suggestion effect is executed (displayed) that suggests that an effect (see FIG. 7A) or a skip effect (see FIG. 6B) is displayed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the second winning opening 640 based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c (when the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state), the game that did not enter the second winning opening 640 The ball enters the rotating combination 680 (that is, enters the operation port 670), and the non-electric combination 640a is operated to the open state, so that the above-described pressing at the time of opening is performed based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c. The closing suggestion effect is executed (displayed) indicating that the suggestion effect is displayed. As a result, an appropriate effect is displayed according to the state of the non-electrically-powered object 640a (that is, whether or not a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 based on pressing of the skip switch 51c). Therefore, it is possible to display an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

  Note that the press suggestion effect is not limited to the above, and the content of the press suggestion effect may be changed according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is large, an effect that strongly urges the user to press the skip switch 51c (for example, “press the skip switch!”) Is displayed, and the first special symbol is reserved. When the number of balls is small, an effect (for example, “may I press the skip switch?”) That promptly presses the skip switch 51c may be displayed. As a result, when the number of held balls is large, a press suggesting effect that strongly presses the skip switch 51c is displayed, thereby making it easy to skip the fluctuation of the first special symbol and suppressing the overflow of the incoming ball. it can. On the other hand, when the number of held balls is small, a press suggestion effect that weakly presses the skip switch 51c is displayed, and a press suggestion effect that strongly presses the skip switch 51c is not displayed, so that the variation of the first special symbol is skipped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time when the reserved ball is digested and the fluctuation display is not performed.

  Further, the above-described opening press suggestion effect and closing press suggestion effect may be executed by prefetching the lottery result of the first special symbol and based on the prefetched result. For example, when it is prefetched that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place, it is easy to display a press suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to skip out-of-range fluctuations, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. Note that the press suggestion effect may be executed based on the prefetched result only in a specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, if it is determined that the third ball of the reserved balls of the first special symbol is a big hit, the skip effect of the first and second reserved balls is continuously displayed (continuous pressing suggestion). An effect of (effect) may be executed (displayed). Specifically, during the change based on the first reserved ball, an effect accompanied by the text “Find the key!” Is displayed and a press suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c is displayed. Then, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters “Obtain a key!” Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the first reserved ball is stopped. Next, during the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball, an effect accompanied by the characters “Open the treasure chest with the obtained key!” And a suggestion effect for pressing the skip switch 51c are displayed. Then, based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters “Treasure box opened!” Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball is stopped. Thereafter, in the variation based on the third reserved ball that is a big hit, an effect accompanied by the characters “Congratulations!

  By executing (displaying) such a continuous pressing suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that is a big hit step by step, so that the interest of the player can be improved. It should be noted that, since the fluctuation based on the big ball holding ball cannot be forcibly stopped, the fluctuation based on the big ball holding ball may not imply pressing the skip switch 51c. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is suggested that the skip switch 51c be pressed during the fluctuation based on the holding ball that is a big hit, and the aspect of the effect is changed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Also good.

<First Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a first modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed in the first modification.

  In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, the second winning opening 640 is provided at a position where a game ball launched when the skip switch 51 c is pressed can enter, and the second winning opening 640 is provided. Is provided on the right side of the game board with an operating port 670 for opening the non-electrical accessory 640a attached to the open state (that is, allowing the player to enter the second winning port). On the other hand, in the first modification of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, a game ball that is launched when the skip switch 51c is pressed enters the second winning port 640 and the operating port 670. It is different in that it is provided at a position where a ball is possible. Further, in this modified example, in the right-handed gaming state, the gaming balls do not excessively enter the operating port 670, and therefore the rotating combination 680 is not provided. Since other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first modified example, the second winning opening is placed in the upper right area of the game area where the skip switch 51c is pressed and a game ball (see the broken line a in FIG. 2) launched with a firing strength of 100% can enter. An operating port 670 is provided on the left side of 640. In addition, the second prize opening 640 is provided with a non-electrical accessory 640a as in the first embodiment. When the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state, the game ball that is fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed does not enter the second winning opening 640 but enters the operation opening 670.

  Based on the game ball entering the operation port 670, the non-electrically-powered object 640 a is activated (variable) to the open state, and then the skip ball 51 c is pressed to fire the game ball fired. Enter the second winning opening 640 without entering. Here, since the non-electric accessory 640a is turned to the left by rotating to the left side, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the operation port 670 provided on the left side of the second winning port 640. Thereby, when the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is actuated (variable) to the open state, the game ball launched by pressing the skip switch 51c can be more reliably entered into the second prize opening 640. it can. When a predetermined number of game balls (one ball in the first modified example) enter the second winning opening 640, the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is changed from an open state (shown by a broken line in FIG. 66) to a closed state (a solid line in FIG. 66). (Illustrated).

  As described above, in the first modified example, even when the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state (the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is in the closed state), the first game that is fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed. When the ball enters the operation port 670, the second winning port 640 is in an open state (the non-electrical accessory 640a is in an open state), and then the second game ball launched based on the depression of the skip switch 51c is It is possible to enter the second winning opening 640.

  As a result, even when the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state (the non-electrical accessory 640a is in the closed state), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 640 based on the pressing of the skip switch 51c. . As a result, a game ball can be made to enter the second winning opening 640 at any timing of the player, and fluctuations based on the first special symbol can be skipped.

  Further, in the first modification, in order to enter the game balls into the second winning opening 640, it is necessary to launch two game balls based on pressing of the skip switch 51c. Therefore, it can be prevented that the player accidentally presses the skip switch 51c and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is skipped.

  In the present embodiment, the skip effect and the battle effect described above are not configured to be displayed when a game ball enters the second prize opening 640, but when the game ball enters the operation port 670. May be displayed. Further, when a game ball enters the operation port 670, preparation for execution of the skip effect may be started. This is because when a game ball enters the operation port 670, the game ball is likely to enter the second winning port 640 after that. Thereby, the processing load for executing the skip effect can be distributed.

<Second Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed in the second modification. The second modified example is different from the first modified example described above in that the positions of the second winning port 640 and the operating port 670 are changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the second modification, an opening 604 is provided on the lower left side of the launch path 701, and a skip ball entrance passage 606 through which a game ball can flow is formed downward from the opening 604. A second winning port 640, a non-electrically-powered accessory 640 a and an operating port 670 are disposed downstream of the passage 606. The skip ball entry passage 606 is a passage through which a game ball that is launched when the skip switch 51c is pressed down, and a ball entry passage formation member 607 that is erected on the outer rail 62, the guide member 605, and the game board 13. This is a passage in which the width direction is defined by and the front and rear surfaces of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 are defined.

  The game ball that has flowed down in the skip ball entry passage 606 enters the operation port 670 provided in the passage. When the game ball enters the operation port 670, the non-electrically-powered accessory 640a is moved from the closed state (shown by a solid line in FIG. 67) to the open state (shown by a broken line in FIG. 67). As a result, the game ball that is fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed next flows down the skip ball entrance passage 606 and enters the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, since the glass unit 16 forms the front surface of the skip ball entry passage 606, the inside of the passage can be visually confirmed. Moreover, inspection in the passage can be easily performed by opening the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached.

  The opening 604 is formed between the outer rail 62 and the guide member 605 constituting the outer peripheral side of the firing path 701 formed in an arc shape. The opening 604 is located on the outer peripheral side of an area in which the launch ball is launched in the upper left direction in the launch path 701 (hereinafter referred to as the lower left chord area), that is, the outer circumference of the launch path 701 when the game ball flows down by its own weight. It is provided at a position that contacts the side (hereinafter referred to as the left lower chord position). The reason why the opening 604 is provided at the lower left chord position in this way is that a game ball generated near the end of the launch path 701 can enter the opening 604 by its own weight. When the opening 604 is provided in the vicinity of the end of the launch path 701, that is, in a region in which the launched game ball moves to the upper right (hereinafter referred to as the upper left chord region), the game ball flows down by its own weight. The position in contact with is the inner peripheral side (inner rail 61) of the firing path 701 (hereinafter referred to as the upper left chord position). In the present embodiment, the launch path 701 has a left arc shape so that the game ball is fired toward the upper left side. However, even if the arc shape other than the present embodiment is adopted, By providing the opening 604 on the side to be contacted by its own weight, it is possible to easily enter the game ball.

  Next, a configuration near the opening 604 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is an enlarged view of the region LXVIII in the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. On the guide member 605 side (right side in FIG. 68) of the opening 604, a guide member 602 for guiding the game ball to the opening is provided. The guide member 602 is formed of an elastic member (urethane), and its mounting base 602a is fixed to the game board 13 with screws. Since the attachment base portion 602a is covered with the protection portion 605b of the guide member 605, the game ball does not collide. The guide member 602 extends to about half the width direction of the launch path 701 in order to receive the game ball, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the start end of the launch path 701. The game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a rolls on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 and then comes into contact with the guide member 602. The tip of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 is guided by the guide member. Since the protection base is formed so as to cover the mounting base 602a of 602, it is the tip of the guide member 602 that comes into contact with the launched game ball. The guiding member 602 is formed of an elastic member, and elastically deforms in a direction in which a tip portion of the guiding member 602 enters the game ball entrance passage 606 when it comes into contact with the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a (dotted line in FIG. 68). Then, a part of the opening 604 is covered. In this state, the guide member 602 faces the opening, and the opening width of the opening 604 becomes narrow.

  Therefore, when the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a passes in the vicinity of the guiding member 602, the guiding member 602 is elastically deformed, so that the firing force is not significantly reduced. Further, since the opening width of the opening 604 is narrowed by elastic deformation of the guide member, it is possible to smoothly launch without falling into the opening. Then, after the launched game ball has passed, the guide member 602 is elastically returned to the original position.

  Next, explanation will be given when the guide member 602 collides with a game ball. The guide member 602 is configured such that the tip end portion protrudes toward the firing path 701 from a straight line connecting the inclined surface 605 a of the guide member 605 and the inclined surface start end portion of the outer rail 62. Further, the outer rail 62 and the opening 604 are formed so that an extension line of the inclined surface of the outer rail 62 toward the opening 604 is directed into the opening 604. In the portion configured as described above, the game ball flowing down from the outer rail 62 side follows one of the following paths and enters the opening 604.

  When entering the opening 604 without touching the guide member 602, the flow speed of the game ball is decreased by the protrusion 605a for preventing the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 from reaching the opening 604 with its momentum. After that, the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 is reached. On the other hand, when entering the opening after contacting the guide member 602, the guide member is elastically deformed in the direction of entering the launch path 701 by an external force received from the game ball. After the flow velocity of the game ball is reduced due to this elastic deformation, it reaches the operating port 670 or the second winning port 640.

  Even if the guide member 602 is elastically deformed in the direction of entering the launch path 701 by an external force received from the game ball, the protection portion 605b of the guide member 605 restricts the change of the guide member 602. The launching path 701 is not blocked by the external force received, and the guiding member 602 is formed only to the extent that the opening width of the opening 604 is widened (to the extent that the gap between the guiding member 602 and the protective portion 605b in FIG. 68 is eliminated). It only elastically deforms. Even in such an elastically deformed state, the passage width of the launch path 701 immediately after passing through the guide member 605 so that the game balls launched by the ball launch unit 112a can pass through the launch path 701 passes two game balls. The width is possible.

  By using such a configuration, it is possible to achieve both a function of receiving the game ball and guiding it to the skip ball entry path 606 and a function of smoothly passing the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a. It becomes. Further, since the elastic deformation of the guide member 602 is limited by using a guide member 605 that is a separate member from the guide member 602, the guide member 602 is moved in one direction (the direction of entering the skip ball entry path 606). Can be easily changed, and it is possible to eliminate the need to use a complicated technique of making the material difficult to change in the other direction (direction in which the launch path is blocked).

  The guide member 602 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and may be any configuration that does not block the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a and that has a function of guiding the game ball to the opening, For example, the mounting base 602a can be rotated and returned to the origin position by a spring configuration, and a variable configuration in which a plate-like member is pivotally supported by the mounting base 602a, or a configuration using a rotating body that can rotate only in the game ball launch direction. But you can.

  Moreover, even if it is a structure which does not change, the structure which has the said function should just be sufficient, for example, a game ball | bowl will flow down to the ball | bowl launch unit 112a side by providing the guide path which tapers gradually along the launch direction of a launch ball. It is good also as a structure which prevents doing. In this embodiment, urethane is used as the elastic member, but any material having excellent impact resilience may be used, and other rubber (silicon rubber or the like) may be used. Further, the mounting position of the guide member 602 may be on the inner rail 61 side.

  In the skip ball entry passage 606, a projection 605c formed integrally with the guide member 605 is provided so as to cover the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640, as will be described in detail later. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the skip ball entry path from colliding with the operation port 670 or the second prize winning port 640 vigorously and being damaged.

<Third Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed. The third modification is different from the above-described second modification in that the position of the opening 604 is changed and the guide member is removed, and the other modifications are the same. About the same part, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the third modified example, the opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the firing path 701, and the game ball flowing down the opening 604 is directed to the operation port 670 or the second prize winning port 640 provided in the game area. It is configured to enter. Further, the skip ball entry path 606 is configured to guide the game ball to the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13. The place where the skip ball entrance passage 606 of the game board 13 is provided is made of highly permeable acrylic resin, so that the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the back side of the game board 13. .

  Here, the flow of the game ball in the launch path 701 will be described. The game balls launched by the ball launch unit 112a are guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. In other words, in the second modified example, since the game balls that have been launched pass along the outer peripheral side of the launch path, the inner circumference side of the launch path where the launched game balls cannot enter Is provided with an opening 604.

  As described above, in the third modified example, the opening 604 is not provided at a position where the launched game ball rolls, and thus it is not necessary to provide the guide member 605. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of a gaming machine can be reduced.

  Here, the game ball launched when the skip switch 51 c is not on (not pressed) passes through the launch path 701 and is guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. On the other hand, a game ball that is fired when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed) does not reach the game area after passing through the firing path 701, and flows backward through the launch path 701. This game ball is guided to the opening 604 by the guide member 602. The game ball that has entered the opening 604 flows down the skip ball entry passage 606 and then flows down to the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 provided in the game board 13.

  It is limited by providing a structure (skip ball entry path 606) for guiding the game ball to the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 as in the third modification, not on the front surface of the game board 13, but on the back surface. Since the front space of the game board 13, that is, the range of the game area is widened, it is easy to mount a device for improving the interest of the game.

  In the third modified example, the opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side in the launch path 701 and the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 is provided in the game area of the game board 13, but provided in another place. May be. For example, the opening 604 may be provided on the outer peripheral side in the firing path 701, and the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 may be provided in the lower right region of the game board 13 (see FIG. 71). By doing so, it is not necessary to provide the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 for entering the game ball in the game area provided on the front surface of the game board 13. Further, by increasing the distance of the passage 606c passing through the back side of the game board 13, an illegal act aiming at the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 can be prevented.

  In addition, the launch path 701 is configured with a depth that allows two game balls to pass in the front-rear direction (depth direction), and the game balls that are launched by the ball launch unit 112a are one game ball on the back side (game board 13 side). You may comprise so that it can launch | shoot in the state which maintained the space | interval which can pass a ball | bowl. In this way, in the case where an opening is provided in the game board 13, the passage width direction of the launch path 701 can be narrowed, so that the left and right direction (width direction) of the game board 13 can be used effectively. Is possible.

<Fourth Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth modification will be described. FIG. 70 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed. The fourth modification is different from the above-described second modification in that the position of the opening 604 is changed and the guide member is removed, and the other modifications are the same. About the same part, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the third modification, the opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the launch path 701, and a foul ball that has flowed down the opening 604 is formed between the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. Then, the ball passes through the opening 604 and enters the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640.

  The flow of game balls in the launch path 701 will be described. The game balls launched by the ball launch unit 112a are guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. In other words, in the fourth modified example, since the game balls that have been launched pass along the outer peripheral side of the launch path, the inner side of the launch path from which the launched game balls cannot enter Is provided with an opening 604.

  As described above, in the second modified example, since the second opening 604 is not provided at a position where the launched game ball rolls, it is not necessary to provide the guide member 605.

  Furthermore, the inner rail 61 is divided into a first inner rail 61a and a second inner rail 61b, and a gap that allows one game ball to pass through is formed between the lower end of the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. By providing the gap between the upper end of the game ball, the gap forms an opening 604, and the game ball can enter the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 without using the guide member 602. It becomes.

<Fifth Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed. The fifth modified example is a further modified example of the third modified example described above, and a point in which the position of the second opening 604, the position of the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 is changed, and the guide member 605 are added. It is different in point, and is the same in other points. About the same part, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the fifth modification, the opening 604 is provided on the outer peripheral side in the launch path 701, and the game ball that has flowed down the opening 604 is provided in the lower right region of the game board 13 or the second operation port 670. It is configured to enter the winning opening 640. Further, the skip ball entry path 606 is configured to guide the game ball to the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 71). Note that the game board 13 is made of a highly permeable acrylic resin so that the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the back side of the game board 13. Further, since the passage 606c provided on the back side of the game board is provided from the left end portion to the right end portion of the game board 13, a path through which the game ball flows from the ball launching unit 112a to the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640 is provided. It is possible to increase the length, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act to the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640.

  The flow of game balls in the launch path 701 will be described. The game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a reaches the guide member 605, and then the game ball that rolls along the guide member 605 jumps over the opening 604 and is guided to the game area. That is, in the fifth modified example, the launched game ball is guided by the guide member 605 so as not to fall into the opening 604 and reaches the game area. The game ball fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed flows backward through the firing path from the terminal end side in the firing path 701 and passes through the opening 604 provided at the lower left chord position of the firing path 701.

  By providing a structure for guiding the game ball to the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 as in the fifth modification on the back surface instead of the front surface of the game board 13, a limited front space of the game board 13, In other words, since the range of the game area is widened, it is easy to mount a device for improving the interest of the game.

  Further, by doing so, it is not necessary to provide the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 for allowing the foul ball to enter the game area provided on the front surface of the game board 13. Further, by increasing the distance of the passage 606c passing through the back side of the game board 13, an illegal act aiming at the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 can be prevented.

<Sixth Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth modification will be described. FIG. 72 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed. The sixth modified example is a modified example of the first embodiment described above, in which the positions of the rotating combination 680 and the operation port 670 are changed, and the front of the rotating combination 680 and the operation port 670 whose positions are changed. The difference is that the second front cover member 663 is provided, and the pseudo out port 660, the pseudo rail member 661, the second front cover member 663, and the passage port 664 are provided, and the other points are the same. is there. About the same part, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the sixth modified example, the operating port 670 is provided in the upper part of the out port 66, and the rotating accessory 680 is provided in the upper part of the operating port 670. Thereby, both of the game ball that has passed through the left side of the variable display device 80 (so-called left-handed game ball) and the game ball that has passed through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called right-handed game ball) A gaming machine that can enter the rotating combination 680 (that is, can enter the operating port 670) can be used.

  In the sixth modification, a pseudo rail member 661 for restricting the downward flow of the game ball is provided on the upper portion of the rotating accessory 680. The pseudo rail member 661 is formed of a resin in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is inclined upward from the center portion in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball whose downward flow is restricted by the pseudo rail member 661 is guided (flows down) to the center of the pseudo rail member 661.

  A pseudo-out port 660 into which a game ball guided (flowed down) to the center of the pseudo-rail member 661 can enter is provided above the center of the pseudo-rail member 661. The shape of the pseudo-out port 660 is the same shape as the out port of the first embodiment described above.

  Further, a second front cover member 663 that makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside is provided in a region below the pseudo rail member 661. Thereby, it is possible to allow the player to recognize that the game area where the game ball can flow is the range above the pseudo rail member 661. Further, since the pseudo out port 660 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area in the range above the pseudo rail member 661, the pseudo out port 66 is connected to any of the winning ports 63, 64, 641, 640, 65. It is possible to make the player recognize that a game ball that has not won a prize is an outlet to enter.

  The game ball that has entered the pseudo-out port 660 flows through a flow path (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 to a passage port 664 provided on the lower side of the pseudo rail member 661. Since the passage opening 664 is provided on the upper side of the rotating combination 680, the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 664 can enter the rotating combination 680.

  A flow path forming member 662 is provided on the left and right of the rotating combination 680, and games that have not entered the rotating combination 680 among the game balls that have passed through the passage port 664 by the flow path forming member 662. A flow path through which the sphere flows down to the out port 66 is formed.

  Specifically, a left channel forming member 662a is disposed on the left side of the rotating combination 680, and a passage port is formed by the case member 682 that is the outer periphery of the rotating combination 680 and the left channel forming member 662. A flow path through which game balls can flow from 664 to the outlet is formed. This flow path is a flow path in which the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 664 do not enter the rotating combination 680 but flow down to the left side of the rotating combination 680 and flow out to the out opening 66. .

  Further, a right flow path forming member 662b is disposed on the right side of the rotating combination 680, and the case member 682, which is the outer peripheral portion of the rotating combination 680, and the right flow path forming member 662b are out of the passage port 664. A channel through which the game ball can flow down to the mouth is formed. This flow path is a flow path in which the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 664 do not enter the rotating combination 680 but flow down to the right side of the rotating combination 680 and flow out to the out opening 66. .

  As described above, in the sixth modification, a game ball that has passed to the left of the variable display device 80 (so-called left-handed game ball) and a game ball that has passed the right-hand side of the variable display device 80 (so-called right-handed) Any of the game balls) can enter the rotating accessory 680 and enter the operation port 670. Thereby, regardless of the gaming state (left-handed gaming state, right-handed gaming state), it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the operation port 670, that is, the non-electrically-powered object 640a can be opened.

  In addition, since the second front cover member 663 whose inside is difficult to visually recognize is provided on the front side of the rotating accessory 680 and the operation port 670, it is determined that the game ball has entered the operation port 670. Is difficult (or impossible) to recognize. This makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize that the non-electrical accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is opened or closed based on the ball entering the operation port 670. Can do.

  In the sixth modified example, a rotating accessory 680 and an operation port 670 are provided at the upper portion of the out port 66, and a game ball that passes through the left side of the variable display device 80 (a so-called left-handed game ball) and a variable display are displayed. Any game ball that has passed the right side of the device 80 (so-called a right-handed game ball) can enter the rotating accessory 680 (that is, can enter the operation port 670). Is not something For example, a rotating accessory 680 and an operation port 670 may be provided on the upper part of the game board 13.

  Further, only the game ball that has passed through the left side of the variable display device 80 (so-called left-handed game ball) may enter the rotating combination 680 (that is, enter the operation port 670). .

  Further, the rotating accessory 680 may not be provided. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the gaming area of the gaming board 13 can be widened. In this case, by providing the operation port 670 in the lower part of the game board 13 as in the sixth modified example, excessive game balls enter the operation port 670 and game balls do not enter other game entrances. And inconveniences can be suppressed.

  Although a plurality of modified examples have been described above, other configurations may be used without being limited thereto. For example, a member that configures the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 may be integrally provided on the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 that configure the firing path 701, or the operation port 670 or the second member that configures the firing path 701. A winning port 640 may be provided.

  In addition, although the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 is provided as a set, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the operating port 670 and the second winning port 640 is placed in another place (for example, a normal position) It may be provided in a game area.

  Further, the non-electrically-operated accessory 640a that is mechanically actuated (variable) based on the winning at the operating port 670 is configured to change whether or not the second winning port 640 can be entered (open / closed state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an electric accessory that is electrically actuated (actuated by driving a solenoid or the like) based on a winning in the actuation port 670 may be used. Further, the electric accessory may be in a closed state based on the passage of a predetermined time. Furthermore, the opening / closing of the electric accessory may be variably controlled based on a predetermined lottery result (lottery result based on entering the operation port 670). Thereby, the probability that the second prize opening will be in an open state can be changed based on the entrance to the operation port 670, and the variation of the game can be increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved. .

  In addition, although output processing based on various determination processes is performed in the main control device 110 in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, all the output information is the audio lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal plate 261. Even when the determination process is performed by a device other than the main control device 110, all the information based on the determination result is output to the audio lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal plate 261. It is configured to be possible. In addition, the output information can be notified to the outside in an identifiable manner, and as means for performing the notification, various devices (LCD, speakers, etc.) connected to the sound lamp control device 113 or directly to the main control device 110 are used. There are connected display units.

  In addition, you may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  You may comprise combining each or all of said each embodiment and a modification, respectively. In addition, although the sub control devices such as the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are configured, the present invention is not limited thereto, and all functions may be integrated into the main control device 110.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Feature A group: Skip function>
A first area in which a game ball can flow down, a second area in which the game ball can flow down, which is different from the first area, and at least one of the first area and the second area And a launching means capable of launching the game ball based on the player's operation, and a game ball by the launching means based on the player's operation so that the game ball can reach the second region. A launch control means for controlling the launch, a first ball entry means arranged in the first area, a judgment means for executing a judgment based on a game ball entering the first ball throw means, and Display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result When displayed on the display means, the player has And determining whether the specific condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means and a second ball entry means arranged in the second area. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determination unit and the specific condition determination unit, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit is performed for the predetermined period. A gaming machine A1 comprising stop means for stopping before the elapse of time.

  Conventionally, a starting board is provided in the game board, and when a game ball enters the starting board, a lottery is executed, and the lottery result is displayed on the display device in a corresponding manner for a predetermined period of time to display a game for the player. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which this is performed (for example, JP-A-9-308730). However, since the next lottery result is not displayed until the symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period and the lottery result is displayed, there is a problem that the game efficiency is lowered. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the efficiency of gaming in order to eliminate such problems.

  According to the gaming machine A1, on the basis of the entry to the first entry means, the dynamic display of the identification information executed for a predetermined time by the dynamic display execution means, the game ball enters the second entry means. And when specific conditions are satisfied, it can be stopped before progress of predetermined time by a stop means. Therefore, since the dynamic display corresponding to the entry to the first entry means can be forcibly terminated before the predetermined time elapses, many games can be performed in a short time, and the efficiency of the game is improved. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

  In the gaming machine A1, the determination means executes determination even when a game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the specific condition is that the game ball is in the second ball entry means. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it is established at least when the determination result by the determination means triggered by entering is the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A1, when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the determination means executes the determination, and the determination result is a specific determination result. Since at least the specific condition is satisfied, even if the dynamic display corresponding to the first ball entry means is forcibly terminated, the specific determination result can be given to the player, and the game can be improved. is there.

  In the gaming machine A2, the determination means, as one of the specific determination results when a game ball enters the second ball entry means, allows the player to use the privilege grant means rather than the specific determination result. A gaming machine configured to be able to determine a specific determination result with a small privilege to be given, wherein the specific condition is satisfied at least when the privilege is a specific determination result with a small privilege A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, the specific condition is satisfied at least when a specific determination result with a small privilege given to the player is determined by the determining means, so the first entry Even if the frequency at which the dynamic display corresponding to the means is forcibly terminated is set high, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a malfunction that causes a great disadvantage on the game store side.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a restricted state that restricts the entry of the game ball into the second entry means, and the game ball is easier to enter the second entry means than the restricted state. Based on a variable member that can be changed to a non-regulated state that is a state and a game ball entering the second ball entry means, the variable member is changed from the non-regulated state to the restricted state. A gaming machine A4, comprising: variable regulation means that varies and varies the variable member from the regulated state to the non-regulated state based on establishment of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the variable member enters the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to restrict the entry into the second entry means.

  In the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A4 has a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball arranged in the first area, and the predetermined condition is that the game ball enters the third ball entry means. A gaming machine A5 that is established based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A4, by entering the third ball entry means, the variable member is varied so that the second ball entry means is in an unregulated state. Since the player intentionally enters the third ball entry means, the second ball entry means can be changed to an unregulated state, so that the player's interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5, the gaming machine A6 is characterized by having suppression means for suppressing the frequency of entering the game ball into the third ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, since the frequency of entering the third ball entry means is suppressed by the suppression means, the frequency at which the second ball entry means is changed to the unregulated state is reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to reduce, and the entry to the second entry means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A6, the suppressing means is configured to be able to guide the gaming ball to the third entering means at every predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, it is possible to guide the gaming ball to the third ball entry means at every predetermined period by the restraining means. There is an effect that it is possible to guide the game ball to the third ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the restraining means includes a holding unit having a holding unit capable of holding at least one game ball, and rotating the holding unit to remove the game ball held in the holding unit. A gaming machine A8, characterized by having guidance means for guiding to a third entry means.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the suppression means has a holding part capable of holding one gaming ball, and rotates and holds it to the third entering means. Since the game ball thus guided is guided, there is an effect that the game ball can be periodically guided to the third ball entry means more reliably.

  In the gaming machine A8, the holding means is rotated by the guide means, thereby allowing an allowable position where a game ball can be received in the holding part, and a restriction for restricting the game ball from entering the holding part. A gaming machine A9 that is variable in position.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, the holding means is changed to an allowable position where the holding ball can be received by the holding portion and a restriction position where the holding ball is restricted by being rotated by the guiding means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the holding portion.

<Characteristic B group: Disposition mechanism>
A ball entry means that is arranged in a specific area in the game area and is given a predetermined game value based on the game ball entering, an operation means that can be operated by the player, Based on the operation, the launching means capable of launching the game ball with varying launch intensity to the game area, and the operation means include: a game ball launched by the launch means to the specific area. A first operation unit capable of launching a game ball by the launching means with a launch intensity that is difficult to reach, and a game ball launched by the launching means different from the first operation unit reaches the specific area. A gaming machine B1 having at least a second operation unit capable of launching a game ball by the launching means with a launch strength that facilitates the launch.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine that adjusts the launch intensity of a game ball that is launched into a game area by adjusting the operation amount of an operation handle and performs a ball game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-308730). Publication). In such a gaming machine, it is necessary for the player to adjust the operation amount of the operation handle in accordance with the gaming state (left-handed gaming state, right-handed gaming state), and the burden on the player's operation is large.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first operation unit capable of launching a game ball by the launching means with the launch intensity that is difficult to reach a specific area in the game area, and the launch that easily reaches the specific area in the game area. And a second operation unit capable of launching a game ball with strength by launching means. Therefore, the player may operate the second operation unit when it wants to fire a game ball to a specific area, and may operate the first operation unit when it does not want to fire the game ball to a specific area. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the burden of the player's operation as compared with the gaming machine in which the player adjusts the operation amount of the operation handle to adjust whether or not to release the game ball to the specific area. .

  The gaming machine B1 has supply means that variably supplies power for launching a game ball to the launching means in response to the operation of the operating means, and the second operation unit is operated. Based on this, the gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the supply means supplies power equal to or higher than the maximum power supplied by operating the first operation unit.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, based on the operation of the second operation unit, the power more than the maximum power supplied from the supply means by operating the first operation unit Therefore, there is an effect that the firing intensity can be varied with a simple operation.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the first operation unit is configured so that a player can perform a rotation operation, and the firing strength is variable depending on a rotation amount, and the second operation unit is operated by a player. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that a game ball is fired by the launching means at a specific launch intensity greater than the launch intensity of the maximum rotation amount.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, by operating the second operation unit, the first operation unit is fired with a greater firing strength than the maximum rotation, Since it is possible to launch a game ball with a larger launch intensity with a simple operation, it is possible to change the launch intensity with agility and to allow a player to perform various games.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a second entry means capable of entering at least a game ball that is launched based on an operation by the first operation unit, and a game ball enters the second entry means. Based on the above, the determination means for executing the determination, the display means for displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the second identification information displayed by the display means for a predetermined period, A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying; a privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the second identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means; Ending means for ending the effect executed by the effect executing means before the predetermined period elapses when a specific condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball means. What you have Game machine B4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. In other words, the dynamic display corresponding to the entry into the second entry means can be terminated before the predetermined time elapses by operating the second operation unit to enter the entry means. There is an effect that the dynamic display corresponding to the first ball entry means can be performed efficiently.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the determination unit executes determination even when a game ball enters the ball entry unit, and the display unit receives a game ball in the ball entry unit. The first identification information indicating the determination result executed by the determination means when the ball is played is displayed, and the privilege giving means is displayed when the first identification information indicating the specific determination result of the display means is displayed. The game machine B5 is characterized in that it gives a smaller privilege than when the specific determination result is indicated by the second identification information.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the first identification information is the specific determination result when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result when the ball entering means is entered. As a bonus is smaller than in the case of the game, even if the player can intentionally easily enter the second entry means by operating the second operation part, the disadvantage of the amusement shop side is reduced. There is an effect that it can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, there is a restriction state that restricts the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the entry means than the restriction state. Based on a variable member that can be changed to a restricted state and a game ball entering the ball entry means, the variable member is changed from the non-restricted state to the restricted state, A gaming variable B6, comprising: regulation variable means for varying the variable member from the regulation state to the non-regulation state based on establishment.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B5, the ball entry means can be changed from the non-regulated state to the restricted state by the variable member, so that the game ball enters the ball entry means. There is an effect that can be easily restricted.

  In the gaming machine B6, there is a third ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and the predetermined condition is established based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means. A gaming machine B7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B6, a predetermined condition is established based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means, so that the player changes from the restricted state to the non-restricted state. There is an effect that it can be changed intentionally.

  In the gaming machine B7, the gaming machine B8 is characterized by having suppression means for suppressing the frequency of entering the game ball into the third ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B7, the frequency of entering the third ball entry means is suppressed by the suppression means, so that the frequency at which the ball entry means is changed to the non-regulated state can be reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress entry into the second entry means.

  In the gaming machine B8, the suppressing means is configured to be able to guide a gaming ball to the third entering means at every predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 8, it is possible to guide the gaming ball to the third ball entry means at every predetermined period by the restraining means. There is an effect that it is possible to guide the game ball to the third ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine B8 or B9, the suppression means includes a holding unit having a holding unit capable of holding at least one game ball, and rotating the holding unit to remove the gaming ball held in the holding unit. A gaming machine B10 having guidance means for guiding to a third entry means.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8 or B9, the suppression means has a holding part capable of holding one gaming ball, and rotates and holds it to the third entering means. Since the game ball thus guided is guided, there is an effect that the game ball can be periodically guided to the third ball entry means more reliably.

  In the gaming machine B10, the holding means is rotated by the guide means, thereby allowing an allowable position where a game ball can be received in the holding portion, and a restriction for restricting the game ball from entering the holding portion. A gaming machine B11 that is variable to a position.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B10, the holding means is changed into an allowable position where the game ball can be received in the holding portion and a restriction position where the holding ball is restricted by being rotated by the guiding means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the holding portion.

<Characteristic C group: Winning intentionally>
A launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the player's operation, and a game by the launch means based on the player's operation so that the game ball can reach a specific area in the game area. A launch control means for controlling the launch of a ball, a first throwing means arranged in the specific area and given a predetermined game value based on a game ball entering, and placed in the specific area A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a first state in which the game ball is more easily guided to the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, and the first ball entry means. A variable member that is variable to a second state in which it is easier to guide the game ball to the second ball entry means, and a variable control means that varies the variable member from the second state to the first state; Revariable control means for varying the first state to the second state; Gaming machine C1, characterized in that to obtain.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine having a gaming property that adjusts the firing strength of a launching device and aims at a predetermined location in a game area when a specific state (a hit state) is reached. (For example, JP-A-9-308730). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if a game ball is fired at a location other than a predetermined location during the above-described specific state, an unintended prize is generated, which is disadvantageous for the player. There was a problem. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress such unintended winnings.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in order to enter the first entry means arranged in the specific area, the game ball can be entered by entering the second entry means arranged in the specific area. It is necessary to change the member to the first state. As a result, even if a game ball is fired to a specific area where the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged based on the operation means being operated by a predetermined operation, the second ball entry is first performed. A game ball enters the ball means. As a result, even if the player does not intend (inadvertently) operate the operation means with a predetermined operation, the game ball does not enter the first ball entry means, and the unintended winning is suppressed. be able to.

  The gaming machine C1 has selection means that allows the player to select and change the timing at which the variable member is changed from the first state to the second state by the re-variable control means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the variable member is changed by selecting the timing at which the selection means is changed from the first state to the second state, so that the player can play the game. There is an effect that it is possible to participate directly and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine C2, the selection means changes the variable member from the first state to the second state based on a predetermined number of game balls entering the first ball entry means. A gaming machine C3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the variable member can be changed to the second state by launching the game ball by the player's operation and entering the first entrance means, so that the player can By intentionally aiming at the first ball entry means and launching the game ball, there is an effect that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the variable control means can change the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A gaming machine C4, characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C3, there is an effect that it is possible to easily limit the entrance to the second entrance means.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the variable member is disposed at a position that restricts the game ball from entering the second ball entry means in the first state, and in the second state, A gaming machine C5, wherein the gaming machine C5 is disposed at a position that restricts the game ball from entering the first ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the variable member restricts entry into the second entry means in the first state, and restricts entry into the first entry means in the second state. There is an effect that the entrance rate to the first entrance means and the second entrance means can be limited well.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the third entry means arranged in an area different from the specific area, and the movement of the identification information based on the game ball entering the third entry means. Dynamic display execution means for executing a specific display for a predetermined period, determination means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the determination means satisfies the specific condition And a stop means for stopping the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display executing means based on the determination that it has been made before the lapse of the predetermined period. Machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the third entry means when the determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied based on the entry to the first entry means. Since the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the entry into the ball is forcibly stopped by the stop means before the lapse of the predetermined period, the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the third entry means can be efficiently executed. There is an effect.

<Feature D group> (skip notification)
A first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a determination means for executing a determination based on the game ball entering the first entry means, and a first result indicating a determination result by the determination means Display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information displayed on the display means for a predetermined period, and the first indicating the determination result specific to the display means When the identification information is displayed, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, a second entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball entering the second entry means A variable member that can be changed between a first state and a second state in which entry of a game ball is more difficult than the first state, and the variable member is configured to change the first state or the State variable means for changing to the second state, and a game ball enters the second ball entry means And when the specific condition is satisfied, the stop means for stopping the first identification information that is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means before the lapse of the predetermined period, and the variable member is in the state A gaming machine D1 characterized by having an effect execution means for executing different effects depending on whether the variable state is changed to the first state or the second state. .

  Conventionally, a starting board is provided in the game board, and when a game ball enters the starting board, a lottery is executed, and the lottery result is displayed on the display device in a corresponding manner for a predetermined period of time to display a game for the player. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which this is performed (for example, JP-A-9-308730). However, in the above-described gaming machine, since the symbol change period is unilaterally selected and determined regardless of the player's intention, the efficiency of the game has deteriorated. However, if efficiency is improved by simply configuring the variation period to be short, there is a problem that the effects of the game become monotonous and the interest of the game decreases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game while improving the efficiency of the game. Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving gaming efficiency and improving the fun of gaming.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the first identification information in the dynamic display is forcibly stopped by the stop unit before a predetermined period of time by causing the second entry unit to enter and the specific condition being satisfied. . The case where the variable member is changed to the first state where the game ball enters the second ball entry means is different from the case where the variable member is changed to the second state where the ball entry into the second ball entry means is difficult. Since the performance is executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to present whether or not the player can stop the first identification information before the lapse of the predetermined period, while increasing the efficiency of the game. Has the effect of improving the fun of gaming.

  In the gaming machine D1, the specific condition is that the first identification information other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine D2 that is characterized by at least one.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the case where the first identification information whose specific condition is other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed is one of the establishment conditions. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the dynamic display as the determination result is forcibly stopped before the predetermined period has elapsed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the variable member is changed to the first state by the state variable means, the effect executing means executes the first effect and is changed to the second state. If there is a game machine D3, the second effect is executed, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second effect is switched to a different effect.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, since the predetermined condition is satisfied, the production can be switched to the production different from the second production, so that the production different from the second production can be executed. There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D2 or D3, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means, an acquisition means for acquiring information used for the determination by the determination means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means Storage means for storing at least until it is determined by the determination means, and pre-determination means for determining information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means A gaming machine D4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the information used for determination when entering the first ball entry means is determined by the prior determination means before the determination means determines the information used for the determination. Since the determination is made, there is an effect that an effect using the determination result can be executed before the dynamic display of the first identification information is started.

  In the gaming machine D4, the effect execution means executes at least the effect when the prior determination means determines that it is different from the specific first determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4, the effect is executed by the effect execution means when it is determined by the prior determination means that it is different from the specific first determination result. There is an effect that the player can make a preparation in advance by determining whether or not the means can be entered by determining whether or not the means can be entered, and making the entry into the second entry means. Moreover, since the determination result can be recognized in advance by the effect executed by the effect executing means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the effect execution means is more than the newly acquired information based on the fact that the information newly acquired by the prior determination means is determined to be the specific determination result. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the presentation is executed during dynamic display of the first identification information with respect to previously acquired information.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the information determined that the effect executed by the effect executing means becomes a specific determination result is started. Since it is continuously executed until it is played, there is an effect that the expectation that a specific determination result can be obtained by the effect executed by the effect executing means can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature E group> (Skip production)
A first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a determination means for executing a first determination based on the game ball entering the first entry means, and a first determination result by the determination means Display means for displaying the first identification information indicating the display, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information displayed on the display means, and dynamic display for a predetermined period by the dynamic display means. A dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the display unit. And a second entry means that allows a game ball to enter, and the determination means performs a second determination based on the game ball entering the second entry means. And the second determination results in the specific first determination result in the first determination. The second determination result is determined with a high probability, and the display means displays second identification information indicating a second determination result by the determination means, and the dynamic display means. Is to dynamically display the second identification information, and the dynamic display mode determination means is to determine a dynamic display mode of the second identification information, and the specific first determination result and When the first identification information displayed with different determination results is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display of the second identification information that becomes the specific second determination result is started, In the case where the dynamic display mode determination unit has a determination result other than the specific second determination result, the dynamic display mode determination unit includes a stop unit that stops the dynamic display of the first identification information before the predetermined period has elapsed As a dynamic display mode of the second identification information, Gaming machine E1, characterized in that is what determines the specific dynamic display mode for varying the effect of the dynamic display mode of the first identification information being displayed.

  Conventionally, a starting board is provided in the game board, and when a game ball enters the starting board, a lottery is executed, and the lottery result is displayed on the display device in a corresponding manner for a predetermined period of time to display a game for the player. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which this is performed (for example, JP-A-9-308730). However, in the above-described gaming machine, since the symbol change period is unilaterally selected and determined regardless of the player's intention, the efficiency of the game has deteriorated. However, if efficiency is improved by simply configuring the variation period to be short, there is a problem that the effects of the game become monotonous and the interest of the game decreases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game while improving the efficiency of the game. Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving gaming efficiency and improving the fun of gaming.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the first identification information in the dynamic display is forcibly stopped by the stop unit before a predetermined period of time by allowing the second entry unit to enter and the specific condition is satisfied. . If a specific second determination result is not obtained when the ball enters the second ball entry means, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information is also variably displayed in the special dynamic display mode. The dynamic display of the first identification information can provide an expectation that is a specific first determination result, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved while increasing the efficiency of the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the special dynamic display mode includes a dedicated dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and a dedicated dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. Characteristic gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the special dynamic display mode includes a dedicated dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and a dedicated dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. Are included, which has the effect of making it possible for the player to play a game that is easy to understand.

  In the gaming machine E1 or 2, the special dynamic display mode includes an effect indicating whether or not the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the special dynamic display mode includes an effect indicating whether or not the privilege is given by the privilege granting means, so that a privilege is given to the player There is an effect that it can be expected by the special dynamic display mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the game machine has setting means capable of setting at least one of a special gaming state advantageous to the player and a normal gaming state disadvantageous to the player over the special gaming state, The privilege granting unit is configured to easily grant a privilege that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific first determination result to the specific second determination result when the normal gaming state is set. And when the special gaming state is set, it is configured to easily give a privilege more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state to the specific second determination result. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E1 to E3, when the normal gaming state is set, the player is more than the specific first determination result with respect to the specific second determination result. When a special gaming state is set, an advantage that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state can be easily given to the specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game in the special game state can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent an illegal act in which a game ball is inserted only into the second ball entry means in the normal game state so that an unfavorable privilege is easily given, so that it can be prevented.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the stopping unit is configured to display the specific second information when the second identification information displayed with a determination result different from the specific second determination result is dynamically displayed. The dynamic display of the second identification information is stopped before the predetermined period elapses based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information that is one determination result. Game machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the second identification information displayed with a determination result different from the specific second determination result is dynamically displayed, Since the dynamic display of the second identification information is stopped by the stopping means before the lapse of the predetermined period based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information as the specific first determination result, the second There is an effect that the dynamic display of the identification information can be performed efficiently.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the game apparatus has state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states with different benefits obtained by the player, and the dynamic display mode determining means includes the state setting means The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the corresponding special dynamic display mode is determined in accordance with the gaming state set by (1).

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the special dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit according to the gaming state set by the state setting unit. Therefore, it is possible to switch to the special dynamic display mode corresponding to the gaming state, and there is an effect that diversification of the game can be realized.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine having a gaming property that adjusts the firing strength of a launching device and aims at a predetermined location in a game area when a specific state (a hit state) is reached (for example, Patent Document: JP-A-9-308730).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if a game ball is fired at a location other than a predetermined location during the above-described specific state, an unintended prize is generated, which is disadvantageous for the player. There was a problem.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress such unintended winnings.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on a player's operation, and the game ball can reach a specific area in the game area. The launch control means for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch means based on the player's operation, and a predetermined game value based on the game ball being placed in the specific area. A first entrance means to be provided, a second entrance means disposed in the specific area and different from the first entrance means, and the first entrance means rather than the second entrance means. A variable member that is variable between a first state in which the game ball is easily guided and a second state in which the game ball is more easily guided to the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means; Variable control means for changing the variable member to the first state; And a, and re-variable control means for variably to the second state.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the player's operation, and the game ball can reach a specific area in the game area, A launch control means for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch means based on a player's operation, and a predetermined game value that is provided in the specific area and given a game value based on the game ball entering. A first entry means, a second entry means arranged in the specific area and different from the first entry means, and the game ball is guided to the first entry means rather than the second entry means. A variable member that can be changed to a first state that is easy to guide and a second state that is easier to guide the game ball to the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means, and from the second state to the first state. And variable control means for varying the variable member, and from the first state to the second state And a, and re-variable control means for variably with.
Thereby, in order to enter the first entrance means arranged in the specific area, the first member is made to enter the second entrance means arranged in the specific area, and thereby the first variable member is inserted into the first entrance means. It is necessary to change the state. Therefore, even if a game ball is fired to a specific area where the first and second ball entry means are arranged based on the operation means being operated by a predetermined operation, first the second ball is thrown. A game ball enters the means. As a result, even if the player does not intend (inadvertently) operate the operation means with a predetermined operation, the game ball does not enter the first ball entry means, and the unintended winning is suppressed. be able to.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board (game area)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
112 Firing control device (firing control means)
640 Second entrance (first entry means )
640a Non-electrical accessory (variable member)
670 Actuator (second entry means )

Claims (1)

A launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation;
Launch control means for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch means based on the operation of the player so that the game ball can reach a specific area in the game area;
A first entry means that is arranged in the specific area and is given a predetermined game value based on the entry of a game ball;
A second ball entry means disposed in the specific area and different from the first ball entry means;
A first state in which the game ball is more easily guided to the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, and a second state in which the game ball is easier to guide to the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means. A variable member that is variable to the state;
Variable control means for varying the variable member from the second state to the first state;
A re-variable control means for varying the first state to the second state.

Images